data-dictionary

Columns

Data Dictionary

> Common Columns

Common Columns


Column

Type

Comment

ABORT_INST

DATE

When a lot has begun processing on a tool and an event with event_type of ABORT is logged, abort_inst captures the time of the abort. If multiple aborts happen to the same lot, the last abort_inst is used. See description of ABORT ect_state for more details.

ACCEPTABLE_NUM_PER_HOUR

NUMBER(3)

Usually these known cases are infrequent. Enter a number that is above the normal level so that if we start logging significantly more events then we will warn.

ACTION

VARCHAR2(1)

For CHGLOG and automatic HIST tables, this is I for insert or U for updated or D for delete.

ACTIVE_DATE

DATE

The date when a new tool will become active and available for production. There is nothing wrong with keeping this set to a value in the past after the tool is active but this is irrelevant.

ACTIVE_VERSION

VARCHAR2(12)

The most recent version of the route.

ACTUAL_CH_USED

VARCHAR2(24)

Here is where we can log the actual_ch_used directly if we know it. We have three ways to determine actual_ch_used in WIP_LOTS_REALTIME which populates WIP_STEP_HIST: 1) Log it directly in this colum for an event where the logged_entity is the main tool. 2) Log events to each of the chambers used in WIP_EVENT_HIST. 3) Log events to each of the chambers used in WIP_WAFER_HIST.

ACTUAL_DURABLE_USED

VARCHAR2(129)

Actual durable used as logged by the tool during processing of the lot. This can be a comma delimited string if multiple durables are used.

ACTUAL_MACHINE_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

Machine recipe used to process the lot as logged during processing by the tool.

ACTUAL_START_INST

DATE

Time when maintenance was started if it is currently in progress. This should be null for all upcoming events which have not started yet which means that this will be null for the majority of records.

ACTUAL_START_OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

Username of the user that logged actual start occurrence of this maintenance if known. It is common for this field to be null for all records.

ADD_LOTGRP_TO_GP_SUBFAMILY

CHAR(1)

If this is set to Y we split each subfamily into separate GP_subfamily values for each lot group. This usually means that we set goals by prod and dev separately.

ADD_MINS_TO_EXP_STEP_ENT

NUMBER(5)

The purpose of this column is to prepare an incoming lot from being scheduled within the first x minutes of the schedule unless it is a priority lot or is in the middle of a queue timer or is processing at the previous step when we have higher confidence in our arrival estimate. For all other lots that do not meet any of these criteria we add this many minutes to our normal estimated arrival. For purposes of determining the previous step we exclude skippable steps and staging steps so if the lot is processing at step 100 and step 101 is a skippable metrology step and step 102 is a staging step then we will not add this penalty to the expected arrival. Also please note that we must add the same penalty for the entire facility in order to maintain integrity of the order. If we added a different penalty for different sched groups then the lot could arrive at step 104 before step 103 which would cause trouble. Finally please note that we apply the penalty even if all steps are in the same sched group but that it does not matter to the Scheduler because the Scheduler only cares about the expected arrival to the first step in a contiguous group of steps in the same sched group. The Scheduler manages the arrival for all subsequent steps of the same sched group internally based on the scheduled end of the previous step.

ALARM_TEXT

VARCHAR2(48)

The actual alarm text for the fault.

ALERT_INTERVAL_MINS

NUMBER(4)

This is the interval in minutes between email alerts. It is normal for this to be larger than the check interval which means the web page is updated but we do not bombard everyone with alerts.

ALERT_MESSAGE

VARCHAR2(1000)

If this is populated then this record will be included in SYSMNTR_P_MISSING_LOTS view and alert. Therefore we can include anything here that we want to alert ourselves about regarding the assignments. For example, missing recipe or no setup.

ALERT_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Descriptive name should align with sysmonitor view using configuration. Example - ALERT_NAME = CHK_NEXTMOVE is used by CHK_NEXTMOVE view.

ALERT_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is used to determine how long the SysMonitor (Health Check Alert Application) will wait (since last successful run) before issuing an alert and sending text message or email to the recipients.

ALERT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(30)

Descriptive type definition should align with portion of associated ALERT_NAME view that is using these configurations. Example - ALERT_TYPE = scan_check is used for the portion of the CHK_NEXTMOVE view that looks at the recent scan rate of lots using Next Move.

ALERT_VALUE

NUMBER

Numeric configuration value.

ALLOWED_TO_SCAN

CHAR(1)

In order to scan a carrier on a rack or cart in NextMove, the carrier must be in NMV_P_CARRIER_SUMMARY because this view is used for identifying carriers and displaying the info once it has been scanned. This column should always be set to Y for LOT, CAST, and BOX and always set to N for DURABLE and TOOL. POD is normally set to N but at sites where we want to allow pods to be scanned this value would be changed to Y.

ALLOW_MERGE_VALID_FIN_CT

CHAR(1)

Normally lots that finish by merging into another lot are not counted as valid because they do not reach the end of the main route. But if a lot is merged at the last operation then we normally count this as a valid finished lot since it progressed through the entire route. Therefore the default value for this column is Y. If you do not want to count lots that merge at the last step as valid then set this to N.

ALLOW_RESRV_ON_PREV_DISPATCH

CHAR(1)

to allow to reserve the lot to the tool when the previous step is dispatched

ALLOW_RTG_PRDS_IN_OTHTAB

CHAR(1)

We have checks on the configuration of the RTG_PRDS table load as this is critical for RTG_ACTIVE_PRD_ROUTES. However at some older sites RTG_PRDS is loaded as part of another table so this flag causes us to ignore those checks which we will not do for new sites.

ALLOW_SCRAP_VALID_FIN_CT

CHAR(1)

If a lot is scrapped at the last operation then we normally count this as a valid finished lot since it progresses through the entire route. Therefore the default value for this column is Y. If you do not want to count lots that scrap at the last step as valid then set this to N.

ALTERNATE_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

The rack, bay, building, tool, cart, or stocker which is alternately acceptable for delivery

ALWAYS_ALLOW_Q_WHEN_DOWN

CHAR(1)

Normally we do not allow lots to start at the first step in a queue timer sequence if there is a step in the sequence that has no tools available. But if this flag is set to Y then we will allow lots to start even when all tools are down at this process. Typically this is used for a process that we know we can skip but the est_smp_pct might be above the smp_pct_to_allow_q_when_down threshold set for the facility in GEN_FACILITIES.

ALWAYS_SBY_AFTER_DOWN

CHAR(1)

Normally when an entity comes up after a down state we set the ETP state to the proc_state if a lot is processing so that we return to PRD when the entity alarms during processing. However this introduces a risk if the lot aborts when the tool goes down and fails to properly log an abort in which case we will return to PRD when the lot is no longer processing. This flag allows you to avoid this risk for eqp types where you know that abort are not logged properly but it also means that these tools will never return to PRD after a short alarm so we prefer to have this set to N.

ALWAYS_USE

CHAR(1)

If N then we will only use this value when we do not have a valid automated calculated value for the eqp_type and process. If Y then we will always use this value even if we have a valid auto value.

ALWAYS_USE_DEFAULT_THP

CHAR(1)

For some tools (primarily metrology tools), logging of begin/end run times are not possible due to lack of automation capabilities - so throughput is based on dispatch/complete signals. This causes variation and frequent overestimation of estimated processing time due to operator dispatch/complete logging patterns. Throughput estimates can be overridden via the THP_MANUAL or THP_EXTERNAL tables but this requires an override at every possible process where the tool could be used. Now if you set the always_use_default_thp column to Y in EQP_TYPES we will always use the default throughput data unless there are overrides in THP_MANUAL or THP_EXTERNAL. For example, if for the VISUAL_INSPECT eqp_type that we set always_use_default_thp to Y and sch_first_unit_sec to 30 and sch_unit_interval_sec to 30 then the processing time will always be estimated at 30 seconds per wafer. So a lot with 25 wafers would have an estimated processing time of 12.5 minutes. This is independent of what step is being inspected.

AMHS_DESTINATION

VARCHAR2(24)

The destination of a carrier when in transit or when a move is requested. This is an optional input value that comes from the AMHS. It is not where the carrier needs to go which we decide in MHS_DELIVERY_NEXT but rather where it is already going in the AMHS. If this value is blank then we know the carrier has no move requested.

AMHS_VEHICLE

VARCHAR2(24)

The vehicle used to move a carrier when in transit or when a move is requested. This is an optional input value that comes from the AMHS. It is not the cart which should be used which we decide in MHS_DELIVERY_NEXT.

ANALYSIS_DETAIL

VARCHAR2(48)

The detail of the analysis being sent.

ANALYSIS_NAME

VARCHAR2(48)

The name of the analysis being sent.

APF_REP_PARM_W_COLON_DELIM

VARCHAR2(128)

We pass this value to the APF report as the parameter(s). The script replaces colon so we must use colon as the delimiter. This column works only for QE, CLR, CLRA and not ST because the dispatcher handles parameters differently.

APPEND_CUST_TO_PRD_FOR_SCRAP

CHAR(1)

This is a bit of hack to append the customer to the prd column in DASH_P_H_SCRAP for purpose of displaying customer on the Dashboard Scrap page. When that DASH-3715 is completed to make the columns on the Scrap page configurable, we should drop this column and remove the logic from DASH_P_H_SCRAP.

APPLICATION

VARCHAR2(30)

Application that the user is allowed or able to log events.

APPLICATION_ID

VARCHAR2(10)

The id of the application used for joining with other SEC tables. This field is a string field but we normally populate it with a number.

APPLICATION_NAME

VARCHAR2(50)

The name of the application used for display purposes only. Since we join by application_id, this can be changed as desired without any negative consequences to the behavior of the application or its security features.

APP_POOL

VARCHAR2(50)

This is the application pool that the application should be run under

ARE_ALL_STEPS_IN_WSF_PRTY_LOTS

CHAR(1)

By default, we include all future steps for priority lots but loading all future steps can take a few seconds which is significant during the RealTime job at slower sites. Setting this column to N will load the normal amount of steps for priority lots as defined in steps_for_wip_step_fut.

ARE_SYS_PRIVS_TEMPORARY

CHAR(1)

Setting this to Y indicates that the system privileges granted to FPSADMIN are temporary and will be revoked after an upgrade is complete. This tells BLD_PRIVS_AND_SYNONYMS to grant the proper standard privileges to FPSADMIN as if the system privileges did not exist. These privileges are unnecessary at the time but they will be in place when system privileges are revoked.

ARRIVAL_DATE

DATE

The date when a new tool is expected to arrive into the fab. There is nothing wrong with keeping this set to a value in the past after the tool arrives but this is irrelevant.

ASGN_INFO

VARCHAR2(512)

the unique identifier for the assignment to the counter info

ASGN_PARM1

VARCHAR2(128)

Four user-defined fields which can store anything the user would like to track relating to the assignment.

ASGN_PARM2

VARCHAR2(128)

See ASGN_PARM1.

ASGN_PARM3

VARCHAR2(128)

See ASGN_PARM1.

ASGN_PARM4

VARCHAR2(128)

See ASGN_PARM1.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE1

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE1_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE1.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE2

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE2_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE2.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE3

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE3_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE3.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE4

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE4_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE4.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE5

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE5_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE5.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE6

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE6_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE6.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE7

NUMBER(2)

This column is to provide a custom scheduler score based on the tool assignment. Each of the three ASGN_SCHED_SCORE columns will have a separate scheduler rule that takes the score value provided and passes it through as a score.

ASGN_SCHED_SCORE7_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(64)

This column should explain the score for ASGN_SCHED_SCORE7.

ASSIGNED_CARRIER

VARCHAR2(32)

This column is needed for lot/carrier association for NextMove. When a lot is removed from its carrier to process on a tool, the now empty carrier can be moved independently of the lot. At this time the carrier field in WIP_LOTS_STATIC will be blank as the lot is no longer in the carrier however this column will keep track of the carrier to which the lot is assigned. This enables the ability to scan empty carriers on racks while the lot is processing on the tool. This column is strictly optional. All applications including NextMove will work as normal if this column is left blank. It should only be populated for sites using NextMove where empty carriers are allowed to leave the load port and remain assigned to lot(s) which are processing.

ASSIGNMENT_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

this assignment rank will be used in the scheduler

ASSUME_ALL_CH_USED_ON_BEG

CHAR(1)

Normally when we log a BEGIN event in WIP_EVENT_HIST to a chamber, we assume that only that chamber is used and we set only that chamber to PRD and keep the other chambers on the tool in SBY. However in some rare cases, usually on Litho cells, we want to treat the BEGIN like it was logged to the main tool and assume all chambers used and set all chambers to PRD. This flag allows us to do that. Note this flag has to be set for the chamber that logs the BEGIN event rather than the other chambers that we are assuming will be used.

AVAIL_INST

DATE

Time when the availability last changed, either came up or went down.

AVG_CAL_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This is used to set how many seconds allowed to run the parallel calculation

AVG_KIT_SEC

NUMBER(7)

average kit time for pod kitting

AVG_QTY_PER_CARR_FOR_UPH

NUMBER(7)

Throughput calculations like EET, MPU, and UPH all include wafer_interval_sec which must be multiplied by wafer qty. When calculating for a specific lot, we can use its qty but when calculating generically we use this value which should be set close to the average lot size for the facility. This value can be overridden for an eqp type with exp_qty_per_job.

BADGE_COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

This column is to indicate the badge color related to visibility on scheduler ganntchart, and the value should be corresponding to COLOR column in table GEN_COLORS

BADGE_ICON

VARCHAR2(50)

Bootstrap badge icon name to be used to display an icon rather than text. If this field is populated the badge_text column must be null.

BADGE_NAME

VARCHAR2(20)

Badge name associated to the lot.

BADGE_TEXT

VARCHAR2(12)

Text value to display in the badge. If this field is populated the badge_icon column must be null.

BADGE_TEXT_OVR

VARCHAR2(20)

Override text for an individual lot for a badge that is a text and not an image.

BALANCED_BATCH_QTY

NUMBER(7)

When configured for balanced batching, this represents the maximum delta in unit quantity for lots to be considered balanced.

BALANCED_BATCH_TYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

This parameter tells the scheduler whether and how the batch balance logic should be applied. Null means the logic is turned off. MATCH means that all lots in the balance group/pair must have unit quantities within this range. PREFER means that the scheduler should try to meet the criteria for MATCH, but if it cannot be met to add the next best lots to make a fuller batch. The maximum batch size for the process context must also be 4 lots/carriers if this value is not null.

BAL_WINDOW_LIMIT_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Rank to assign lots needing to process at the start step when the WIP balance window limit has been exceeded.

BANK

VARCHAR2(36)

Lots which are not on a route are considered in a bank and the bank name indicates why the lot is off route. Bank must be NA for lots which are on a route. Our standard filter for active lots is bank = NA.

BARE_DRBL_CAPACITY

NUMBER(4)

Maximum number of bare durables that can be stored. Bare durables are durables which are not in a pod.

BARE_WFR_CAPACITY

NUMBER(4)

Maximum number of bare wafers that can be stored. Bare wafers are lots which are not in a cassette.

BATCH_CRITERIA

VARCHAR2(140)

Lots that can run on the same batch TOOL and have the same value of BATCH_CRITERIA can run together in a batch. Therefore this is a critical column for scheduling on batch tools. If BATCH_CRITERIA is not populated, Scheduler defaults to the assumption that any WIP with the same EST_MACHINE_RECIPE can be batched together. Keep in mind that many MESs have additional constraints on batching (for example, that all WIP in a batch has the same SCRIPT_ID) and these must be incorporated into BATCH_CRITERIA to ensure that the batches are allowed by the MES.

BATCH_SIZE_WEIGHTS_AT_OPER

NUMBER(7,2)

the batch score weight applied to the percent of lots that are at the batching operation

BATCH_SIZE_WEIGHTS_COMING

NUMBER(7,2)

the batch weights for the lots will arrive after the process starting

BATCH_SIZE_WEIGHTS_CURRENT

NUMBER(7,2)

the batch weights for the current batched lots

BATCH_SIZE_WEIGHTS_FULL

NUMBER(7,2)

the batch score bonus points for scheduling a full batch - either max size or all lots in scheduler window

BATCH_SIZE_WEIGHTS_FUTURE

NUMBER(7,2)

the batch weights for the lots will arrive before process starting

BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

A bay is a physical area within the building. The bay is important for estimating travel time for a carrier to reach its destination as we usually store these estimates as a matrix of bay-to-bay and assume that the estimated time from any location within one bay to any location within another bay is approximately the same.

BAY_TO_BAY_TRANSPORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(10)

Bay to bay transport mode. If no other mode is specified, this will be the value used to direct wip from bay to bay.

BEG_PROC_INST

DATE

time when the lot started processing on the main tool.

BEG_PROC_INST_OF_START_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot started processing on the tool at the step which starts the queue timer.

BG_COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

Background color assigned. BG_COLOR is in English like red or blue or light green and we look up the HTML color like #FF0000 in the GEN_COLORS table. BG_COLOR must be set manually but the FPSADMIN view BLD_POPULATE_COLORS will generate queries to randomly set bg_color for all values in a table.

BLOCK_E_FOR_ECT

CHAR(1)

This flag determines the ect_state when the best tool is rank E for Emergency. If this is the default value of N then we set to WAIT1 or WAIT2 or WAIT3 based on the number of Emergency tools. If this is Y then we set to BLOCK-E.

BOTTLENECK_CASCADE_RATE

NUMBER(4,3)

This is the maximum fraction of total process time which overlaps with the previous job, within the same data set as used for effective_cascade_rate. We make the optimistic assumption that if this tool were truly a bottleneck, suboptimal cascades could be managed in such a way that they would all be optimal.

BOTTLENECK_TIER

NUMBER(1)

This field is used for scheduling to determine which group should be scheduled first.

BOTTOM_LEFT_BADGE

VARCHAR2(20)

The badge to display on the bottom left of the tool icon.

BOTTOM_RIGHT_BADGE

VARCHAR2(20)

The badge to display on the bottom right of the tool icon.

BUILDING

VARCHAR2(12)

Building is the top of our MHS hierarchy at each site. It is independent of facility which is at the top of our EQP/RTG hierarchy. It is possible for a building to include multiple facilities and for a facility to include multiple buildings but we do not even need to define these relationships because EQP_TOOLS determines this by the combination of the facility and bay columns (since bay points to building).

BUNCH_ID

VARCHAR2(17)

Chain lots together for Goal Planner

BURDEN_RATE

NUMBER(12,2)

Priority of the technician if a priority wants to be provided.

CALENDAR_DAY

DATE

When we choose this day on a website calendar we will associate with work_days of this day. Typically this is the day of the start_day but not always. For example, start_day might be 17:00 and represent the following calendar_day.

CALLING_PROCEDURE

VARCHAR2(30)

For load jobs ending in IF, CALLING_PROCEDURE is the ADM_LOAD procedure which is scheduled either as part of ADM_LOAD_EVENT_HIST_VIA_APD or in CFG_SCHED. This procedure calls the ADM_LOAD_START_SHIFT_OR_WEEK procedure which has logic common to all ADMA+IF jobs. It calls the objects in the ADMA job in a loop. If inserts are made to the table listed in CALL_IF_INSERTS_IN_TABLE then this procedure makes an external call to the IF job.

CALL_IF_INSERTS_IN_TABLE

VARCHAR2(30)

This is the name of a table which must be part of the corresponding ADMA job in CFG_SCHED. If inserts are made in this table during the ADMA job then the ADM_LOAD_START_SHIFT_OR_WEEK procedure makes an external call to the IF job.

CANCEL_INST

DATE

Time when tool reservation or dispatch or perhaps even load or ready for the lot at the current step was cancelled. After cancel_inst the lot is available to any qualified tool immediately.

CAN_MULTIPLE_JOBS_SHARE_DISC

CHAR(1)

For tools that run per disc, we need to know if a disc can combine wafers from multiple jobs (job is usually lot). If N, this means we can divide job qty by wafers per disc to get number of discs used for the lot. For the common case of 25 wafers per carrier and 13 wafers per disc then any lot with 1-13 wafers will use 1 disc and 14-25 wafers will use 2. If Y, it is more complicated. In the same common case, the first lot will use two discs 13+12 then a second cascading lot of the same recipe will use three discs 1+13+11 then third also three discs 2+13+10 and so on. This must be set along with WAFERS_PER_DISC.

CAPACITY

NUMBER(3)

In EQP_PORTS, capacity is the number of carriers allowed on the port, which is usually 1. In MHS_CARRIERS, when carrier_class is set to POD then capacity is the number of durables that the pod can hold, which is usually either 1 or 6. This field is only used in MHS_CARRIERS for pods therefore when CARRIER_CLASS is CAST then capacity should be set to the default value of 1.

CARRIER

VARCHAR2(32)

RFID of the cassette or FOUP the lot is currently in.

CARRIERS_IN_JOB

NUMBER(2)

Set to the number of carriers in the job. The value in WIP_EVENT_HIST represents the number of carriers which have started processing in this job *so far*, while the value in WIP_STEP_HIST (written after the job completes processing) represents the total number of carriers in the job.

CARRIER_CLASS

VARCHAR2(13)

Carrier class indicates what the carrier is able to carry. It is also an important field in EQP_PORTS but each port has a single defined carrier class and only carriers of this class should go to the port. The value must be one of those defined by FPS in FPSADMIN.MHS_CARRIER_CLASSES which include POD or CAST or BOX. This would be used as a filter on what carriers could be selected when a carrier is needed. For example, when a lot is split we need to find another carrier for the split lot and we select the best carrier in the carrier_class of CAST. But if we need to unload a reticle then we select the best carrier in the carrier_class of POD.

CARRIER_INST

DATE

When the carrier was last populated with the event. Since we carry over the previous value of carrier we need to know this to compare to the updated_inst in WIP_LOTS_STATIC and use the newest information for carrier.

CARRIER_STATE

VARCHAR2(18)

Carrier state indicates the current state of the carrier. The value must be one of those defined by FPS in FPSADMIN.MHS_CARRIER_STATES. This is a very short list of simple states like OK or WARN or DOWN in contrast to the complex options available for equipment states. This would be used as a filter/sort on what carriers could be selected when a carrier is needed. For example, when a lot is split we need to find another carrier for the split lot and we would prefer one with state of OK then WARN but we could not choose one which was DOWN.

CARRIER_STATE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(128)

The name of the carrier_state displayed on all dashboards and reports. Carrier_state must match the FPS list defined in MHS_CARRIER_STATES but this display field might be formatted in a more familiar way to the users in the facility.

CARR_CATEGORY

VARCHAR2(17)

Carrier category is used when lots in a certain of the line require a carrier in the specific category. This is usually required due to potential contamination. One example might be that an entire route is Copper and all lots at all steps on the routes must be in Copper carriers. Another example might be front-end-of-line (FEOL) and back-end-of-line (BEOL) where the first half of the route must use a FEOL carrier and the second half of the route might be a BEOL carrier. Whenever a route is split then there has to be a carrier transfer step on the route in between the sections which require each category. To define this, each route-step has a required carr_category and each carrier has a carr_category.

CARR_CATEGORY_RQD

VARCHAR2(17)

Required carrier category which if set must match carr_category in MHS_CARRIERS

CARR_PARM1

VARCHAR2(128)

First parameter to store whatever value is desired for the site. These are often used for ETL of other carrier-related tables so that we do not need to have a separate LOAD_CARRIERS table.

CAST_CAPACITY

NUMBER(3)

Maximum number of cassettes that can be stored. We define cassette as a carrier for a lot.

CAST_EXPEDITE_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Estimated expedite transit time to move a cassette between bays. Primarily used by the Scheduler to estimate shorter transit times for expedite lots to allow for earlier scheduling.

CAST_IDEAL_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Ideal transit time to move a cassette between bays used in cycle time X-factor calculations.

CAST_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Estimated transit time to move a cassette between bays. Primarily used by the Scheduler and NextMove to estimate lot transit times.

CERT

VARCHAR2(64)

Certifications or skills possible to perform on a specific Tool, or MNT task, or Event_ID from EQP_MNT_FUTURE.

CERT_DISPLAY

NVARCHAR2(1024)

User friendly details about the Certification

CERT_SKILL_LEVEL

NUMBER(4

The level of skill a tech has for a specific certification, can be from 1 - 10, 10 is the best, default value 10

CH

VARCHAR2(1)

A single character to identify the chamber which must be unique with the tool. We concatenate the CH to get the string for CH_USED so it is helpful for diagnostic purposes if this single character is representative of the chamber (i.e. A for ET12CHA or 1 for MD27C1) because then the CH_USED string makes sense. However it is not required and if the chamber naming is inconsistent we might get use 1, 2, 3, etc. for the CH.

CHAMBER

VARCHAR2(19)

Chambers belong to a main tool, have a state which is independent of the main tool and other chambers on the same tool, and can have events logged against it. The difference between a chamber and a port is that a chamber processes lots while port is just a location.

CHAMBER_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(19)

Define what chambers will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

CHAMBER_MSO_GROUP_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Define what chambers mso groups will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

CHAMBER_MSO_GROUP_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

This is the counter definition value for chamber mso group. If chamber mso group is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the chamber mso group value.

CHAMBER_NA

VARCHAR2(19)

This is the counter definition value for chamber. If chamber is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the chamber value.

CHANGE_COST

NUMBER(9)

the cost it need to budget to have this change

CHANGE_EMAIL_LIST

VARCHAR2(512)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

CHANGE_FROM

VARCHAR2(100)

the value the process max usagess from

CHANGE_SEC

NUMBER(9)

the time it takes to have this change

CHANGE_TO

VARCHAR2(100)

the value the process max usagess to

CHANGE_TYPE

VARCHAR2(64)

the change for this process max usages. only allow setup, recipe, recipe_family, recipe_group

CHANGE_VALUE

VARCHAR2(100)

The value of the RECIPE or SETUP to ignore. We also have two special values for this field, Missing and No Setup. We insert a record for Missing for either RECIPE or SETUP if we want to ignore the recipe or setup change on the tool when the lot-route-step has no record in WIP_STEP_FUT_ASSIGNMENTS. We insert a record for No Setup only for SETUP if we want to ignore the setup change on the tool for a record with no setup information.

CHECK_INTERVAL_MINS

NUMBER(4)

This is the interval in minutes between calls to the view to check the status. The web page is always updated immediately after each call.

CHG_TIMESTAMP

TIMESTAMP(4)

For CHGLOG and automatic HIST tables, this is populated with SYSTIMESTAMP. This means that this record existed in the original table from this time until NEXT_CHG_TS.

CHILD_TO_MSO_PROCESS

VARCHAR2(100)

This linked to_mso_process will have the same decision as the parent_to_mso_process, based on the link type

CHK_UPD_COLUMN_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Our most important check on the DWH is the check for no recent day in key tables. For a table to be part of this check, enter the column to check here which must be a DATE and the number of minutes to warn in CHK_UPD_MINUTES. 30 minutes is a reasonable number for a table that is part of the 3min load which means we will send warning emails if the newest record is more than 30 minutes old.

CHK_UPD_MINUTES

NUMBER(5)

See CHK_UPD_COLUMN_NAME.

CH_ALLOWED

VARCHAR2(24)

List of chambers allowed using the single character CH from EQP_CHAMBERS. While the concepts of cap_entity (capacity entity) and ch_type are important to our logic we agreed that there is no RMS or EI or MES on the planet that understands these concepts. All of these systems go by tool and chambers allowed and therefore our input tables must do the same. We list all chambers that can run and then calculate subsets of these chambers based on CH_TYPE. If all chambers are the same type then we assume you can run on any one or more of the chambers allowed. If the chambers are different types then we assume that at least one chamber of each type is required to run. If you populate either RTG_TOOL_ASGN_LOT_xxx_PATH table then you can leave ch_allowed blank since it will not be used. However there is nothing wrong with populating ch_allowed as a backup plan.

CH_ASGN_RULES

VARCHAR2(128)

String with complicated syntax indicating which chambers can be used by the Scheduler. For example, (A|B|C) means the lot can only run on chamber A or B or C but not all of chambers. For example, if it runs on A then no wafer from the same lot can run on B nor C.

CH_PATH

VARCHAR2(24)

A path of chambers which can be used to process the lot on this tool. This is a concatenation of the single character CH from EQP_CHAMBERS similar to CH_ALLOWED. It is desired to list the chambers in order if there is an order however currently the order is not necessary and not used by Scheduler.

CH_SHORT_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(4)

Short display for the chamber displayed on Dashboard and reports as part of a list of chambers used. This should not include the tool name but only the chamber on the tool so if the chambers on ET11 are ET11CHA and ET11CHB1 and ET11CHB2 then this field should be A, B1, and B2.

CH_TYPE

VARCHAR2(6)

This column is critical for sequential chamber tools where a wafer goes through multiple chambers. It identifies the type of chamber so two chambers with the same ch_type are identical and wafers can use either one. See comment on mfg_pct_per_ch column for an example. For independent chamber tools where all chambers are the same and each wafer goes to only one chamber then ch_type should be set to the default value CH so that ch_type_cnt is 1CH, 2CH, 3CH, etc.

CH_TYPE_CNT

VARCHAR2(128)

This value is a summarizing of ch_used which we use for grouping of throughput. The assumption is that throughput will be the same if the same number of chambers of the same type are used.

CH_TYPE_CNT_INPUT

VARCHAR2(128)

This is the ch_type_cnt input into the GET_THP_VALUES function, often from actual_ch_used or est_ch_used.

CH_TYPE_CNT_THP

VARCHAR2(128)

This is the ch_type_cnt used from one of the THP tables, either THP_MANUAL or THP_EXTERNAL or THP_EQPTYPE_AUTO.

CLEANUP_IF_FREE_LESS_THAN

NUMBER(3)

If the free space at the rack (measured by total capacity of all locations minus carriers at all locations) is less than this number then we will move carriers away from this station to another storage location with more free space. If this value is 0 then we will never do this.

CLIENT_NAME

VARCHAR2(5)

Short company name of the client. See site_name comment for client/site/facility example.

CLIENT_NAME_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(24)

Longer display friendly client name.

CM_SCENARIO

VARCHAR2(6)

This is the scenario to which the column should be added. Currently, the options are: STARTS, EQUIP, CALC for starts, equipment, and calculation scenarios respectively.

CM_THP_PARALLEL_FACTOR

NUMBER(1)

This is number of jobs that can run on the tool in parallel where the throughput logic does not account for cascading. Typically it is used for wet benches or plasma strip tools. This column is not used by the FPS CM but exists for sites to store this information to use for their own CM. In their CM, they will multiply the throughput by this factor.

COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

The HTML CSS color name used in various FPSADMIN, FPSINPUT, and FPSAPP C and G tables to associate a color with a field. Usually the column name is bg_color. Each of these columns has a foreign key referencing GEN_COLORS which enforces that this must be one of the 140 standard HTML CSS color names.

COLOR_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(6)

The color family from HTML CSS standards which is one of ten basic colors.

COLUMN_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Name of the column in DWH. Note: The column may exist in more than one table and/or schema.

COMBINATION_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

User can use COMBINATION_ID to define multiple different combinations of durables for the same lot/process. For example, user can define durable A and C with COMBINATION_ID 1 and durable B and D with COMBINATION_ID 2, the scheduler will either schedule to use durable (A and C) or (B and D) to run this process on this tool. Meanwhile, if the durable assignment is defined for the certain lot/route/step/tool in this table, then the scheduler will also ignore the durable assignment from RTG_DURABLE_ASSIGNMENTS table.

COMMENTS

VARCHAR2(200)

A comment field allowing a user to document the source or reason of the values populated in the table

COMMENT_EXT

VARCHAR2(256)

Optional comment entered regarding the external throughput value.

COMMENT_MANL

VARCHAR2(256)

Comment referring to the interval and first unit values.

COMMENT_MPU

VARCHAR2(256)

Comment referring to the MPU value.

COMMIT_CT_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

Number of days of cycle time committed to the customer for the prd or bank. This commit is published externally. This should be greater than or equal to the target.

COMMON_END_STEP

VARCHAR2(50)

The common step upon move out where the wip balance limit is no longer applied.

COMMON_START_STEP

VARCHAR2(50)

The common step upon move out we apply the balance logic. Tied to all routes that share the common end and start steps. This is used for both the WIP window and daily input control limit to trigger WIP that is in the window limit and/or counted towards the daily limit.

COMMON_STEP

VARCHAR2(50)

A display-friendly field that groups similar steps together for purposes of viewing the entire line. Typically the only duplicates within a single route will be optional ordered steps in the same segment. But we will often have steps across routes that share the same common step even though exact step definition is not identical.

COMMON_STEP_SORT

NUMBER(7,2)

How to sort common_step when displaying together for multiple routes in the same view. This must be unique for the entire facility so that we know how to order common_step when viewing the entire facility.

COMP_INST_OF_START_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot completed (also referred to as moved out of) the step which starts the queue timer.

CONFIG_DESCRIPTION

VARCHAR2(2000)

Description of what the configuration is intended for.

CONFIG_ID

VARCHAR2(50)

This is used to tell which configuration the current sched-group is using

CONFIG_NAME

VARCHAR2(256)

Configuration key used in the UI.

CONSIDER_BEGIN_M_AS_DISPATCH

CHAR(1)

When set to Y, the WIP_EVENT_HIST_INSERT_BEF trigger will change EVENT_TYPE=BEGIN_M events to DISPATCH when the TOOL is expected to log a subsequent automated BEGIN event (based on EQP_TOOLS_PLUS.LOGS_AUTO_BEGIN). When set to N, the trigger will always leave BEGIN_M events as BEGIN_M events.

CONSIDER_IN_BANK

CHAR(1)

Some sites want lots which are on certain routes and/or on hold with certain hold types to count as in bank rather than in active WIP. This flag tells WIP_LOTS_PLUS for route or hold_type to consider in bank. Please note this does not affect WIP_EVENT_HIST nor WIP_STEP_HIST but only the current WIP.

CONSIDER_IN_POD_AS_ON_TOOL

CHAR(1)

When set to Y, the location of a durable in this pod will be considered to be the same as the tool for the pod family assignment, but only if the pod family is allowed for only one tool (i.e. dedicated pod family to tool.

CONSIDER_NONMFG_AS_UP_FOR_MAQT

CHAR(1)

There are some NONMFG states like QUAL and ALARM that we want to consider as up for the purposes of the Multi Area Queue Timer logic because we expect the entity to come up in the near future.

CONSUMABLE_TYPE

VARCHAR2(36)

For assembly only, this optional field stores what type of consumable is being assembled into another part.

CONTROL_LIMIT

NUMBER(12,3)

The control limit for the maintenance indicator value. Typically when the current value has hit the control limit, the tool or chamber will not be able to process additional material.

COORD_X

NUMBER(2)

This is the x coordinate position of the location within its station, in other words horizontal position. The maximum coord_x is the width of the station. This is optional and is often used for racks and sometimes for carts so we can determine the exact position of the carrier to make it easier to find.

COORD_Y

NUMBER(2)

This is the y coordinate position of the location within its station, in other words vertical position or shelf number. The maximum coord_y is the height of the station. This is optional and is often used for racks and sometimes for carts so we can determine the exact position of the carrier to make it easier to find.

COORD_Z

NUMBER(1)

This is the z coordinate position of the location within its station, in other words front-to-back position. This is usually 1. The maximum coord_z is the depth of the station. This is optional and is often used for racks and sometimes for carts so we can determine the exact position of the carrier to make it easier to find.

COPY_AS_TXT

CHAR(1)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

COPY_TO_ARCHIVE

CHAR(1)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

CORRESPONDING_START_WORK_MONTH

DATE

This is the start of the work month which most closely corresponds with this plan month. We prefer that plan and work calendars are identical so this would be equal to start_plan_month but if they are off we need to be able to match them as close as possible using this field.

CORRESPONDING_START_WORK_WEEK

DATE

This is the start of the work week which most closely corresponds with this plan week. We prefer that plan and work calendars are identical so this would be equal to start_plan_week but if they are off we need to be able to match them as close as possible using this field.

COST_PER_JOB

NUMBER(6)

Cost to process each job on a tool in this eqp type. In WIP_STEP_HIST we use this and cost per unit to record cost per lot after each complete on a tool.

COST_PER_UNIT

NUMBER(6)

Cost to process each unit on a tool in this eqp type. In WIP_STEP_HIST we use this and cost per job to record cost per lot after each complete on a tool.

COUNTER_CHG_PER_DAY

NUMBER(13,4)

Average change in the counter per day calculated by linear regression and used to estimate the time for a counter-based maintenance

COUNTER_CHG_STD_DEV

NUMBER(13,4)

Standard deviation is a measure of fit to the line. A lower value means a better fit.

COUNTER_CURR

NUMBER(12,3)

Current counter value read at counter_read_inst

COUNTER_DUE

NUMBER(12,3)

Counter value when the maintenance event will be due or expected. See `counter_early` and `counter_late` for the window of values in which the maintenance can be performed.

COUNTER_EARLY

NUMBER(12,3)

Counter value when the maintenance event will be early

COUNTER_EFFECTIVE_EVENT

VARCHAR2(5)

used for scheduler to indicate the what was the event that the counter was counted only three options now: 1. disp, it means the counter was counted at the time the lot dispatched to the tool 2. proc, it means the counter was counted at the time the lot process started on the tool 3. ended, it means the counter was counted at the time the lot process ended on the tool, default value

COUNTER_FOR_COMPARE

NUMBER(12,3)

The counter value used for comparing to the due date, this could either be the counter_curr or the counter_pre_reset_value, but should be more reliable than either of the two independently.

COUNTER_INFO

VARCHAR2(512)

the unique identifier for the counter associated with this assignment

COUNTER_INST_PERCENTILE

NUMBER(6,5)

Tolerance for use in prediction when counter based events will come do. Higher number means that a larger range of values will be included. Smaller values mean that the prediction will be more strict on the values to include in the estimation.

COUNTER_INTERVAL

NUMBER(12,3)

Indicates the frequency of future occurrences of this maintenance. For example, a qual required every 250 wafers will be listed once with counter_due set to the next occurrence and `counter_interval` set to 250 so we know to plan for it to occur again 250, 500, 750, etc. wafers after the counter_due.

COUNTER_LATE

NUMBER(12,3)

Counter value when the maintenance event will be late. In most systems, the entity in question will be mandatorily logged down if the maintenance is not started before the counter reaches this value.

COUNTER_LEFT

NUMBER(5)

the current available amount left of this counter

COUNTER_MAX

NUMBER(5)

the maximum usage of this counter

COUNTER_MSG

VARCHAR2(512)

the counter message on the durable

COUNTER_NAME

VARCHAR2(64)

Name of the counter used for this maintenance event.

COUNTER_PRE_RESET_INST

DATE

The inst the last time the counter value was reset.

COUNTER_PRE_RESET_VALUE

NUMBER(12,3)

If a counter has been reset recently then this will be the min or max value depending on the counter direction before the counter was reset. A null value means that there were no resets within the min_used_counter_read_inst

COUNTER_READ_INST

DATE

Time when the current counter value was reported.

COUNTER_UNITS

VARCHAR2(18)

Unit for the maintenance counter. Common examples include wafers or hours or kWh.

COUNTER_UNIT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(32)

the counter unit, can be wafer, lot, second, job

COUNTER_UNIT_WEIGHTS

NUMBER(3)

the weights will consume per each unit

COUNTER_VALUE

NUMBER(12,3)

Value of the counter at the inst.

COUNTER_VALUE_PERCENTILE

NUMBER(6,5)

See comment on COUNTER_INST_PERCENTILE, same idea but for the value.

COUNT_ALL_SHIPS_VALID_FIN_CT

CHAR(1)

Normally we do not count lots that have skipped the first operation as valid for finished lot CT. This configuration allows the user to count all shipped lots for FLCT even if they skipped the first operation.

COUNT_AS_COMP_IF_PROCESSED

CHAR(1)

By default we count a move of any event as a COMP if the lot processed on a tool during the step so the default value of this field is Y. But some facilities prefer to only count certain events so setting this to N means that a move of this event is never counted as COMP.

COUNT_AS_LONG_HOLD_FOR_CTM

CHAR(1)

When this flag is set to Y, time on hold in this hold_group is bucketed into the Long Hold process state to be grouped separately from the normal Hold time on CTA and FLCT.

COUNT_AS_OPER_MOVE

CHAR(1)

If the use_count_as_oper_move_flag is set to Y in GEN_FACILITIES then we use this flag to determine oper moves instead of using moves from one operation to another.

COUNT_JUMP_AS_ISKIP

CHAR(1)

Most sites want to count jumps recorded in WIP_JUMP_HIST with the move_type of ISKIP. But some sites specifically record their skips in WIP_EVENT_HIST and do not want to count jumps. This causes us to ignore jumps for these sites that set it to N.

COUNT_MV_TO_BANK_AS_OPER_MOVE

CHAR(1)

Some facilities count moves to bank as oper moves and some do not. The default when this flag is N is to not count these so set to Y if you wish to count them.

COUNT_SHIP_AS_OPER_MOVE

CHAR(1)

When is_ship_event is set to Y then the normal oper moves logic is ignored and we only use these two COUNT_SHIP flags. If the ship results in a qty greater than zero then we use this flag. Ships that also set qty to 0 and therefore terminate the lot are subject to COUNT_SHIP_TO_ZERO_AS_OPER_MV

COUNT_SHIP_TO_ZERO_AS_OPER_MV

CHAR(1)

Normally we do not count any move that results in terminating the lot as an oper move. However ships can be the exception to this rule. If this flag is Y then moves where is_ship_event is Y and qty is 0 are counted as an oper move.

COUNT_UDT_TO_PM_AS_FTR

CHAR(1)

When determining if a PM was performed first time right this flag will change if determine if a PM that is done to resolve a UDT counts as part of FTR or not. Specifically the GTG window has to start in a UDT state and then go directly to an SDT state that is a PM. Y means that the SDT PM will be evaluated for FTR, if N then FTR will be null, aka not evaluated.

CREATED_INST

DATE

Time when the lot was created, either lot start or split.

CRITICAL_RATIO

NUMBER(5,3)

The critical ratio (days until due / days of CT left) for the lot

CRITICAL_TOOL_HOURS

NUMBER(5)

to determine how many hours to calculate the critical tool score; when set to 6 ours, then the scheduler will only look into how many tool are available within 6 hours and how many lots will be able to run within 6 hours

CS_SORT_IN_RT_FAM_SEG

NUMBER(7

The full name of this column is override to common step sort within route family and route segment.

CTA_MIN_ACTIVE_NUM_LOTS_BY_PRD

NUMBER(2)

To reduce the size of CTA tables, we filter low runner prds where the number of active lots (not test wafers and not in bank) is less than this number. The default is 1 which means we keep all prds with any active lots. Setting this to 2 means we filter out prds with just a single active lot. Setting this to 0 means we keep all prds even without any active lots which may be desired at smaller sites. We count by prd rather than route so we are not affected by rework routes.

CTM_COLUMN_FOR_CRIT_RATIO

VARCHAR2(30)

This tells our Critical Ratio logic which column to use to estimate expected days remaining. We recommend using FIFO for Critical Ratio because this column is not impacted by the desired cycle time for the prd or route and therefore the highest priority lots will have the highest Critical Ratio. COMMIT and TARGET are also allowed.

CTM_COLUMN_FOR_DAYS_BEHIND

VARCHAR2(30)

This tells our Days Behind logic which column to use to estimate expected days remaining. We recommend using COMMIT for Days Behind because then a lot which is perfectly paced on its Commit cycle time plan will show 0 days behind. Note that does not necessarily mean that it should be prioritized ahead of another lot which is 1 day behind because the other lot might have a much slower expectation. Using FIFO would always prioritize the highest priority lots but it would show lots that are progressing evenly but driven to a faster cycle time as behind. TARGET is also allowed.

CTM_COLUMN_FOR_EST_SMP_PCT

VARCHAR2(30)

This tells our CTM_SUMMARY logic which column to use to estimate sampling percentage. This is either FULL or LONG or 7D. The Dashboard hover message shows this configuration but it is not linked so if you change this column then you need to update DASH_C_CATEGORY_TABLE_COLS to match using the query from DWH-2030.

CTM_COLUMN_FOR_WIP_STEP_FUT

VARCHAR2(30)

This tells our WIP_STEP_FUTURE logic which column to use from CTM_SUMMARY to estimate cycle time to future steps. FULL and LONG are configurable in GEN_FACILITIES but usually 4 weeks and 2 weeks except for small fabs where we make them longer. These as well as 7D and 2D are weighted averages for only time during the period. TARGET and COMMIT are two varieties of plan cycle time. The total for each prd is set by the client via ETL in RTG_PRDS then we adjust the wait time of each step so that the total CT adds up to the total for the prd in a reasonably intelligent balance based on the history. For example, if history was 20 days proc and 50 days wait and commit is 60 then we multiply the wait time of each step by 4/5 so the total wait adds up to 40 and the total cycle time adds up to the commit value of 60. FIFO is the average for the entire process family so this represents what the cycle time would be if we ran the entire fab in FIFO order without any priority.

CTM_FACTOR

NUMBER(3,2)

Factor to multiply cycle time for this lot group compared to other groups if not known. For example, if this factor is 1.5 and we know the CTM is 6 hours for another lot group whose factor is 1.0 then we would estimate it to be 9 hours for this lot group.

CTM_FIN_PERIOD_MONTH_OR_WEEK

VARCHAR2(5)

Most sites uses our standard progression of recent months then quarters then years as the periods in Finished Lot Cycle Time but some sites prefer to use weeks. Therefore the default value here is MONTH but sites using weeks will set to WEEK.

CTM_FORECAST_COMMIT_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

This column has the same meaning as COMMIT_CT_DAYS but it is a forecasted value starting at a specified time in the future.

CTM_FORECAST_TARGET_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

This column has the same meaning as TARGET_CT_DAYS but it is a forecasted value starting at a specified time in the future.

CTM_FULL_WINDOW_WEEKS

NUMBER(3)

Number of weeks covered by full cycle time columns, e.g. step_sec_wavg_full. Please note this includes the current week-to-date so a value of 4 means the last 4 weeks plus the current week-to-date and therefore will range from 28 to 35 days. Our default for this is 4 weeks but some smaller facilities might prefer an extended window. This should be coordinated with ctm_long_window_weeks.

CTM_IDEAL_TRANSIT_CALC_TYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

The type of calculation used to determine ideal transit time for cycle time X-factor. Best bay means we pick the most likely bay a lot would go to between steps based on the tool ranks assigned generically in the flow but not specifically for the lot. Wavg bay means we take the weighted average of all delivery time options between steps based on how many tools are allowed in each bay. For both calculations, if there is an option to stay in the same bay between steps then the intrabay delivery time is always used.

CTM_LONG_WINDOW_WEEKS

NUMBER(2)

Number of weeks covered by long cycle time columns, e.g. step_sec_wavg_long. Please note this includes the current week-to-date so a value of 2 means the last 2 weeks plus the current week-to-date and therefore will range from 14 to 21 days. Our default for this is 2 weeks but some smaller facilities might prefer an extended window. This should be coordinated with ctm_full_window_weeks.

CTM_SERIES

VARCHAR2(64)

This is a grouping across facilities for our Finished Lot Cycle Time application indicating prds which make up the same or similar final product to be shipped. Prds are allowed to be in multiple series - for example when a generic prd A is assembled together with various specific prds B1, B2, B3.

CTM_VALID_LOTS_2D

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the 2 day period required for 2 day cycle time to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

CTM_VALID_LOTS_7D

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the 7 day period required for 7 day cycle time to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

CTM_VALID_LOTS_FULL

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the number of weeks defined in ctm_full_window_weeks required for full cycle time to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

CTM_VALID_LOTS_LONG

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the number of weeks defined in ctm_long_window_weeks required for long cycle time to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

CTR_BANK1

VARCHAR2(36)

In Finished Lot Cycle Time we divide the time within a facility by process state like PROC, HOLD, etc. but for banks we can use these columns to have specific common banks be their own process state for this grouping. So rather than just seeing the average time in bank if we populate this with FAB-OUT then we can see the average time in the FAB-OUT bank separately.

CTR_BANK2

VARCHAR2(36)

See comment for CTR_BANK1.

CTR_BANK3

VARCHAR2(36)

See comment for CTR_BANK1.

CTR_BANK4

VARCHAR2(36)

See comment for CTR_BANK1.

CTR_BANK5

VARCHAR2(36)

See comment for CTR_BANK1.

CUM_PLANPRD_QTY_EOL

NUMBER(15,1)

Cumulative qty for the specified planprd of the specified main route or bank. This counts from the finish so if we have a several lots with 25 units then the closest to the finish would be 25 and the next closest would be 50 then 75 and so on. We match this with the demand for the prd to determine when each lot is needed to meet demand.

CURRENT_HEALTH

NUMBER(4,3)

The current measurement of health from -3 to 3.

CURRENT_VALUE

NUMBER(12,3)

The current numeric value of the maintenance indicator.

CURR_BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

Current bay of carrier. See column comment on BAY in FPSINPUT.MHS_BAYS for more information.

CURR_BUILDING

VARCHAR2(12)

Current building of carrier. See column comment on BUILDING in FPSINPUT.MHS_BUILDINGS for more information.

CURR_COMP_TO_EARLIEST_ARRV_SEC

NUMBER(10)

The comment on CURR_COMP_TO_EXPECTED_ARRV_SEC applies here too. The only difference is that this column is what we consider the earliest possible arrival rather than the expected arrival.

CURR_COMP_TO_EXPECTED_ARRV_SEC

NUMBER(10)

We use this numeric field rather than the date field EXPECTED_ARRV_INST but the date field depends on the estimated complete of the current step which depends on the current time. Therefore in order for EXPECTED_ARRV_INST to be accurate we would have to change it every second! Instead we use this field to store the seconds from the complete of the current step to the arrival which only needs to be updated when the lot changes steps. Then we do the calculations to get EXPECTED_ARRV_INST using the current time in the WIP_STEP_FUTURE_PLUS view. For all steps which are one step away, this value is always 0 which makes sense because the complete of the current step is the same as the arrival of the next step.

CURR_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

Current facility of the lot.

CURR_FAC_BANK

VARCHAR2(36)

Current bank of the lot (NA if lot is currently on a route).

CURR_FAC_PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

Current product of the lot.

CURR_FAC_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

Current main route of the lot (NA if lot is currently in a bank).

CURR_FAC_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Current step of the lot on its current main route (NA if lot is currently in a bank).

CURR_LOC

VARCHAR2(32)

Current location of carrier. See column comment on LOCATION in FPSINPUT.MHS_RACK_LOCATIONS for more information.

CURR_LOCATION

VARCHAR2(32)

store the curr location of the lot

CURR_LOC_TYPE

VARCHAR2(64)

Current location type of carrier. See view MHS_LOCATIONS for more information.

CURR_NUM_RUNS_FAIL

NUMBER(8)

WILL REMOVE SOON

CURR_NUM_RUNS_SUCCESS

NUMBER(8)

WILL REMOVE SOON

CURR_OFFROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

If the current route of the lot is not the same as the main route then the lot is offroute and this is the current route.

CURR_OFFRT_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

If the current route of the lot is not the same as the main route then the lot is offroute and this is the current step.

CURR_PATTERN

VARCHAR2(2000)

the comma delimited history of process sequences run on the tool. see table comments for ground rules

CURR_PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(7)

The priority at the current step. As the lot moves along the route after LAST_STEP_CURR_PRTY it will revert to PLAN_PRIORITY. For example, timelink or sendahead priority is only temporary.

CURR_PRIORITY_REASON

VARCHAR2(128)

An optional description of why the priority is set as it is. This is typically shown as additional information on pages related to priority lots.

CURR_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Current qty of the lot using quantity unit of the current facility.

CURR_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Current rank is dynamically calculated based on the permanent rank, temporary rank, external rank, and current conditions like tool status and current setup. Cases when it is greater than permanent rank include when the required setup does not match or when APC thread is not qualified. The only way it could be less are when either the temporary rank or external rank are set. Curr_rank is populated in WIP_EVENT_HIST for each event logged to a tool by trigger with the value from WIP_STEP_FUT_ASSIGNMENTS at the time of the event.

CURR_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

The current/last used recipe for the scheduler, incorporating the ignore capability from EQP_PROCESS_CHG_TO_IGNORE

CURR_RECIPE_INST

DATE

The beg processing timestamp associated with CURR_RECIPE

CURR_RUN_MODE

VARCHAR2(36)

WILL REMOVE SOON

CURR_SEC_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Current secondary qty of the lot using secondary quantity unit of the current facility.

CURR_SETUP

VARCHAR2(100)

The current setup of the entity. This can be set by a lot processing event from WIP_EVENT_HIST or by an event on the entity from EQP_EVENT_HIST. For example if an Implant tool processes a Boron lot then the curr_setup will be Boron. Or if an event is logged to the tool that says the setup changed to Boron then the curr_setup will be Boron. Please note that the curr_setup value populated in EQP_EVENT_HIST must match exactly with the rqd_setup value in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS in order for the setup penalty logic to apply correctly.

CURR_SETUP_INST

DATE

This DWH timestamp of the last setup change for this entity

CURR_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

See column comment on STATION in FPSINPUT.MHS_STATION_ALTERNATES for more information.

CURR_STATION_TYPE

VARCHAR2(32)

Current station type of carrier. See view MHS_LOCATIONS for more information.

CUSTOMER

VARCHAR2(64)

Customer who will accept shipment of the lot. Currently this only used for grouping and filtering but in the future we might want to allow a customer to view a Dashboard only including their products.

CV_OF_AV

NUMBER(*,4)

This is the coefficient of variation of availability for the tool over the period of time defined by num_days_for_cv_of_av in gen_site.

DAILY_INPUT_LIMIT_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Rank to assign lots at the start step when the daily input limit for the assigned start step has been exceeded

DASH_COMING_HRS_COL1

NUMBER(2)

This column in combination with the other four columns 2, 3, 4, and 5 allow the number of hours in each of the five columns other than This Shift in the WIP Coming hover to be configurable by facility. For example, FAB might want 1 hr, 4 hr, 24 hr, 48 hr, and This Shift while TEST might want 4 hr, 12 hr, 24 hr, 48 hr, and This Shift. Note that all pages (Operations, Module, Toolset, etc.) for a given facility will show the same information.

DASH_COMING_HRS_COL2

NUMBER(2)

See DASH_COMING_HRS1.

DASH_COMING_HRS_COL3

NUMBER(2)

See DASH_COMING_HRS1.

DASH_COMING_HRS_COL4

NUMBER(3)

See DASH_COMING_HRS1.

DASH_COMING_HRS_COL5

NUMBER(3)

See DASH_COMING_HRS1.

DASH_COMING_HRS_COL_FOR_PAGE

NUMBER(3)

This indicates which WIP Coming column which shows on the page (i.e. without hover over) configurable by facility. For example, FAB might want to show This Shift while TEST might want to show 24 hr.

DASH_PROC_STATE_IF_NOT_RESRV

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the process state assigned to this ECT state on the Dashboard if the lot is not reserved. This value should never be modified.

DASH_PROC_STATE_IF_RESRV

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the process state assigned to reserved lots on the Dashboard. Opinions on what to show here are widely variable so this is clearly the most commonly configurable of the five proc_state columns in this table. Scheduler will nearly always show RESRV while CTA+FLCT will always show WAIT1/WAIT2/WAIT3/DOWN/BLOCK/INHIB. The default is RESRV but it will be common to modify this to match dash_proc_state_if_not_resrv.

DATABASE_NAME

VARCHAR2(256)

The database to which this host is relevant

DATA_DATE_VALUE

DATE

This column is unusually named DATA_DATE_VALUE to avoid confusion with the frequently used DATA_DATE function. Normally we just use the function but occasionally we might want to get the column from the table rather than the function and this allows us to do this.

DAYS_FOR_RTG_PRCS_RCP_TOOL

NUMBER(3)

Number of days of WIP_STEP_HIST to use in RTG_PROCESS_RCP_TOOL_7D table which is the base for RTG_PROCESS_RCP_EQPTYPES and EQP_TOOL_PROCESSFAMS. As anyone can guess from the table name, the default is 7 days.

DAYS_TO_EOL_2D_WAVG

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 2 days.

DAYS_TO_EOL_7D_MED

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using median cycle time from the last 7 days.

DAYS_TO_EOL_7D_WAVG

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 7 days.

DAYS_TO_EOL_COMMIT

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using Commit cycle time.

DAYS_TO_EOL_DUE

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the due date. This column is poorly named.

DAYS_TO_EOL_FIFO

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using FIFO cycle time.

DAYS_TO_EOL_FULL_WAVG

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Full period.

DAYS_TO_EOL_LONG_WAVG

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Long period.

DAYS_TO_EOL_TARGET

NUMBER(8,4)

Days until the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using Target cycle time.

DAYS_TO_KEEP_HIST

NUMBER(6,2)

This is used to determine how long to keep the historical data

DAYS_TO_KEEP_PRD_ACTIVE

NUMBER(4)

Number of days without activity for which a PRD should remain in FPSBASE.RTG_ACTIVE_PRD_ROUTES_BASE.

DAYS_TO_SHOW_EVENTS_IN_DASH

NUMBER(3)

Default 7 days to show the future events in Dashboard for this MNT_FAMILY, and users can define how many days to show this in Dashboard

DAY_OF_WEEK

VARCHAR2(3)

This should be Mon, Tue, etc.

DAY_TGT_COMPLETES_OVR

NUMBER(5)

Override for day completes WIP. When populated this will replace DAY_TGT_COMPLETES calulated in FPSBASE.EQP_WIP_COMP_TGTS

DAY_TGT_WIP_OVR

NUMBER(5)

Override for day target WIP. When populated this will replace DAY_TGT_WIP calulated in FPSBASE.EQP_WIP_COMP_TGTS

DB_MACHINE

VARCHAR2(64)

For CHGLOG and automatic HIST tables, this is populated with the HOST system variable from USERENV.

DB_OSUSER

VARCHAR2(30)

For CHGLOG and automatic HIST tables, this is populated with the OS_USER system variable from USERENV.

DB_USERNAME

VARCHAR2(30)

For CHGLOG and automatic HIST tables, this is populated with the USER system variable.

DECISIONS_TO_SEND

VARCHAR2(12)

Define what decisions are sent to the MES. Possible values are SKIP, TAG, or ALL. If you only want the rule to send TAG decision, then setting this to TAG would keep SKIP decisions from being sent to the MES.

DEFAULT_ADD_TO_GP_CUTOFF_MINS

NUMBER(3)

GP cutoff time is one TCT plus one EET plus this number of minutes before the end of the shift. This is usually one hour or less and might be 0.

DEFAULT_BACKLOAD_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Use for the Scheduler to determine the time the next batch/lot can start without missing the cascade

DEFAULT_BATCH_INT_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

for each sched group it will have default bay. this is really for the durable location issue

DEFAULT_BUILDING

VARCHAR2(12)

For sites with multiple building, some of our MHS logic uses this as a default building if the building is unknown. Also create/update scripts might use this.

DEFAULT_CAST_PORT_DOWN_SEC

NUMBER(6)

the default wait seconds to sched when the port is down

DEFAULT_DURABLE_CHG_COST

NUMBER(6)

Default durable change cost. See comments on USE_SETUP_CHG_AUTO_FOR_SCH for details on when this is used.

DEFAULT_DURABLE_CHG_EXPENSE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_DURABLE_CHG_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

For sites with multiple facilities, applications will default to this facility upon opening. Also create/update scripts might use this.

DEFAULT_FIRST_UNIT_SEC

NUMBER(9,3)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_GROSS_DIE_PER_WFR

NUMBER(6)

Used if gross_die_per_wfr is not specified for the prd

DEFAULT_LINE_SECTION

VARCHAR2(32)

Default line_section to use if not otherwise specified so the line_section field is not null. This should be the most common line_section and some facilities might only have one.

DEFAULT_LOAD_SEC

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_LOT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(24)

Default lot_type which we should rarely use but is our last resort if an event is inserted for a new lot of a new prd which is not in WIP_STARTS. This should probably be the standard test wafer lot type although if you get to this point it is guaranteed to be wrong much of the time.

DEFAULT_MIN_DISP_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

Default wip_module to use if not otherwise specified so the wip_module field is not null. This will typically be LOGISTICS or OTHER or NONE or similar.

DEFAULT_NUM_RUNS_FAIL

NUMBER(4)

WILL REMOVE SOON

DEFAULT_NUM_RUNS_SUCCESS

NUMBER(4)

WILL REMOVE SOON

DEFAULT_PLANPRD

VARCHAR2(64)

The normal or most frequently used planprd for this prd. At most sites each prd will only use one planprd which is this default_planprd but multiple planprds is allowed. For detailed information, see table comments in RTG_PLANPRDS.

DEFAULT_PLAN_PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(7)

Default plan_priority to use if not otherwise specified so the plan_priority field is not null. This should be the normal or standard priority.

DEFAULT_PROCESS_CHG_COST

NUMBER(6)

Used for Scheduler. Default process change cost.

DEFAULT_PROCESS_CHG_SEC

NUMBER(6)

Used for Scheduler. Default process change seconds.

DEFAULT_PROCESS_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(50)

See https://help.inficonims.com/display/DW/Guide+to+Process+Families.

DEFAULT_PROCFAMGRP_FOR_EQP

VARCHAR2(36)

Default process_family as well as process_group for tools where nothing is assigned in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS.

DEFAULT_PROC_CT_SEC

NUMBER(4)

See comment on DEFAULT_WAIT_CT_SEC column.

DEFAULT_QTY_MEAS

NUMBER(7)

Default number of wafers measured in a lot on the tool in the family. This is used if the number of wafers measured is not specified for a particular lot.

DEFAULT_RECIPE_CHG_COST

NUMBER(6)

Default recipe change cost. See comments on USE_SETUP_CHG_AUTO_FOR_SCH for details on when this is used.

DEFAULT_RECIPE_CHG_EXPENSE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_RECIPE_CHG_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_SETUP_CHG_COST

NUMBER(6)

Default setup change cost. See comments on USE_SETUP_CHG_AUTO_FOR_SCH for details on when this is used.

DEFAULT_SETUP_CHG_EXPENSE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_SETUP_CHG_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID

VARCHAR2(100)

The column used to sort the records in the table when the page is initially generated. This must be a column where should_display is set to Y. Sort direction is Ascending or Descending based on the value of default_sort_direction for this column in DASH_C_COLUMNS.

DEFAULT_SORT_DIRECTION

VARCHAR2(20)

This controls the default sort order for each column. For most numeric values like WIP, Completes, Pace, Targets, Scrap, and so on, it makes sense for the default sort direction to be Descending. For example, if you click on the column header to sort by Completes that you expect to see records with the most Completes on top. Of course it is still possible to click a second time to sort Ascending if you really want to see the records with the fewest Completes on top but that would be the exception.

DEFAULT_STEP_SEC

NUMBER(7)

This is used as the default for the process family in the fillin logic in CTM_SUMMARY.

DEFAULT_SYSMNTR_EMAIL_LIST

VARCHAR2(1000)

For SYSMNTR_P_CHK views which do not have specific configuration records in SYSMNTR_C_CHECKS we will send emails to this list. Typically it is fps-xxxdwhteam@inficon.com where xxx is the client or site name and obviously this must be a valid email address.

DEFAULT_UNAVAILABLE_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_UNIT_INT_SEC

NUMBER(9,3)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_UNLOAD_SEC

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DEFAULT_WAFER_SIZE

VARCHAR2(8)

Default wafer_size to use if not otherwise specified so the wafer_size field is not null. Facilities with only one wafer_size should just set this column and then not specify a value by prd. For facilities with more than one this should be the most common wafer_size in the facility.

DEFAULT_WAIT_CT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

The default cycle time for miscellaneous steps that are in process families with no valid cycle time are 10 minutes processing and 20 minutes waiting for a total of 30 minutes. This column along with default_proc_ctm_sec allows us to change these defaults. The most likely change would be to 0 seconds processing and 1 second waiting to essentially ignore all miscellaneous steps.

DEF_BAY_TO_BAY_TRANSPORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(10)

Default building level bay to bay transport mode. If no other mode is specified, this will be the value used to direct wip within a building from bay to bay.

DEF_CAST_TRANSIT_SEC_BAY_CART

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a cassette to move from a cart to any bay in the same building.

DEF_CAST_TRANSIT_SEC_DIFF_BLDG

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a cassette to move between different buildings.

DEF_CAST_TRANSIT_SEC_NEAR_BAY

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a cassette to move to a nearby bay.

DEF_CAST_TRANSIT_SEC_SAME_BAY

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a cassette to move to a different station in the same bay.

DEF_CAST_TRANSIT_SEC_SAME_BLDG

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a cassette to move to another bay in the same building.

DEF_POD_TRANSIT_SEC_BAY_CART

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a pod to move from a cart to any bay in the same building.

DEF_POD_TRANSIT_SEC_DIFF_BLDG

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a pod to move between different buildings.

DEF_POD_TRANSIT_SEC_NEAR_BAY

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a pod to move to a nearby bay.

DEF_POD_TRANSIT_SEC_SAME_BAY

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a pod to move to different station in the same bay.

DEF_POD_TRANSIT_SEC_SAME_BLDG

NUMBER(5)

Default transit time for a pod to move to another bay in the same building

DELIVERIES_PER_MIN

NUMBER(5,2)

The interpolated delivery rate per minute. A delivery will count only after the dropoff

DELIVERIES_THIS_SESSION

NUMBER(5)

Total deliveries for the user session

DELIVERY_STATE

VARCHAR2(32)

The carrier delivery state.

DELTA_TYPE

VARCHAR2(12)

Delta_type is the reason why the qty changed. It is populated with a value in WIP_DELTA_TYPES (SCRAP, SPLIT, etc.) for all records where qty_delta != 0. It is null for normal moves where is_next = Y and the qty does not change. The logic to populate this is in WIP_STEP_HIST_INSERT_BEF.

DEMAND_INST

DATE

Start of period when this qty of this planprd needs to finish. We automatically spread demand across each plan week in WIP_DEMAND_BY_WEEK which feeds WIP_FLUSH therefore this column can be the start of any time period less than or equal to plan week. It could be the demand for each shift or for each day or for each plan week but if the site has no preference then the easiest way to set this up is to write one row per plan week and let us spread across that week. It is important to note that we always spread across the plan week with our custom logic so even if this table is by day we might adjust it to another day within the same plan week.

DEMAND_QTY

NUMBER(9)

Number of wafers committed in the demand.

DESCRIPTION

VARCHAR2(256)

Tool desciption. This value is only used to display in the Dashboard.

DEST_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

Facility where the lot will go after it completes its route in the current facility.

DEST_PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

Prd which will the lot will assume after it completes its route in the current facility. This could be the same as the current prd.

DEST_PREFERENCE

NUMBER(3)

When a source product has multiple options for its next product this field indicates the preference. Usually this is 1.

DEST_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

The final destination the lot is required to move. Typically the reserved tool but also can be the scheduled tool if the client wants too, but this should be with caution as the scheduled tool can change

DETAILS

VARCHAR2(2000)

A concatenation of all the other fields that can be inserted by FabGuard Broker procedures.

DETECTION_SEC_AVG_LOWER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have an average time to detect under the lower limit value. The time to detect is the gap between each measurement, only considering measurments that clear a counter.

DETECTION_SEC_AVG_UPPER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have an average time to detect under the upper limit value. The time to detect is the gap between each measurement, only considering measurments that clear a counter.

DETECTION_SEC_MAX_LOWER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have a max time to detect under the lower limit value. The time to detect is the gap between each measurement, only considering measurments that clear a counter.

DETECTION_SEC_MAX_UPPER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have a max time to detect under the upper limit value. The time to detect is the gap between each measurement, only considering measurments that clear a counter.

DIRECTION_OF_INCREASE

VARCHAR2(8)

This column determines if an increase in the KPI Result value after a scenario run indicates a positive outcome. Value can be POSITIVE, NEGATIVE, or IGNORE. If set to IGNORE, Scheduler will ignore the change in result and not use a visual indicator.

DISPATCH_CAPACITY

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DISPATCH_INST

DATE

Time when the lot indicated in the MES that it will process on the tool. As opposed to reserve, dispatch cannot be automatically undone.

DISPATCH_INST_OF_START_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot was dispatched to the tool at the step which starts the queue timer.

DISPATCH_NUM_STEPS_AWAY

NUMBER(2)

used to determine how many steps away for the coming lots to become eligible to dispatch

DISPATCH_RULE

VARCHAR2(64)

Optional field to store the dispatch rule used for the equipment type if known. This is not used in our DWH logic. This field could be set for informational purposes from the dispatching configuration file/table or this could be the real source of the dispatch rule and the dispatch system could query this table.

DISPATCH_RULES

VARCHAR2(36)

used to define the order of dispatching: 0. timer lots, the timer lot at least needs to be nearby and in-danger 1. lot on tool; durable on tool 2. lot on tool; durable near tool (on tool or stocker) 3. lot near tool; durable on tool 4. lot near tool; durable near tool 5. lot on tool; 6. lot near tool; 7. sched-rank-1 lot, currently at the operation; 8. enable dispatch based on lot priority; for example, (1):(3):(2):(4) -> will dispatch 1 first and followed by 3 and then 2 and then 4; for example, (1):(2|3):(4) -> will dispatch 1 first and followed by (2 or 3) and then 4;

DISPATCH_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(32)

This is the short description to show on the scheduler web ui

DISPLAY_SORT

NUMBER(3)

Sort rank to display in NextMove. Lower numbered badges will display furthest to the left

DOWN_REASON

VARCHAR2(36)

A value from a reasonably short list of user-defined reasons why the entity went down.

DO_NOT_CHECK_DIFFS_LOOP

CHAR(1)

For tables loaded by ADM_TABLE_LOOP the default is to use a minus query to check for differences and only update the necessary rows. But if we know that all rows will change on each load then we can skip this check and just update all rows.

DO_NOT_COMMIT

CHAR(1)

If this is set to Y then we will not commit after this object. This allows an entire job consisting of multiple objects to run and then commit at the end. Our 3min job must have this flag set to Y.

DO_NOT_COUNT_OPER_MOVE_FROM

CHAR(1)

We might never want to count oper moves from certain special operations like staging or adhoc.

DO_NOT_COUNT_OPER_MOVE_TO

CHAR(1)

We might never want to count oper moves to certain special operations like staging or adhoc

DO_NOT_INS_HIST

CHAR(1)

If set to Y during an update, then the ETP_STATUS_AFTER trigger will *not* write the previous contents of the row to ETP_HIST. Default is N.

DO_NOT_WARN_FPSINPUT_DBPR

CHAR(1)

We strongly discourage use of DBPR for FPSINPUT tables because the refresh deletes and reinserts every row in the table. CHK_LOAD warns against this configuration. But there are certain cases where DBPR is appropriate, for example when the start date in WIP_STARTS changes almost every query in the customer data, so if this flag is set then we do not warn about this.

DRUM_COMP_HIST_ROLL_HOURS

NUMBER(3)

Number of rolling hours to check for completes that will be compared to the drum target to determine a delta to target and corresponding priority. This value only applies if the DRUM_COMP_HIST_TYPE is set to ROLLING.

DRUM_COMP_HIST_ROLL_HOURS_LONG

NUMBER(3)

This is the same as DRUM_COMP_HIST_ROLL_HOURS except for a longer period of time. Setting both values allows tracking of both a short and long period, such as shift and day drum or day and week drum. Use of this longer period is optional. Step priority is given based on the following hierarchy: 1) Missing both long and short periods, 2) Missing the long period, Missing the short period.

DRUM_COMP_HIST_TYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

The type of historical calculation that will be done for comparing completes to the drum target to determine a delta to target and corresponding priority. Allowed values are SHIFT, PLAN DAY, and ROLLING. SHIFT is from the start of the current shift to date. PLAN DAY is from the start of the current plan day to date. ROLLING is a rolling number of hours as defined in DRUM_COMP_HIST_ROLL_HOURS.

DRUM_CRITERIA

VARCHAR2(513)

This is the level of counting that will be multiplied by within the scheduler to dynamically score the drum rate as lots are placed on a schedule run

DRUM_GROUPING

VARCHAR2(24)

Allowed values are "ROUTE STEP", "ROUTE FAMILY COMMON STEP", "ROUTE GROUP COMMON STEP", "COMMON STEP", "ROUTE FAMILY PROCESS", "ROUTE GROUP PROCESS", and "PROCESS". This determines the level at which the drum is aggregated. ROUTE STEP means the drum calculation is evaluated within each route for each step. COMMON STEP means the drum calculation is evaluated across routes for each COMMON STEP, assuming common steps are shared across routes. PROCESS means the drum calculation is evaluated across routes for each PROCESS, assuming processes are shared across routes.

DRUM_MV_FACTOR

NUMBER

This is the per move factor in which the drum rate will adjust for use in the scheduler to dynamically score the drum rate as lots are placed on a schedule run

DRUM_NORMALIZATION_GROUPING

VARCHAR2(32)

See comments on LB_NORMALIZATION_GROUPING. This field does the same thing for drum scoring

DRUM_NORMALIZATION_METHOD

VARCHAR2(24)

See comments on LB_NORMALIZATION_METHOD. This field does the same thing for drum scoring

DRUM_QTY

NUMBER(5)

Desired shift run rate for a route section by route and process

DUE_INST

DATE

To indicate the due date for this futuer start lot

DURABLE

VARCHAR2(64)

Durables are either reticles for Litho or probe cards for Wet or Sort. A durable can either be in a carrier or at a location without a carrier.

DURABLE_CARRIER

VARCHAR2(32)

The durable carrier ID of the durable required for this carrier to process.

DURABLE_CLASS

VARCHAR2(36)

The class of the durable becomes important when we have multiple durables assigned in RTG_DURABLE_ASSIGNMENTS. If these durables are in different classes then we know that both of them are required. For example, a tester might require both a probe card and an electrical board. If these durables are in the same class then we use the is_multiple_required field to determine whether we will choose either or need both.

DURABLE_CLASS_ABBR

VARCHAR2(3)

Abbreviation of durable class like RET or PC.

DURABLE_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(64)

Durable_family indicates what durable is required by the process. When multiple durables are in a family any of them can be used. Typically there is only one reticle per family and therefore the durable and durable_family are the same. The exception would be a high running product with backup reticles. However for probe cards it is common to have several cards for each product so we have several durables with the same family.

DURABLE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Durable group is the parent of family and the child of class and its only use is to track the time to change durables. In many cases, group will be the same as class. An example where group would be different than class is where we have different reticles for different stepper manufacturers so the durable_group would be Nikon or Canon or ASML while the durable_class would be DURABLE.

DURABLE_LOCATION

VARCHAR2(32)

The location of the durable.

DURABLE_PARM1

VARCHAR2(128)

User-defined parameter which can store any value relevant to the durable. Description of use should be noted in the RTG_DURABLES ETL.

DURABLE_REQUESTED_INST

DATE

will be the time that the durable needed by the lot to process

DURABLE_STATE

VARCHAR2(36)

Durable state indicates the current state of the durable The value must be one of those defined by FPS in FPSADMIN.MHS_CARRIER_STATES. This is a short list of simple states like OK or WARN or DOWN in contrast to the complex options available for equipment states. This would be used as a filter/sort on what durables could be used for scheduling. For example, if there are two durables in the durable_family and one is OK and the other is DOWN then we schedule using the OK durable. But if there is only one durable in the family then we cannot schedule any lots which require this family if that lone durable is DOWN.

DURABLE_STATE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(128)

The name of the durable state displayed on all dashboards and reports. Durable_state must match the FPS list defined in MHS_DURABLE_STATES but this display field might be formatted in a more familiar way to the users in the facility.

DURABLE_THP_VARIATION

VARCHAR2(64)

When this column is populated that means that we have a choice of durable families and that processing time for the lot/recipe depends on which durable family is chosen. The most common use case is 8 pin and 16 pin probe cards. This will be blank for reticles and other cases where the throughput is not dependent on the durable. This is part of the primary key of our throughput logic where nulls are filled in as NA since PK columns cannot be null. In our first example, we have a recipe WAFER_TEST_1 that we use for a whole bunch of different prds. Each prd requires its own probe card but for throughput purposes we do not care about the prd. We just care about the recipe which is WAFER_TEST_1 and we would set duration_thp_variation to 8pin or 16pin. Then we would group all prds that use WAFER_TEST_1 and ran with an 8 pin probe card together in the same THP record. Our second example is similar to the first but for throughput purposes each prd will be different. We would set duration_thp_variation to the durable family for this case. In our third example, the recipe is different for each prd. In this case, we would set duration_thp_variation to either 8pin and 16pin or to the durable family and get the same result.

DURABLE_UNAVAILABLE_INST

DATE

will be the time when the durable becomes unavailable

DURATION_SEC

NUMBER(9)

Duration in seconds of the period to be used to run the APF report. Used only for CLR, CLRA, and QE.

E10_FROM_INST

DATE

Time when the entity was logged into the E10 state of the episode.

E10_TO_INST

DATE

Time when the entity was logged out of the E10 state of the episode.

E58_SUBSTATE

VARCHAR2(24)

Substate for SEMI E58 categorization. This is for reference and reporting only and can be left balnk

EARLIEST_DISP_INST

DATE

the earliest scheduled dispatch time that lots request to use this durable to process

EARLIEST_REQUESTED_INST

DATE

the earliest step enter time that lots request to use this durable to process

EARLIEST_SCHED_START

DATE

the earliest scheduled process start time that lots request to use this durable to process

EARLY_DUE_INST

DATE

to store the early due time of the floating PM tool event, i.e., the early start time of the floating PM could be calculated via substracting the EST_DURATION_SEC value

EARLY_INST

DATE

Earliest time when maintenance can be started.

ECTA_ECTFL_PROC_STATE

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the process state assigned to this ECT state on the CTA and FLCT. Since the Reserved process state is not used in CTA and FLCT (we always count the time when the lot is reserved in the appropriate WAIT1/WAIT2/WAIT3/DOWN/BLOCK/INHIB process state) then this should rarely be modified and should nearly always be the same as dash_proc_state_if_not_resrv except when using older versions of CTA which do not understand the newer states INHIB and STUCK.

ECT_STATE

VARCHAR2(42)

ECT state is the lowest level state of our Enhanced Cycle Time hierarchy and the value which is stored in WIP_LOTS_REALTIME and ECT_HIST. We can lookup all information about the ECT state including process state in ECT_STATE_DIAGRAM.

ECT_TO_INST

DATE

See comments on WIP_LOT_HIST.NEXT_INST.

ECT_TO_INST_NOT_NULL

DATE

See column comments for WIP_LOT_HIST.NEXT_INST.

EET_SEC

NUMBER(7)

End-to-end time in seconds

EFFECTIVE_CASCADE_LENGTH

NUMBER(5,3)

This is the ratio of the total number of jobs to the number of non-cascading jobs. (Again, discarding outliers beyond the 10%-90% range for total process time.)

EFFECTIVE_CASCADE_RATE

NUMBER(4,3)

This is the weighted average of the fraction of total process time which overlaps with the previous job. This will always be less than or equal to the bottleneck_cascade_rate (outliers beyond 10%-90% for total process time are thrown out).

ELIGIBILITY_MESSAGE

VARCHAR2(4000)

This column stores eligibility messages for this tool assignment.

EMAIL

VARCHAR2(128)

Email address of the user.

EMAIL_ALERT_LIMIT

NUMBER

Send e-mail alert when the tablespace used data is greater than the percentage of the total space.

EMAIL_LIST

VARCHAR2(1000)

This field can contain on or more email addresses separated by spaces. To send text messages you enter the mobile phone number in email format which is dependent on the phone service provider.

ENABLE_DISPATCH

CHAR(1)

Enable/Disable Dispatch by Lot Priorities

ENABLE_GTG_AND_FTR_UPDATES

CHAR(1)

The merge statement to update GTG and FTR information which is the entirety of the UPDATE_ETP_MNT_EPISODE_HIST procedure was found to be very fast at some sites and extraordinarily slow at other sites. This parameter allows us to disable this at the slow sites.

ENABLE_SENDING_ALERT

CHAR(1)

To indicate if the scheduler will send the alert while scheduler run failed. SYSMONITOR will only send the alert when SCHED_GROUP_STATE = OFF and ENABLE_SENDING_ALERT = Y

END_AVAIL

DATE

Time stamp when the schedule_id ended.

END_BANK_SEQ_NUM

NUMBER(2)

Most products only have one end bank so this should almost always be set to 1. But we have seen prds that have multiple end banks and here is where we indicate the order of the banks.

END_BANK_STRUCTURE

VARCHAR2(11)

Indicates the ordering and structure of end-banks for a given PRD: if SEQUENTIAL, then WIP moves from the PRD route through the N end-banks in sequence (END_BANK_SEQ_NUM=1..N); if PARALLEL, then WIP moves from the PRD route to only of of the N end-banks (END_BANK_SEQ_NUM=1).

END_INST

DATE

The time the even is scheduled to end

END_PLAN_DAY

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_plan_day of the next plan day.

END_PLAN_MONTH

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_plan_month of the next plan month.

END_PLAN_QUARTER

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_plan_quarter of the next plan quarter.

END_PLAN_WEEK

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_plan_week of the next plan week.

END_PLAN_YEAR

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_plan_year of the next plan year.

END_PROC_INST

DATE

time when the lot finished processing on the main tool.

END_PROC_INST_OF_START_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot ended processing on the tool at the step which starts the queue timer.

END_REP_START_SHIFT

CHAR(1)

This column is obsolete and will be dropped from the table in the next DWH version.

END_ROUTE_IF_DIFF

VARCHAR2(256)

Most normal queue timers start and end on the same route and for these we leave this column blank. However some timers start on a rework route and ending on the main route so this column allows us to support this. We would populate the route column with the rework route (the start step would be on this rework route) and this end_route_if_diff column with the main route (the end step would be on this main route).

END_SHIFT

DATE

End of shift must be equal to the start of the next shift. Please note that the exact time which is both of the end of the previous shift and the start of the next shift is included in the next shift. In other words, start_shift <= inst < end_shift.

END_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

The step upon move out where the WIP balance limit is no longer applied

END_WEEK

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_week of the next work work.

END_WORK_DAY

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_work_day of the next work day.

END_WORK_MONTH

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_work_month of the next work month.

END_WORK_QUARTER

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_work_quarter of the next work quarter.

END_WORK_YEAR

DATE

It is critical that this field equal the start_work_year of the next work year.

ENGR_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(128)

Special comments made by engineering about this lot. These comments are about the lot in general and not about a specific step.

ENTITY

VARCHAR2(19)

The lowest level of the equipment hierarchy that an event can be logged against. Tools, subtools, shared parent tools, chambers, ports are all entities. Load locks are also included although we consider them as ports.

ENTITY_TYPE

VARCHAR2(12)

the entity type for this process max usages. only allow chamber, tool

ENT_OR_CARR_OR_DUR

VARCHAR2(1)

Upcoming maintenance for entities, carriers, and durables is included together in this table. An E here indicates that the `logged_entity` field in this table is an entity, C for carrier, and D for durable.

EOL_INST_2D_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 2 days.

EOL_INST_7D_MED

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using median cycle time from the last 7 days.

EOL_INST_7D_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 7 days.

EOL_INST_COMMIT

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using Commit cycle time.

EOL_INST_FIFO

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using FIFO cycle time.

EOL_INST_FULL_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Full period.

EOL_INST_LONG_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Long period.

EOL_INST_TARGET

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using Target cycle time.

EPISODE_FROM_INST

DATE

Start of the episode is when the last production lot missed the cascade unless there is no WIP then it is when the entity was logged into the E10 state of the episode.

EPISODE_TO_INST

DATE

End of the episode is when the first production lot started unless there is no WIP then it is when the entity was logged out of the E10 state of the episode.

EQP_E10_INST

DATE

Time when the e10_state of the eqp_state last changed.

EQP_FROM_INST

DATE

Time when the eqp_state changed for any entity on this main tool.

EQP_INC_BATCH_PCT

NUMBER(3,1)

If the input data already knows the incomplete batch percent then we can input it in this value with the event and we will use it for eqp_state calculations. Normally this is blank and we calculate etp_inc_batch_pct from the lot events.

EQP_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

EQP_MODULE is the module responsible for operating the tool. See comments on the module column in GEN_MODULES for info on this column and how it relates to eqp_module and mnt_module.

EQP_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

Client equipment state taken directly from their MES or from their existing tool state model. For EQP_MNT_FUTURE, this is the state that we estimate the entity will be in during the maintenance which is often set to a generic PM state if we do not have detailed information.

EQP_STATE_CHG_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(512)

Comment with the event that last changed the eqp_state.

EQP_STATE_CHG_EVENT

VARCHAR2(48)

Event that last changed the eqp_state.

EQP_STATE_CHG_INST

DATE

Time when the eqp_state changed for this particular entity. If another entity on the same main tool changes state, eqp_inst will change for all entities on the tool even those whose state does not change. Therefore if eqp_inst is after state_chg_inst that means another entity changed state at eqp_inst but this entity has not changed since state_chg_inst.

EQP_STATE_CHG_OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

Operator who logged the event that last changed the eqp_state.

EQP_STATE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(48)

Display name for the equipment state which will be displayed on all Dashboards and reports.

EQP_STATE_OWNER

VARCHAR2(48)

Person or department who owns each state. This is for reference and reporting only and can be left blank

EQP_STATUS_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(256)

An optional comment on the status of the entity that can be displayed in various application interfaces.

EQP_TOOL_PCT

NUMBER(7,4)

Percentage contribution of this entity to the full tool using cluster tool calculations for eqp_state built in to DWH. This adds to 100 for all entities on a tool at each eqp_inst.

EQP_TYPE

VARCHAR2(50)

Each tool is assigned an EQP_TYPE and all tools in the same type are identical meaning that they should run at the same throughput when running the same process with the same chamber type count. We also expect similar availability since these tools are identical. However tools in the same EQP_TYPE may have different chamber configurations and may run different groups of processes.

ERROR_PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(10)

This is just informative and used in FPSRPT objects but this could be used in SYSMNTR in the future. It is a string field so it can be a word or a number.

ERR_IF_NO_ROWS

CHAR(1)

If set to Y then the job will error if no rows are inserted. This cannot be used with DBPM because the match logic frequently updates no rows.

EST_CH_USED

VARCHAR2(24)

Estimate of which chambers will used to process this lot based on assignments and status

EST_CURR_DIE_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Estimated die qty based on current qty and no yield loss. If the current die qty is unknown then the current wafer quantity is multiplied by gross die per wafer.

EST_DIE_QTY_AT_EOL

NUMBER(7)

The estimated die quantity when the lot finishes the route/bank listed. The calculation is based on line yield and sort yield from the current step to the end of the route/bank. If current die qty is unknown is calculated we estimate using gross_die_per_wfr.

EST_DUE_INST

DATE

Best guess at when the mnt event was due. For non-counter-based values chances are this came from the ETL. For counter-based values we use the rate of change.

EST_DURABLE_USED

VARCHAR2(129)

This field is populated with our estimate of what durable will be used based on information from the MES and/or Recipe Management System combined with the location and status of each durable.

EST_DURATION_SEC

NUMBER(8)

Estimate of the duration of the future hold if known. If blank we use the estimate for the hold_type.

EST_LINE_YIELD_PCT

NUMBER(6,3)

Estimated line yield percent for the route-step. Leave blank for the default of no loss expected. A value of 99.5 means we expected 1 unit out of 200 to be lost.

EST_MACHINE_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

Estimated machine recipe what we estimate will be the machine recipe based on information from the Recipe Management System. It is used in combination with process for throughput calculations and setup change penalty calculations. It is not necessary to estimate for all processes since this is always used in combination however it needs to be NA rather than blank since it is part of the primary key of most THP tables. Hopefully when this is not NA it should match the actual machine recipe logged for each lot during processing.

EST_MFG_INST_IF_NONMFG

DATE

This is the forecast when the entity will return to a manufacturing state (PRD/SBY) after its current ENG/SDT/UDT/NST is completed. This value should only be populated when the eqp_state has the e10_state of ENG/SDT/UDT/NST.

EST_MNT_DURATION_SEC

NUMBER(8)

Est_mnt_duration_sec is the estimate of the total duration of the maintenance in seconds including work time, wait time, and qual time. Est_mnt_duration_sec is required then if desired, this total can be broken down into est_mnt_work_sec, est_mnt_wait_sec, and est_mnt_qual_sec. These three breakdown columns are optional but if any of those three columns are populated then they must sum to the value of est_mnt_duration_sec. Only est_mnt_duration_sec is used in FPS applications. The other three are available for informational purposes and to use for custom reporting but are not currently used in any FPS application.

EST_MNT_QUAL_SEC

NUMBER(8)

See column comment for est_mnt_duration_sec.

EST_MNT_WAIT_SEC

NUMBER(8)

See column comment for est_mnt_duration_sec.

EST_MNT_WORK_SEC

NUMBER(8)

See column comment for est_mnt_duration_sec.

EST_QTY_AT_ARRV

NUMBER(7)

This column degrades the current qty by the estimated line yield at steps between the current step and future step so this represents the expected qty of the lot when it arrives to the future step. This is unlikely to be different than the current qty in a Fab but is quite important for Test/Sort/Assembly.

EST_QTY_AT_EOL

NUMBER(8,1)

The estimated quantity when the lot finishes the route/bank listed in units of the facility listed. The calculation is based on line yield from the current step to the end of the route/bank listed. So if the route/bank is in the future then the upcoming routes/banks starting with the current one are included since we expect those wafers to be lost between now and the end of the future route/bank listed. This does not include sort yield.

EST_REWORK_PCT

NUMBER(5,3)

Estimated percentage of lots completing this step which will go to rework. This is used for capacity modeling.

EST_SMP_PCT

NUMBER(5,2)

Smp_pct tells you what percentage of the lots complete on a tool. Some sites skip steps by jumping over them so we see the lot move from step 3 to step 5 and we only know that it jumped step 4 because step 4 is on the route between 3 and 5. Other sites skip steps by moving lots into them and then moving them out a second later so we see a move from 3 to 4 at 11:11:11 and a move from 4 to 5 at 11:11:12. We do not care how it is done but just that the lot did not process at step 4 -- and to be more specific that no tool capacity is required to process this lot at step 4 and no cycle time is accumulated at step 4.

EST_SORT_YIELD_PCT

NUMBER(6,3)

Estimated sort yield percent for the product-step. Leave blank for the default of no loss expected. A value of 99.5 means we expected 1 unit out of 200 to be lost.

EST_START_INST

DATE

Best guess at when the mnt event started. If actual_start_inst is provided it will be that value otherwise it will be the inst - est_mnt_duration_sec

EST_USE_PCT

NUMBER(5,2)

Estimated use percentage is the percentage of units of this route-step that we expect to run on this eqp_type. Normally we use historical data to calculate this for the Capacity Model but entering a value in the OVR table manually overrides that historical number.

EST_USE_PCT_REASON

VARCHAR2(12)

This field explains which level of fill-in was used to calculate the est_use_pct.

ETL_LINK_OR_APF_OR_MIXED

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the mode of ETL used for the site. LINK means all tables are populated via APD/REF views using a database link. APF means all tables are populated via APF using Load_FPS_DWH.sh. MIXED means that we use some of each.

ETP_BEG_ACTION

VARCHAR2(24)

This is the action passed to the UPDATE_ETP_STATUS_BEG procedure and is useful for debugging ETP to see what action this event triggered.

ETP_FROM_INST

DATE

Time when the etp_state changed for any entity on this main tool.

ETP_INC_BATCH_PCT

NUMBER(3,1)

Incomplete batch percentage is only set for processing states. In the final calculation, the time processing an incomplete batch is divided into the production state and an incomplete batch state.

ETP_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

If entity is down then use eqp_state directly. If entity is up then determine etp_state from proc_state and sby_state.

ETP_STATE_CHG_INST

DATE

Time when the etp_state changed for this entity.

ETP_TOOL_PCT

NUMBER(7,4)

Percentage contribution of this entity to the full tool using cluster tool calculations for etp_state built in to DWH. The main difference from eqp_tool_pct is this includes throughput estimates for partial chambers. This adds to 100 for all entities on a tool at each eqp_inst.

EVALUATE_FTR

CHAR(1)

This flag will determine if we should evaluate First Time Right (FTR) for these events, Y means we will report FTR, N means we will not report FTR.

EVALUATION_METHOD

VARCHAR2(8)

Used to define how the scheduler will evaluate each lot for scheduling if it has multiple steps to schedule once, for example for the timer lot. The available options: FIRST: it will take the first step of the sequence of steps to calcualte the lot score CURRENT: it will take the current step (the next step to schedule) of the sequence of steps to calcualte the lot score LAST: it will take the last step of the sequence of steps to calcualte the lot score AVERAGE: it will take the average score from each step in this sequence for the lot score MAX: it will take the maximum score from each step in this sequence for the lot score MIN: it will take the minimum score from each step in this sequence for the lot score for example, lot A has step 1, 2 3 to schedule, and currently the first lot to be scheduled is 2: FIRST: 1 CURRENT: 2 LAST: 3 AVERAGE: avg(1, 2, 3) MAX: max(1, 2, 3) MIN: min(1, 2, 3)

EVENT

VARCHAR2(48)

This is the event registered in the MES. This is for the historical record and display only. Each event is mapped to an FPS event_type and the event_type is what is used by FPS applications.

EVENT_CATEGORY

VARCHAR2(40)

to store the event_category, e.g., NOT_TO_SCHEDULE, NOT_TO_START etc.

EVENT_CLASS

VARCHAR2(128)

Event class is the highest level in the maintenance event hierarchy. This level could denote what team is responsible for the events. e.g. Maintenance, Operations

EVENT_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(512)

Comment associated with the event.

EVENT_CREATE_INST

DATE

Time when the hold event was created in the MES or other host system.

EVENT_DESC

VARCHAR2(500)

Event Description

EVENT_GROUP

VARCHAR2(128)

Event group is the second highest level in the maintenance event hierarchy it could be used to denote the group even maintenance definitions such as PMs, Adhoc tasks, OCAPS, Quals, or inspections. This grouping will be a collection of maintenance definitions.

EVENT_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

Field that uniquely identifies the maintenance task definition in the facility. `Event_id` is usually a number or code from the maintenance system, but it could also be defined as `logged_entity` concatenated with `mnt_name`, since that combination also uniquely represents an event. It is important to ensure that our definition of `event_id` represents repeated instances of the same maintenance event with the same `event_id`. For example, if we have a monthly PM on tool T1, there will be instances of this event each month. The field used as `event_id` could be something like T1 monthly PM; it should *not* be something like T1 monthly PM Jan, T1 monthly PM Feb, etc., since this would cause the `event_id` to change every month.

EVENT_INST1

DATE

User-defined field which can store any instant relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_INST1_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_inst1 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_INST2

DATE

User-defined field which can store any instant relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_INST2_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_inst2 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_INST3

DATE

User-defined field which can store any instant relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_INST3_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_inst3 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_KEY

VARCHAR2(512)

EVENT_KEY needs to be populated with a unique value for each different future hold. The idea here is that if we have a line hold that all lots on hold for that same line hold have the same EVENT_KEY. Where the MES does not create a unique key for each line hold, we use EVENT_COMMENT as EVENT_KEY, and we hash it prior to passing it as a key to the web applications.

EVENT_NUM1

NUMBER(10)

User-defined field which can store any number relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_NUM2

NUMBER(10)

User-defined field which can store any number relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_NUM3

NUMBER(10)

User-defined field which can store any number relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_PARM1

VARCHAR2(128)

User-defined parameter which can store any value relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_PARM1_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_parm1 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_PARM2

VARCHAR2(128)

User-defined parameter which can store any value relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_PARM2_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_parm2 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_PARM3

VARCHAR2(128)

User-defined parameter which can store any value relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_PARM3_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_parm3 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_PARM4

VARCHAR2(128)

User-defined parameter which can store any value relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_PARM4_DESC

VARCHAR2(128)

Description of the value written to the user-defined column event_parm4 in WIP_EVENT_HIST for this event_type.

EVENT_PARM5

VARCHAR2(128)

User-defined parameter which can store any value relevant to the event. Description of use should be noted in WIP_EVENTS table.

EVENT_SOURCE

VARCHAR2(36)

The source where the event happened for the lot. For example MES, EI, Dispatching, etc.

EVENT_TIME

TIMESTAMP(6)

We expect FDC applications to provide a timestamp field which we write to this column via either FPSAPP procedure or ETL. When we then import this data into the ETL via WIP_APD_xxx_HIST views, we will use this timestamp to populate the inst field without the fractional seconds and we will use the fractional seconds as opt_sort_within_sec.

EVENT_TIMELINESS

VARCHAR2(56)

For this occurrence of the event, how timely was it executed relative to the early, due and late values. May be used for linking to ETP_MNT_EPISODE_HIST.

EVENT_TIMELINESS_NOTE

VARCHAR2(200)

A quality metric for the event_timelessness column noting if the data is good or bad or has a warning with a small note on why it has the quality it does.

EVENT_TIMELINESS_QUALITY

NUMBER(1)

A quality metric for the event_timelessness column noting if the data is good or bad or has a warning. 1 = we have good data,and everything is great, 2 = small warning but we think we have what we need, 3 = bad, we are missing key data, 9 = we may have encountered an error.

EVENT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(12)

Event Type

EXCLUDE_HOLD_LOTS_IN_TIMER

CHAR(1)

This configuration will exclude any HOLD lots from queue timer consideration if set to Y.

EXPIRED_QUEUE_TIMER_WEIGHT

NUMBER(7,2)

how much weight to give lots with expired timers for example: A weight of 0 -> expired timers will all get the same score of 20. for example: A weight of 1 -> expired timers will get an additional point for every hour they are late

EXPIRED_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Seconds from the start event until queue time restriction is expired. After expiration, the lot must rework or scrap or otherwise be evaluated.

EXPIRE_INST

DATE

Time when the waiver is expired.

EXPIRY_DEACTIVATE_INST

DATE

Date column that automatically sets the tag condition to inactive once the date is past.

EXPIRY_WARN_INST

DATE

Time to warn the creator of the rule that the rule is about to expire.

EXPLANATION

VARCHAR2(4000)

Explanation of how data is translated for specific column. For example, this might include the table name and column name from the MES used to populate the column in the FPSINPUT table.

EXPT_ID

VARCHAR2(12)

Experiment identifier which indicates the lot will process differently that normal for its product on at least one step of the route.

EXPT_INSTRUCTIONS

VARCHAR2(512)

General instructions about the experiment performed on this lot. This is a long string field for display only.

EXPT_VARIATION

VARCHAR2(12)

Assigned to sibling lots to indicate which variation of the experiment will be performed on the lot. For example, variation 0 might get the normal recipe while variation 1 might get a different recipe then we can compare the different wafers in each split at a following measurement or test step.

EXP_CASCADE_BATCHES

NUMBER(2)

Expected cascade batches is only for cascading batch tools. It is used in throughput calculations to determine how many batch_intervals to count after each first_unit_sec. If this is not populated we assume the batch tool does not cascade. This value could also be used in dispatching/scheduling to specify how many batches should be cascaded before a setup change is allowed. Historical data should be compared to this value regularly to verify it.

EXP_CASCADE_QTY

NUMBER(3)

Expected number of wafers in a cascade is only for cascading tools which are not batch tools. It is used in throughput calculations to determine how many unit_intervals to count after each first_unit_sec. If this is not populated we use the exp_qty_per_carr_for_wph as the default meaning we cascade just one carrier. This value could also be used in dispatching/scheduling to specify how many wafers should be cascaded before a setup change is allowed. Historical data should be compared to this value regularly to verify it.

EXP_QTY_PER_BATCH

NUMBER(3)

Expected wafers in a batch used in throughput calculations and for inc_batch_pct calculation. This value is required to be populated for batch tools.

EXP_QTY_PER_JOB

NUMBER(7)

If populated this value is used for the EET/TCT calculation for this eqp type instead of avg_qty_per_carr_for_wph which is the default for the facility.

EXTL_ADDL_INFO

VARCHAR2(256)

This will have any additional lot info needed by the external system

EXTL_DEST_LOCATION

VARCHAR2(32)

This column will have the destination location for the lot

EXTL_DISP_INST

DATE

Time by when the external system recommends that the job must be dispatched.

EXTL_DO_NOT_MOVE

CHAR(1)

This column will decided whether NextMove will highlight to move or override it

EXTL_END

DATE

Time by when the external system recommends that the job will end processing.

EXTL_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

The identifier for the external model. For details on all EXTL columns please see Help Site page at https://help.finalphasesystems.com/display/SCHED/Scheduler+and+External+Model+Status.

EXTL_IS_RESERVED

CHAR(1)

Flag indicated whether the external system has reserved the lot to the tool. If not we still move to the destination.

EXTL_MODEL_EXPIRED_INST

DATE

to indicate when this model will be expired

EXTL_MODEL_EXPIRE_INST

DATE

Datetime when the model state will expire. This value is critical for prioritizing lots in Scheduler using the Expiring status.

EXTL_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Allowed values are P, F, W. For details on all EXTL columns please see Help Site page at https://help.finalphasesystems.com/display/SCHED/Scheduler+and+External+Model+Status.

EXTL_RANK_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(256)

Optional comment entered by user or system who last updated external information.

EXTL_RANK_UPDATED_INST

DATE

Datetime populated by trigger when external rank was last updated.

EXTL_RANK_USER

VARCHAR2(64)

User or system who last updated external information.

EXTL_REQ_EXACT_DEST

CHAR(1)

This column will decided whether NextMove use alternates and station assignments or ignore them.

EXTL_SHOW_EXACT_DEST

CHAR(1)

This column will decided whether NextMove will show the destination Bay or the exact destination.

EXTL_START

DATE

Time by when the external system recommends that the job will begin processing.

EXTL_STATUS_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(64)

Normally just a display field for the External Model status but if the value matches one of the allowed Model States then it is considered to be the Model State. For the list of Model States and full detailed on all EXTL columns please see Help Site page at https://help.finalphasesystems.com/display/SCHED/Scheduler+and+External+Model+Status.

EXTL_TIME_TO_NEXT_MOVE

DATE

Time provided by an external system to override the carrier time to move for racks.

EXTL_TRANSPORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(16)

Name of the site transport mode which represents how material is moved from one location to another.

FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

Facility is included in almost every join in the DWH so this represents a definitive split. A route must have all steps on tools in the same facility. A tool must process all lots in the same facility. If your site has multiple buildings where lots run on routes using tools in multiple buildings then everything should be one facility. For example, multiple Fab buildings. But if your site has independent facilities like Fab and Test and Assembly where lot may progress from one to the next but on different routes then these should be different facilities. Since this column is in virtually every table it is critical that the value here is exactly matches what is in the MES if the MES has facility. Use facility_display for the display friendly name displayed in applications. See site_name comment for client/site/facility example.

FACILITY_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(20)

The name of the facility displayed on all dashboards and reports. Facility is a short field since it is used in every join so we allow a longer more descriptive name here although often this will be the same as the facility.

FACILITY_OUT

VARCHAR2(6)

Facility of final flushed product. See detailed comments and examples in table overview.

FACILITY_SEGMENT

VARCHAR2(36)

Facility segment is the parent of common step and is used as the highest level grouping when we show WIP for a route group or the entire facility where we cannot use route segment. We would prefer somewhere between 8 and 20 facility segments. Typically we will have to define these (as opposed to route_segment which we will typically come from the MES). There is no RTG_FACILITY_SEGMENTS table because sorting of facility segments is determined by common_step_sort. A trigger on RTG_COMMON_STEPS ensures that facility segments are contiguous when the entire facility is sorted by common step.

FB_PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(10)

This could be used for 0 through 10 or HIGH, MED, LOW but is left unconstrained for any site to use as they wish. We have considered adding a second table with would be the possible values that could be configured that is for a later time.

FDC_CHAMBER

VARCHAR2(32)

The chamber identifier within the FDC system which is unique to that FDC_TOOL. This can be a string or number.

FDC_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

The tool identifier within the FDC system. This could match the tool in the MES or DWH but this is not guaranteed.

FEEDBACK_FROM_EMAIL

VARCHAR2(128)

The email address to use as the From email when we send emails with the ADM_SEND_EMAIL procedure. We send emails via our Feedback application which is configured to do so for whatever restrictions we have at the site. This should probably be something like no-reply-dwh@client.com.

FEEDBACK_HOST_URL

VARCHAR2(500)

This is the host of the server where our Feedback application is configured. It should be something like http://fpsdev.client.com. We add /feedback/api/email to this host and use this URL to send emails via our Feedback application.

FEED_IF_LESS_THAN_SEC

NUMBER(6)

If WIP in the queue sequence as measured by total seconds of EET is below this number then we should prioritize lots entering the sequence.

FG_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(16)

The facility logged by the FabGuard Broker. Needed to change the name to not bother ADM_CHK_ALL to allow null in Facility.

FIFO_STEP_SEC_TO_EOL

NUMBER(11)

This can be used for critical ratio to avoid the following situation. Lot A of prd A and lot B of prd B are both at the same step on the same route. Plan CT for A is 40 plan CT for B is 60. Due date for A is in 41 days. Due date for B is in 59 days. Normal CR says A is one day ahead and B is one day behind so run B first. But this is insane because both are on the same route with exactly the same steps coming up and B is only "behind" because of a lower expectation. We should run A first. If we use FIFO then both are something like 50 days CT and A is 9 days behind and B is 9 days ahead. However there is a problem with this strategy because we would basically let B sit around and do nothing for 20 days until it was also 40 days and then have to run it at the same rate. So this is not perfect either.

FILE_NAME

VARCHAR2(50)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

FILLIN_AMR_PCT

NUMBER(3)

This is for our throughput calculations and addresses the case where we get a mix of real values and NA for the actual_machine_recipe for a particular process. If the percentage of real values is higher than this number then we assume that the NA are actually the real value and count all towards the throughput calculation. This avoids the confusing two rows for the same process, one with the real value and one with NA.

FILLIN_EMR_PCT

NUMBER(3)

This is for our throughput calculations and addresses the case where we get a mix of real values and NA for the est_machine_recipe for a particular process. If the percentage of real values is higher than this number then we assume that the NA are actually the real value and count all towards the throughput calculation. This avoids the confusing two rows for the same process, one with the real value and one with NA.

FILL_IN_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

One example use of this column is that we may set it to SLOW, MED, FAST to use as default for new recipes and then we would manually populate SLOW, MED, FAST recipe data for each EQP_TYPE in RTG_RECIPE_EQPTYPES.

FILTER

VARCHAR2(64)

The name of the filter to be defined in the UI. The filter can be used by multiple rules.

FILTER_DESCRIPTION

VARCHAR2(256)

The description of the filter.

FILTER_FROM_EQP_SUMMARIES

CHAR(1)

If this is Y then tools in this MNT_FAMILY will not be included in the EQP/ETP state summary bar charts on the facility and module level. This applies to bar charts on the Operations, Equipment, and Performance tabs of the Dashboard. EQP/ETP state summaries will still be available for these tools on the process family and tool level.

FILTER_PARAMETER

VARCHAR2(50)

The filter parameter. The parameter options will be limited and pre-defined unless the IS_LOT_PARAMETER flag is set to Y. In this case, the user will input the parameter, which will be looked up in WIP_LOT_PARAMETERS.

FILTER_VALUE

VARCHAR2(256)

The value for the filter parameter.

FIRMWARE_VERSION

VARCHAR2(20)

Firmware/Hardware version the tool us running. This value is only used to display in the Dashboard.

FIRST_LOT_IN_JOB

VARCHAR2(32)

The first lot in the job determined by the order of events. When this first lot logs the first tool event which is usually a reserve or dispatch then the job_id is created with only this lot. Then subsequent lots join this job. While we use job_id to identify lots that will process or are processing or processed together, first_lot_in_job is still a useful field.

FIRST_NAME

VARCHAR2(36)

First name of the user.

FIRST_NUM_HOURS

NUMBER

is used to determine hours of the first step of the lot to schedule based on the sched-group and lot-group; if not to schedule any lot from this group, then set this value to -1 will work

FIRST_QUAL_FROM_INST

DATE

First time during the maintenance when the tool was logged into qualification.

FIRST_UNIT_SEC

NUMBER(9,3)

Time for one unit to process when the tool starts from a standby state. On a batch tool -- defined as a tool where all units process together and take the same time regardless of qty -- this is the time for the batch. See our complete throughput documentation for more details.

FIRST_UNIT_SEC_LCL

NUMBER(9,3)

Lower control limit for first unit seconds used in our Throughput monitoring. Obviously this must be less than the manual first unit value.

FIRST_UNIT_SEC_UCL

NUMBER(9,3)

Upper control limit for first unit seconds used in our Throughput monitoring. Obviously this must be greater than the manual first unit value.

FIRST_WFR_BEG_INST

DATE

Time when the first wafer of the job started processing.

FIRST_WFR_END_INST

DATE

Time when the first wafer of the job finished processing.

FIXED_CARRIER_SEC

NUMBER(4)

Seconds between units in two different carriers in additional to the normal unit interval. This time is added to the EET, MPU, and UPH.

FLCT_REPEAT_DAYS

NUMBER(4)

There are two reasons why a lot would record a second finish event for the same lot/facility/prd. The first reason is that the lot id is reused which happens often for test wafers lots. To account for this, our default behavior is to only look for activity since the last finish event for this lot. But the second reason is that the lot was unshipped or unscrapped or the initial finish event was deleted in the MES or otherwise somehow reversed. In this case, we do not want to look for all activity since the start associated with the last finish event rather that since the last finish event. This parameter tells us to assume the second reason if the second finish event was within this many days of the first event. When the second reason occurs, the second event is usually just a few minutes after the first one but it can occasionally be longer. If your MES never reuses lot ids even for test wafer lots then you can set this to a big number without any concern.

FLUSH_SEQ_DESC

NUMBER(2)

Flush sequence descending is the order of main routes and banks for the lot from final flushed product back to the current. 1 is always the last main route or bank for the final flushed product.

FLUSH_SEQ_NUM

NUMBER(2)

Flush sequence number is the order of main routes and banks for the lot from current to the final flushed product. 1 is always the current main route or bank.

FONT_SIZE

NUMBER(2)

Font Size of the badge text or icon.

FORCE_VALID_FINISH_EVENT

VARCHAR2(48)

In order to count as a valid finished lot, a lot must complete the last real step in the route, complete at least one step in the last operation of the route, log a ship event, or log the event entered in this field as the event which signifies a valid finish event for the facility. In most facilities, setting this field will not be necessary because even if you have an event that signifies a valid finish event you are likely already setting is_ship_event to Y. The use case where this is necessary is when a lot must go through multiple prds in the same facility and we only want to count the ship out of the last prd as a ship event. Then we can set this field so that we can force the earlier prds to be valid if a lot logs this event.

FORMULA

VARCHAR2(1000)

Mathematical formula for how the data is derived.

FROM_BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

Bay to move from.

FROM_INST

DATE

Time from which this state was active.

FROM_MSO_PROCESS_NA

VARCHAR2(100)

Main processing step for the rule link. This is the step where the decision to tag lots is made and the skip/tag counter is incremented.

FROM_RQD_SETUP

VARCHAR2(100)

Setup that is changed from. This should match a value in rqd_setup in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS.

FTR_U_MIN_MFG_SECS

NUMBER(7)

This value is the minimum time a entity must be in an MFG state (SBY and PRD) in order to close an FTRu window.

FUTURE_THREAD_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Future step(s) that will have its PERM_RANK altered based on the tool that processed the lot at the start step

FUTURE_WIP_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

FUTURE_WIP_STEP is for sequenced operations. The most common is the Diffusion clean-furnace sequence. Lots for the furnace always wait at the sink so there is technically never any WIP at the furnace operation. But we do not want to count it as Sby No WIP if there is WIP available at the sink. This tells us to link the steps so that we will report Standby Wip At Previous Related Step.

GATHER_STATS_ALWAYS

CHAR(1)

For large history tables, we normally check if we should skip gathering stats during ADM_STATS_ALL. This flag forces the procedure to always gather stats on this table.

GATHER_STATS_NEVER

CHAR(1)

This flag causes ADM_STATS_ALL to never gather stats. This would typically be used for history tables to override the normal checks but could be used for any table if needed.

GBL_SORT

NUMBER(38)

Sorting used for dispatching or allocation systems to sort future start lots based on priority, critical ratio, etc.

GOAL_BEGIN_INST

DATE

Time when the lot has to complete the current step to remain on schedule.

GOAL_COMPLETES

NUMBER(12,4)

Completes goal for the current shift. Typically we calculate either completes or moves goal depending on the site logic and then either multiply moves by est_smp_pct to get completes or divide completes by est_smp_pct to get moves.

GOAL_MOVES

NUMBER(12,4)

Moves goal for the current shift means how many units we need to move through this step to progress towards our demand or due date. This could be either a complete or a skip. Typically we calculate either completes or moves goal depending on the site logic and then either multiply moves by est_smp_pct to get completes or divide completes by est_smp_pct to get moves.

GOAL_OPER_MOVES

NUMBER(12,4)

Oper moves goal for the current shift. This should be recorded at only one step of the operation at it can be at any step not necessarily the last one. Since we do not get an oper move if we skip the entire operation, this is typically the maximum goal completes for any step in the operation. Some sites might calculate goal oper moves independently and potentially even get goal moves and completes from the goal oper moves.

GOAL_WIP

NUMBER(12,4)

WIP goal for each shift. If you are using the GP logic in FPSAPP to get WIP goals for line balancing then you might want to pull those goals into this table to show on Dashboard. If not, this can be calculated by dividing the goal moves per day (from this logic) by the commit cycle time in days for the step (from CTM_SUMMARY_PLUS).

GOAL_WIP_PCT_TO_TGT_BAY_PERF

NUMBER(2)

The plus / minus percentage of target WIP that is considered acceptable in the Bay Performance NMV pages. EG 20% gives acceptable WIP range of 80 to 120 on a target of 100.

GP_SUBFAMILY

VARCHAR2(58)

GP_subfamily is used for Goal Planner and is an extension of process_family which can additionally include lot_group and an additional suffix. We populate GP_subfamily automatically based on process_family, process_subfamily, gp_subfamily_suffix, and add_lotgrp_to_gp_subfamily using the function GET_GP_SUBFAMILY. We build this starting with nvl(process_subfamily, process_family) followed by gp_subfamily_suffix if populated then followed by lot_group if add_lotgrp_to_gp_subfamily is set to Y. It is possible to have one or two or three parts. You might have values for process_family/process_subfamily/gp_subfamily_suffix/add_lotgrp of Furn/blank/blank/Y and that would give you gp_subfamilies of Furn/Prod and Furn/Dev. Or Furn/HighTemp/blank/Y would give you HighTemp/Prod and HighTemp/Dev. Or Sink/blank/FeedsOxFurn/N would give you Sink/FeedsOxFurn. And so on.

GP_SUBFAMILY_OR_EACH

VARCHAR2(36)

Key field containing the subfamily name or EACH when all values are specified for the values specified in this table

GP_SUBFAMILY_SUFFIX

VARCHAR2(12)

See comments in GET_GP_SUBFAMILY function. This field is normally blank unless configuration is required for Goal Planner.

GRANTEE

VARCHAR2(30)

User to whom the privilege needs to be granted

GROSS_DIE_PER_WFR

NUMBER(6)

Expected gross die per wafer for the product. This is a critical field for planning die shipments. Note this is gross so we multiply by line yield and by sort yield for remaining steps of remaining products.

GTG_EPISODE_FROM_INST

DATE

The time when the current series of ETP_MNT_EPISODES started and should be considered part of the same Green-to-green (GTG) time.

HASH_EVENT_KEY_IN_WIP_HOLD_FUT

CHAR(1)

If this is set to Y, then WIP_HOLD_FUTURE.EVENT_KEY field is a an opaque event identifier which can be used directly as a key by web apps; if N, then it is a long human-readable string and should be hashed before being used as a key.

HEX_CODE

VARCHAR2(7)

The hex code has the format of # then six hexadecimal characters.

HIDE_CTR_WSH_IF_LESS_THAN_SECS

NUMBER(4)

To reduce the number of rows on the Finished Lot Cycle Time lot history page, we hide steps which took less than this number of seconds. The default is 1200 or 20 minutes. We always show the first and last steps even if they were fast.

HIDE_EVENT_IN_DASH_HIST

CHAR(1)

Occasionally we have certain events which are logged frequently in the MES but are unimportant. We do not want to show these events in the Dashboard lot event history table as they clutter up the list. Set this column to Y to hide an event from this list.

HIDE_FACILITY_ON_WEB

CHAR(1)

Hide a facility from our applications. Default is N, but setting to Y hides on Dashboard and other applications will not reference hidden facility

HIDE_FUT_IN_LOT_STEP_SUMMARY

CHAR(1)

Indicates whether future step records will be hidden in the Dashboard Lot History Summary table.

HIDE_IN_DASH

CHAR(1)

Set to Y to hide this tool from the Dashboard and most other reports.

HIDE_IN_MSO

CHAR(1)

Set to Y to hide this tool from the MSO Dashboard and MSO UI. This should be used on tools where no metrology or tracking is required.

HIDE_LOTS_IN_DASH

CHAR(1)

This flag is similar to CONSIDER_IN_BANK but even more extreme. This flag will completely hide all lots and moves on this route from the Dashboard. Honestly we discourage anyone from using this flag (and strongly discourage it for anything but test wafers) but it is here at least for Dashboard only if a particular site really wants it.

HIDE_ON_THP_PAGE

CHAR(1)

Some eqp types we just simply do not care about their throughput so we can use this flag to hide them from our Throughput Tracker.

HIDE_ON_TOOLS_IN_NMV

CHAR(1)

Hides all lots of the test wafer lot type on the NextMove tool page and bay view. This should rarely be used and when it is used it should only be set to Y for specific test wafer lot types that you never want to see on the NextMove screens.

HIDE_TIMER_IN_DASH

CHAR(1)

This configuration will remove WIP for this timer_id from the Dashboard Queue Timer report.

HISTORY_SOURCE

VARCHAR2(36)

The reason why this history was written. What caused us to think that this mnt event was finished. Values starting with U are triggered from updating in EQP_MNT_FUTURE. Values starting with D are from being deleted from EQP_MNT_FUTURE, values start with C are triggered from a counter reset in EQP_MNT_COUNTER_CURR.

HIST_CATCHUP_MINS_AFTER_DD

NUMBER(5)

The number of minutes of data we load during each run of WIP_EVENT_HIST. This is constrained to be at least 30 minutes. This value becomes important after the load gets behind, either due to a planned stop or due to a failure. Loading all of the missing data at once can overwhelm the database so we catchup this many minutes at a time.

HIST_INSERTED_TIME

TIMESTAMP(6)

Unlike just about every other history table, ETP_HIST does not have a single column that represents the inst associated with the record. For example, WIP_EVENT_HIST has inst, WIP_END_SHIFT_HIST has start_shift, THP_EQPTYPE_WEEK_HIST has start_week, and so on. These columns are consistent with the data in the entire table and sorting by them gives you a consistent order of the records in the table. When a record is inserted into ETP_HIST, it might be because of an EQP state change in which case eqp_to_inst would be the inst of the event that triggered the state change. But etp_to_inst would still be the old value. And vice versa for ETP state changes. Furthermore while usually either eqp_to_inst or etp_to_inst is relevant, we also insert records when the standby state changes without a EQP/ETP state change and in these cases sby_inst is relevant but both eqp_to_inst and etp_to_inst are old values. And the worst case is when the only change is a standby state of any entity on the tool which actually has no relevant inst. The only column which is always relevant is hist_inserted_time so we have no choice but to use this column as the purge_column_name in CFG_TABLES. By the nature of the logic, hist_inserted_time is always newer than all of the other inst values so we will never purge too many records. If the data is behind or loaded for a past period then we will purge too little but that is acceptable.

HIST_OVERLAP_MINS_BEFORE_DD

NUMBER(3)

In a perfect world, we could just load all events newer than data_date into WIP_EVENT_HIST. But the world is not perfect. Instead events are loaded into the MES in an order which does not perfectly match the order in which they were logged. In other words, an event logged at 01:23:46 is inserted in the MES before another event logged at 01:23:45. In order to not miss any events, we have to go back at least a few seconds prior to data_date and then check if those events have already been inserted and insert only if not. This variable determines how far back we have to look. Usually it should be a minute or too but there is little cost in going back 5 or 10 minutes just to make sure. For debugging, we might set temporarily to a larger number but for normal running it should be no longer than an hour.

HIST_WEEKS_FOR_CTM_FIN_PERIOD

NUMBER(3)

If you choose to define finished period by weeks then this is the number of weeks to load into the CTR tables and show on the FLCT application. We store all data in the CTM_FINISHED_LOT_HIST table and purge that table based on the normal purge logic in CFG_TABLES so this is only for the CTR/FLCT.

HOLD_FOR

VARCHAR2(48)

The user responsible for the hold lot. Note this is different than the user who put the lot on hold. This is the person who needs to address the hold and potentially release it.

HOLD_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

Grouping of hold_type for reporting purposes.

HOLD_NOTE

VARCHAR2(512)

Comment or note entered when the lot went on hold. Normally this should match the comment which was entered in the hold event. The logic to determine the hold note can get tricky when a subsequent comment event is logged to a lot already on hold because we do not know whether to update the hold note with the new comment or keep the comment from the original event that put the lot on hold. Our solution is to not update the hold_note by trigger with this comment event and leave the decision to our logic in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY. If you want to use the subsequent comment then populate it as the hold_note in WLV otherwise keep the original comment in WLV. Then our logic in CHK_WIP_LOTS_REALTIME is that if the hold_note written in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY differs from the hold_note populated by trigger while the hold_type and hold_for agree then we waive the normal 20 minute waiting period and update the hold_note immediately with a MISS-HOLDNOTE event.

HOLD_PARM1

VARCHAR2(128)

Four user-defined fields which can store anything the user would like to track relating to the hold type.

HOLD_PARM2

VARCHAR2(128)

See HOLD_PARM1.

HOLD_PARM3

VARCHAR2(128)

See HOLD_PARM1.

HOLD_PARM4

VARCHAR2(128)

See HOLD_PARM1.

HOLD_PRTY_GROUP

VARCHAR2(20)

This field determines the grouping of hold lots displayed on the Dashboard hold page. Typically the highlighted priorities will each be in their own group and all others will be in a group named OTHERS. We might want to separate low priority lots too.

HOLD_TYPE

VARCHAR2(24)

Generally hold_type will come directly from the MES.

HOME_BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

Assign vehicle to a home bay for the normal place where the cart resides. If you assign a home bay, then the transit times for lots on the vehicle will be determined using the bay to bay matrix with the home bay as the from bay.

HOME_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

The optional home station of the vehicle or carrier is generally where it should be stored when not in use or the area in which it operates.

HOME_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

The optional home tool of the durable is generally where it should return after maintenance or inspection or where we prefer to schedule its use

HOST_ACTION

VARCHAR2(100)

Indicate the default action of host

HOST_CONTROLLER

VARCHAR2(100)

Indicate the default controller of host

HOST_TYPE

VARCHAR2(36)

is used to tell if this is for WEB or SERVICE

HOURS_FOR_NEXT_MOVE

NUMBER(3)

Include lot-step in NextMove Pick List if lot is expected to arrive sooner than hours_for_next_move or if step is less than or equal to this many steps away from the current step. Populates nmv_display_in_pick_list column in WIP_STEP_FUTURE

HOURS_FOR_WIP_STEP_FUT

NUMBER(4)

The maximum number of expected hours to arrival for steps in WIP_STEP_FUTURE. This is used in combination with steps_for_wip_step_fut. For example, if this is 48 and steps is 10 then we write all steps where a lot is expected to arrive within 48 hours or is within 10 steps way. This should likely be 24-72 for a fab and possibly a bit longer for assembly/test.

HOURS_SINCE_PROC

NUMBER(4,1)

Hours since the tool was last processing lots.

HOURS_TO_DISPLAY

NUMBER(5)

WILL REMOVE SOON

HOURS_TO_SCHEDULE

NUMBER(5)

This column is used to determine how many hours to look ahead and schedule the lots that might come into this area/SCHED-GROUP even it is still several steps away.

HOURS_TO_SCHEDULE_FIRST_STEP

NUMBER

to set the max hours to sched for the first step of each lot

HOURS_TO_SCHEDULE_TOOL_EVENT

NUMBER

to indicate how far in the future to include a tool_event. Any event that starts within current time + this value will be considered

HOVER_TEXT

VARCHAR2(100)

The hover text of the report link

HTML_STYLE

VARCHAR2(500)

used to configure how to display this lot priority on kitting/scheduler web page

ICON_NAME

VARCHAR2(50)

Unique name to be used for each icon.

IGNORE_BANK_TW_ON_DASH

CHAR(1)

The Dashboard spotlight shows a number of Test Wafers in the facility. Usually we want this to include test wafers in a bank so we would set this to N. To ignore test wafers in a bank then set this to Y.

IGNORE_BATCH_FOR_ETP

CHAR(1)

Some unusual tools load lots as a batch but then process each lot individually like a non-batch tool. On these tools we need to treat them as batch tools for Dashboard and Scheduler but ETP should treat each lot individually. This flag tells ETP to do just that.

IGNORE_BATCH_FOR_INC_BATCH_PCT

CHAR(1)

This flag will allow batch thp tools to not report any incomplete batch pct for ETP if set to Y. This should rarely be used for tools that should schedule as batch tools but not report any ETP loss because of the batch size. This configuration is created specifically for the Mattson Asher tools

IGNORE_BLANK_CHK

CHAR(1)

Certain sites have a known ETL condition that can lead to key columns temporarily populating blank! values in WIP_EVENT_HIST. Setting this to Y tells SYSMNTR_ERRORS to ignore its standard check for blank! values at this site.

IGNORE_BNS

CHAR(1)

If set to Y the bottleneck score will always be 999 so it will be a the bottom of the list. Note that we normally use pace for families with no tools therefore this should generally be set only for families which we do not care about whatsoever.

IGNORE_FOR_SCHED

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if the location should be ignored by the Scheduler. Usually this value is the same as is_internal and in fact all ports which are not internal are constrained to not be ignored but occasionally the Scheduler does schedule internal ports such as boats.

IGNORE_HOLD_FOR_PROC_STATE

CHAR(1)

When a metrology tool detects an error on a wafer, it often automatically places the lot on hold even though the job is still processing on the metrology tool. When this happens, we want to consider this as a "running hold" which means that the lot continues processing and then will be on hold as soon as it finishes. There are two ways to indicate a running hold if put on hold during processing, either by the is_running_hold_if_proc column for a hold_type or by this column for all tools in an eqp_type. This is an "or" condition so if a hold_type is Y that applies to all tools and if a tool is Y that applies to all hold types. When a lot goes on a running hold, we will set the ECT state of the lot to PRD-RUNHOLD and keep the ETP state of the tool in PRD. Then when the lot ends or moves to the next step, we will set the ECT state of the lot to HOLD and set the ETP state of the tool using our normal END logic which will set to Standby unless a newer job has started.

IGNORE_MAIN_ALWAYS

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates to ignore the state of the main entity. When this flag is set and the main entity is down and a chamber is up that we schedule lots to that chamber and we consider the tool to be partially up in our ETP calculation. The only known use cases for this are Photo cells that can run track only lots when the track is up and the main cell is down.

IGNORE_MAIN_IF_PRD

CHAR(1)

Set to Y to ignore main tool in cluster calculations when in a PRD state. This is configurable because some tools log better information for main tool and some for chambers.

IGNORE_PASS_THRU_PRD_FOR_FLCT

CHAR(1)

Our normal logic to determine whether a finished lot is considered valid for FLCT calculations is to only count as valid if the lot moved through the first step and the last step of the main route (or if they ran on the last step and split from a lot that ran on the first step). But many sites especially those with multiple facilities have prds that we call "pass-through" prds where the prd goes through a bank but no steps. If we want to count any lots as valid for these prds then the only option is to simply count all finished lots as valid because if we used our normal logic then we would never have any lots as valid. Whether or not to do this is configurable here by facility.

IGNORE_PROC_LONGER

CHAR(1)

This flag tells ETP that we should never set state to Missed Cascade when processing a lot of this lot group because the throughput estimates are unreliable. This must always be N for production lot groups.

IGNORE_WLRT_UPDATED_TIMESTAMP

CHAR(1)

This flag determines if WIP_LOTS_REALTIME_UPDATE_BEF should check if the Updated_timestamp is different or not. Most cases do want to check that the updated_timestamp is new, but at some sites where they ETL runs really fast and the database lacks high timestamp precision (3 vs. 6 places) it may be beneficial to suppress preventing updates to wip_lot_realtime for having the same update_timestamp.

INCLUDE_EQP_STATE_IN_DASH_ETP

CHAR(1)

This column will add the MES state of the tool to the end of the ETP_STATE_NAME for Dashboard users to see the MES state of the tool after the ETP state. If set to N then only the ETP state will be shown.

INCLUDE_EST_TRANSIT_IN_XFACTOR

CHAR(1)

We automatically calculate the estimated transit time for each route-step in the RTG_EST_TRANSIT view and we write this to CTM_SUMMARY in the est_transit_sec column but this flag tells us whether to include this in the processing time denominator of the X-Factor calculation in DCTA, FLCT, and PERF.

INCLUDE_IN_CTA_IF_NOT_MAIN

CHAR(1)

By default, we only include the main route for each prd in Cycle Time Analyzer. If we want to include alternate main routes in CTA then we can set this flag. Note that these must be full alternate routes for the prd and not rework routes nor short loop routes as those are not added properly to the overall calculation.

INCLUDE_IN_DASH_DOWN

CHAR(1)

This column will hide tools from the Down tools section of the Equipment Dashboard if set to N for this opportunity state

INCLUDE_IN_WIP_FLUSH

CHAR(1)

Indicates whether this start should be included in the WIP_FLUSH table. Generally this should be Y for near future starts and N for those which are more distant but it is fine to set for all or none depending on your use of WIP_FLUSH.

INCLUDE_IN_WSF

CHAR(1)

Indicates whether this start should be included in the WIP_STEP_FUTURE table. Please only set this to Y for starts within a week or two because a larger WIP_STEP_FUTURE table can impact the speed of the RealTime job and the overall database. Plus there is no need to have starts in the distant future in WIP_STEP_FUTURE.

INCLUDE_NST_AS_CAP_ENT

CHAR(1)

Determines whether tools/chambers in NST states should be counted as capacity entities. The default value is N.

INC_BATCH_EQP_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

This optional column is the eqp_state to use for processing incomplete batch if this is included in the client equipment state model. Populate only if you are passing eqp_inc_batch_pct in EQP_EVENT_HIST.

INC_BATCH_PCT

NUMBER(3)

Percentage of the full batch size processed. For tool performance calculations, TOOL_PCT percentage productivity is calculated using INC_BATCH_PCT to factor in that the batch size is not fully utilized.

INDICATOR_NAME

VARCHAR2(128)

A maintenance indicator is the name of a value that needs to be tracked and controlled to monitor the maintenance status of a tool or chamber.

INHIBIT_E_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

In the curr_rank logic used for ETP, perm_rank E (Emergency) automatically becomes U (Use Emergency) when all other allowed tools are down or blocked. The idea of this logic is that we will only want to run lots of rank E when there is no better available allowed tool. When this column is set to Y then we replicate this behavior for Scheduler and only send lots with perm_rank E to the Scheduler when all other allowed tools are down or blocked. If this is set to Y and the lot has at least one other tool of a better rank like P or A then we will not show this tool as an option for this lot on Scheduler.

INITIALIZE_INST

DATE

This is the time when this DWH started logging events. When we insert entities into the DWH we set their state to SBY-DEF starting at this time. When lot events are logged we will set the step_ent_inst to this inst. While this is a helpful reference over the entire life of the DWH it is only used for the startup event logging. We like this to be the start of a work week so we can get summary information for entire weeks.

INNER_MAX_PCT

NUMBER(4,1)

Inner upper limit for this target type.

INNER_MIN_PCT

NUMBER(4,1)

Inner lower limit for this target type.

INPUT_DESC

NVARCHAR2(2000)

used to set a slider description display that will stay constant within the sched_group

INPUT_RANK

NUMBER(1)

Preference where we want to send carriers which are reserved to this tool. These are typically input racks/stockers for the bay. This is a non-unique numeric rank from 1 to 9 where 1 is first choice and 9 is last choice.

INPUT_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Bay input rack assigned to the carrier based on either reserved or scheduled tool

INSERTED_TIME

TIMESTAMP(6)

Timestamp field set by trigger storing SYSTIMESTAMP when record was inserted in the table.

INST

DATE

Time when the event occurred.

INSTALL_COMPLETE_INST

DATE

This is the time when the script complete running on this database. To be more specific, it is the time when we turned ETL on (or when we skipped turning ETL on because we knew we were continuing to upgrade to a newer version). A a null value in this column signifies that the upgrade script for the version has not yet completed.

INSTALL_INST

DATE

This is the time when the script started running on this database.

INTERMEDIATE_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

For NextMove, all moves from the from_bay to the to_bay should go to this station next.

INTERVAL_SEC

NUMBER(9,3)

Unit_int_sec or batch_int_sec expected for the lot at the time of processing from our THP tables.

INTERVAL_SEC_LCL

NUMBER(9,3)

Lower control limit for interval seconds used in our Throughput monitoring. Obviously this must be less than the manual interval value.

INTERVAL_SEC_UCL

NUMBER(9,3)

Upper control limit for interval seconds used in our Throughput monitoring. Obviously this must be greater than the manual interval value.

INT_SEC_TO_REFRESH_WEB_DATA

NUMBER(5)

Interval where Scheduler will refresh cached web data after this many seconds have elapsed since last refresh

INT_SEC_TO_RUN_SCHEDULER

NUMBER(5)

This column is used to determine how often to run the scheduler for this SCHED-GROUP. For example, if it sets 60 seconds in this column, it means it will wait for at least 60 seconds before initializing a new scheduler run from the end time of previous run.

INVESTIGATED_BY

VARCHAR2(64)

Name of person who is investigating or did investigate this error.

INVESTIGATED_ON

DATE

Datetime when this error was last investigated.

INVESTIGATION_NOTE

VARCHAR2(512)

This is optional if the error is under investigation and stop_alert_until_inst is null. It is required if we are not alerting about this error.

IN_BAY_TRANSPORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(10)

Bay level in bay transport mode. If no other mode is specified, this will be the value used to direct wip within a bay internally.

IS_ACTIVE

CHAR(1)

Flag to enable or disable the tag condition.

IS_ALARM

CHAR(1)

This should be set to Y if the state should count as an alarm event. (This is typically a downtime event automatically triggered by the equipment.)

IS_ALARM_EVENT

CHAR(1)

Is set to Y when the episode included an Alarm state. Should possible be called has_alarm_event. Check L5_state_diagram for states.

IS_ALLOWED_FOR_SCHED

CHAR(1)

Lots on hold are only scheduled if this flag for the hold type is set to Y. By default this is N which means that lots on hold are not scheduled.

IS_ALLOWED_IF_COL_NOT_NULL

CHAR(1)

This column indicates exactly how the column is ignored by the ETL.

IS_ALSO_ACCEPTABLE_IF_CURRLOC

CHAR(1)

This means that we would not send reserved carriers from elsewhere in the site to this location but if the carrier is already here that is not worth moving an assigned input location. Typically this is Y for location which are in adjacent bays.

IS_AMHS

CHAR(1)

This field indicates if the stocker is part of the Automated Material Handling System.

IS_ANY_VALID_OUTPUT_NEARBY

CHAR(1)

Set this flag to Y to not use bay runner. This means operators will be directed to go get any reserved lot from any valid output rack in their building.

IS_ANY_WAFER_SIZE

CHAR(1)

A value of null for wafer_size means that these tools can run all wafer sizes. This column is only to eliminate confusion for ETL maintenance purposes. A value of Y means these tools are known to run all wafer sizes while the default value of N means we have no wafer size information for these tools.

IS_ASSIST_CHAMBER

CHAR(1)

This indicates that the chamber assists the other primary chambers. If an assist chamber is in ch_allowed then at one least chamber of the ch_type must be up but as long as this is true then we ignore the assist chambers. We send only the non-assist chambers to the schedule as ch_to_sched.

IS_AT_COMP

CHAR(1)

Specifies if the hold will occur when the lot completes the step.

IS_AT_DISP

CHAR(1)

Specifies if the hold will occur when the lot is dispatched to a tool.

IS_AT_ENTER

CHAR(1)

Specifies if the hold will occur when the lot enters the step, which in some cases will be when the lot finishes the previous step.

IS_AUTO

CHAR(1)

This field shows if the port mode is set to automatically deliver material. If the facility either has automated delivery (aka 300mm) or is using semi-automated delivery (aka NextMove) then a port set to a port_mode where this is N but is_up is Y is considered manual. A manual port means that the delivery system cannot use this port. If all ports are manual then rank will be M (Ports Manual) and ETP will set the state to SBY-RANKM (Standby With All Ports in Manual). In addition, we report auto_pct by summarizing the port states in auto and manual.

IS_AUTO_KILL_ALLOWED

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether the session is allowed to be killed automatically.

IS_AUTO_SLOT_ASSIGNMENT

CHAR(1)

Y means automatically assign lot locations on carts. N means let the user assign the slot by scanning the lot then scanning the location.

IS_BATCH_THP

CHAR(1)

This is a critical value for throughput calculations. Throughput for batch tools is the same regardless of the qty in the batch. Throughput for non-batch tools varies based on the qty in the job. Usually this is Y when max_batch_size_carriers > 1 but not always. We can have tools who load multiple carriers together but whose throughput is calculated per unit. We can also have tools who load only single carriers but whose throughput is calculated per batch.

IS_BOLD

CHAR(1)

Font Weight of the badge text or icon.

IS_CAP_ENT_BY_TOOL

CHAR(1)

Used if you do not want to allow eqp_entities to determine this with internal logic and force it to be based on the tool

IS_CASCADING_IMPOSSIBLE

CHAR(1)

There are some chamber tools where we know cascading is not possible but running in parallel can confuse the THP logic so this flag addresses that.

IS_CHGLOG_ADDL_ENABLED

CHAR(1)

This column allows us to enable CHGLOG table/trigger functionality on additional tables which would not otherwise have it based on our normal manual table or manual columns logic.

IS_CHGLOG_PERM_DISABLED

CHAR(1)

Our FPSINPUT tables have the capability to record all changes in a CHGLOG table as built by BLD_CHGLOG. You can disable this by setting this to Y.

IS_CHILD_LOT_FOR_MSO

CHAR(1)

Field specific for telling MSO if a lot is a child lot or not. Tag conditions can be set to no allow child lots to be tagged. This field controls what is a child lot for MSO.

IS_COMPLETE

CHAR(1)

Boolean indicating whether the lot has completed processing.

IS_COMP_RQD_FOR_OPER_MOVE

CHAR(1)

This indicates whether a move must have move_type of COMP in order to count as an oper move.

IS_CONFIG_HIST_TABLE

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the table is history table of all the MSO configurations

IS_CONFIG_TABLE

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the table is a MSO configuration table that defines rules, tag conditions, waivers, settings, etc. Typically these are tables modified by the UI. These tables may have triggers associated to them that track changes.

IS_CONTIGUOUS

CHAR(1)

Since this table accepts different period types to display on FLCT we might need to choose only certain values to represent the forecasted cycle time for this prd over time. For example, we might have weekly values and then a value for the entire upcoming year and in this case all of the weekly values would be Y and the year value would be N so we would ignore the year value for all uses other than displaying it.

IS_COPY_ALLOWED

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the table is part of the COPY_CONFIGURATION_TABLES procedure in ADM_MSO_UTILITIES package.

IS_COUNT_PRIORITY_PCT

CHAR(1)

This flag determines which priorities to include in our overall percentage of priority lots in the Dashboard spotlight. This is similar to is_highlighted_prty but it is possible that we might want to highlight a priority but not include it in the percentage.

IS_CRITICAL_IN_NMV

CHAR(1)

Used by NextMove to highlight critical tools in BayView. Ideally the client would update this column via ETL

IS_CTM_CALC_BY_PROCESS

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether we calculate planned queue cycle time by process instead of by eqp_family

IS_CURR

CHAR(1)

Boolean flag where Y indicates this row is for the current main route or product. Same as flush_seq_num = 1.

IS_DATA_HIST_TABLE

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the table contains history of MSO sampling results (i.e. tagging decisions, process history, etc.). This also is used if copying data from one database to another.

IS_DATA_TABLE

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the table contains current MSO data (i.e. current counters, tagged lots, etc.). This also is used if copying data from one database to another.

IS_DEFAULT

CHAR(1)

This is used to land the first sched group on the scheduler/web by default

IS_DEFAULT_PARAMETER

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating if the parameter is the default parameter to be set. For the UI this will be the default parameter selected.

IS_DEFAULT_UNCHECK_ON_DASH

CHAR(1)

Flag used for lot group, wafer size, and line section that indicates whether this value should be unchecked by default on the Dashboard. All TW must be unchecked.

IS_DEFAULT_UNCHECK_ON_DCTA

CHAR(1)

Flag used for lot group, wafer size, and line section that indicates whether this value should be unchecked by default on Dynamic Cycle Time Analyzer. All TW must be unchecked.

IS_DEFAULT_UNCHECK_ON_FLCT

CHAR(1)

Flag used for lot group and wafer size that indicates whether this value should be unchecked by default on Finished Lot Cycle Time. Please note that line section does not apply to FLCT. All TW must be unchecked.

IS_DEFAULT_UNCHECK_ON_PERF

CHAR(1)

Flag used for lot group, wafer size, and line section that indicates whether this value should be unchecked by default on Performance. All TW must be unchecked.

IS_DEFAULT_UNCHECK_ON_WF

CHAR(1)

Flag used for lot group, wafer size, and line section that indicates whether this value should be unchecked by default on WIP Flush. All TW must be unchecked.

IS_DELETE_EVENT

CHAR(1)

If the event results in this lot being deleted then logic in the trigger will set this to Y. This flag indicates that we should delete this lot from WIP_EVENTS_CURR_STEP and WIP_STEP_FUTURE in via subsequent triggers. There are two correct ways to delete a lot. One is to log an event with the qty set to 0 (i.e. merge or scrap or terminate). Two is to log an event where next_facility is set to a facility which is not in GEN_FACILITIES (i.e. ship). Then there is case three where the lot disappears from WIP_LOTS_VERIFY with no event designating this. Case three means the ETL needs to be improved to log the proper event so it becomes case one or two.

IS_DIE_BANK_FOR_CTM

CHAR(1)

We treat the die bank as a special bank regardless of the facility in our finished lot cycle time logic. Often there are die banks within each facility and we sum them together and count these die separately from other banks.

IS_DISPLAY_SLOT

CHAR(1)

Identifies slot on smart rack where the tablet is positioned, so a lot is unable to be stored there.

IS_DISP_RQD_TO_INSERT_WWH_WEH

CHAR(1)

When the first wafer begin event is logged in WIP_WAFER_HIST for a lot, we consider whether to copy this event as a lot BEGIN event in WIP_EVENT_HIST. If this flag is set to Y then we require the proc state to be DISP (meaning that the lot has been tracked in) in order to copy. Copying the event to WEH will set the proc_state of the lot to PROC and the etp_state of the tool to PRD.

IS_DURABLE_AT_DESTINATION

CHAR(1)

NextMove flag indicating if the durable location is the same as the tool the carrier needs to process on.

IS_DURABLE_REQUIRED

CHAR(1)

NextMove flag indicating if the carrier requires a durable to process.

IS_DURABLE_RQD

CHAR(1)

The scenario addressed here is when the recipe which requires a durable is allowed but the durable assignment is missing. We do not want to schedule lots without the durable but we could do this unless this flag is set to Y. Here are the four combinations for reference. 1) When is_durable_required is set to Y and there is a durable assigned then the Scheduler will schedule the lot using that durable. This is the normal Photo case. 2) When is_durable_required is set to Y and there is no durable assigned then the Scheduler will not allow the lot to be scheduled. This is important for Photo to not schedule without durable. 3) When is_durable_required is set to N and there is a durable assigned then the Scheduler will schedule the lot using that durable. You will notice that the flag actually does not matter when there is a durable assigned. That is this flag is not populated at some older sites so we cannot only look for the durable if this flag is set because then the Photo Scheduler would not schedule anything at these older sites. When is_durable_required is set to N and there is no durable assigned then the Scheduler will schedule the lot without a durable. This is the normal case for all groups outside of Photo. This would also be the case at the older sites for Photo except that we have some hardcoded logic at those sites to address this. Eventually we will transition all sites to use the is_durable_required flag.

IS_DURABLE_SCHEDULED_ONLY

CHAR(1)

Check to see if trk views should only use scheduled durables

IS_DYNAMIC_TOOLSTATUS_COND_ON

CHAR(1)

Flag that sets the rule group to allow dynamic adjusting of the sample condition and min condition override depending on tool conditions for the rule group.

IS_EQP_RELATED

CHAR(1)

This should be set to Y for UDT or SDT states where the equipment is solely responsible for the entity being down and is actively being diagnosed or repaired. (Does not include Wait-times or alarms, can include Quals). Should only be Set to Y for Downtime (UDT or SDT) states

IS_EQP_RELATED_EVENT

CHAR(1)

Is set to Y when the event is solely caused by the equipment. This is used to determine the Equipment related metrics. Should possible be called has_eqp_related_event. Check L5_state_diagram for states.

IS_ETL_ON

CHAR(1)

This flag allows us to turn off ETL temporarily for either APF or DBLINK sites. Unlike most columns in GEN_SITE, this column should only be set by a procedure and not set manually.

IS_ETL_TABLE

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the table or certain columns in the table is affect MSO. This is primarly used for verifying differences between databases in ETL tables.

IS_ETL_UNDER_DEVELOPMENT

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if the ETL is still under development to hide errors including no rows and disabled constraints that are acceptable.

IS_EXCLUDED_LINE_BALANCE

CHAR(1)

Lots on hold are excluded from line balance calculations if this flag for the hold type is set to Y. By default this is N which means that lots on hold of this type are included in line balance calculations.

IS_EXCLUDE_IN_MSO

CHAR(1)

This flag controls if a certain lot parameter will not increment the counters or impact the MSO system decisions. By default we allow all lots, but this provides excluding lots that client may not want to impact their sampling outcome.

IS_EXCLUSIVE_CHAMBER

CHAR(1)

This indicates that the tool may not run other jobs on other standby chambers while this job is running. For example, a process uses only chamber B on a three chamber tool. Normally that means you can run another job that uses A and/or C. However when this job is running you cannot run anything on chamber A nor C. If A and/or C are down you can still run the process on B.

IS_EXEMPT_FROM_TOP_ON_DASH

CHAR(1)

Normally we sort process familiies by Bottleneck Score or WIP but there are some facilities, usually logistics or sometimes metrology, that we do not want to show on the top even when the Score indicates they should be.

IS_EXPIRED_ON_NEXT_MEASURE

CHAR(1)

Defines if the waiver will expire once a lot is measured at Metrology. If the falg is set to Y the waiver will espire and is deleted even if the scan happens prior to the expiration time defined for the waiver.

IS_EXPIRED_ON_NEXT_TAG

CHAR(1)

Defines if the waiver will expire when the next lot is tagged or not. If the flag is set to Y the waiver expires and is deleted even if the tagged lot is before the expiration time defined for the waiver.

IS_EXPT_STEP

CHAR(1)

Flag set to Y if the experiment requires abnormal processing at this step.

IS_EXTERNAL

CHAR(1)

Y means the job is called externally so we should not expect it to be in ADM_LOAD_CFG_SCHED.

IS_EXTL_RANK_RENEWABLE

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates that if we run a lot applying to this record on the tool that we can renew the expiration of this rank. For example, a thread that expires after 48 hours of not being used. In this case, we would want to encourage scheduling a lot to renew the rank even if it is slightly lower priority than other lots.

IS_EXTRA_SCAN_BUFFER

CHAR(1)

This column allows you to bifurcate locations into 2 types. 1st is a real location that represents a physical spot, this is the default N value. The 2nd is if this location is not actually real and just being used to give extra space for whatever reason you may need it. If this is set to Y then it will not add to the cast_capacity displayed in the Dashboard.

IS_FIRST_TIME_RIGHT_FAIL

CHAR(1)

The denotes if this reason should count as a failed SDT episode. The idea is that if a Y flag is seen within the green to green (GTG) episodes after an SDT episode than that means that the SDT PM was not performed first-time-right, FTR. if the flag is set to N than the reason code will not cause a FRT fail.

IS_FIXED_FOR_SCHED

CHAR(1)

Y indicates that this upcoming maintenance time is fixed and should be scheduled around by the Scheduler.

IS_FUTURE

CHAR(1)

This should be set to Y if the state does not apply immediately. Production runoff and alarms are two examples where we do not want to set this state in ETP until the tool misses the cascade and starts to lose productivity.

IS_FUTURE_FACILITY

CHAR(1)

This flag is unnecessary and poorly named and will be dropped in a future release.

IS_HIDDEN_BY_DEFAULT

CHAR(1)

If this flag is set then this event is hidden by default on the Maintenance Dashboard to avoid clutter. There is an option to show hidden events.

IS_HIGHLIGHTED_PRTY

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates if this priority should be highlighted on the dashboard. When we sort all priorities by priority_sort all Y should be first followed by all N.

IS_HOLD

CHAR(1)

This field indicates the lot is on hold after the event is logged. In other words, this will always be Y if is_hold_start is Y and always N if is_hold_end is Y.

IS_HOLD_END

CHAR(1)

Event ended hold

IS_HOLD_START

CHAR(1)

Event started hold

IS_IGNORE_MAIN_ENTITY_STATE

CHAR(1)

is used to determine on the chamber tool to know if it should ignore the main entity state and make it always UP?

IS_IGNORE_MOVABLE_TURNS

CHAR(1)

Movable turns differs from our standard turns calculation in that we ignore steps where lots are not expected to move like staging steps or logistics steps. Like is_ignore_turns, this flag can be set in either RTG_OPERATION_FAMILIES, RTG_PROCESSES, or RTG_LINE_SECTIONS.

IS_IGNORE_MOVES

CHAR(1)

This flag is in both RTG_OPERATION_FAMILIES and RTG_PROCESSES. If the value is Y for the operation family then we do not count moves from those operations as oper moves. If the value is Y for either the operation family or the process then we do not count moves from the route-step as completes even if our normal logic suggests that it should be a complete. This logic can cause confusion so here are a few important notes. 1) Dashboard does not read the is_ignore_moves flag therefore we must set move_type to DSKIP rather than COMP and we must set is_oper_move to N in order to ignore the move. 2) This flag is often used for staging steps but it is independent of the is_staging_step flag so if you want to ignore staging steps then you need to set these flags appropriately. 3) The flag in RTG_PROCESSES does not directly affect the oper moves but it does affect it indirectly if the is_comp_rqd_for_oper_move is set to Y. In that case, if the only move during the operation is for a process which is ignored then we do not have a complete during the operation and therefore will not count the move from the operation as an oper move since a complete is required.

IS_IGNORE_TURNS

CHAR(1)

This flag is in RTG_OPERATION_FAMILIES, RTG_PROCESSES, and RTG_LINE_SECTIONS. If this flag is Y in any of the three tables then we do not count turns at the route-step towards the total for the facility. We also ignore turns at route-steps where we ignore WIP and/or moves which makes sense since turns is moves divided by WIP. Finally we ignore turns for certain line sections towards the facility average.

IS_IGNORE_WIP

CHAR(1)

This flag is in both RTG_OPERATION_FAMILIES and RTG_PROCESSES. If the value is Y for either the operation family or the process then we do not count WIP at the route-step towards the total for the facility. Typically this is set for staging operations.

IS_INACTIVE_STEP

CHAR(1)

Since we now use RTG_ROUTE_STEPS_INACTIVE table, we should only include the active steps on each route in RTG_ROUTE_STEPS. Therefore this value must be set to N in the RTG_ROUTE_STEPS table but will be set appropriately to Y for inactive steps in the RTG_ROUTE_STEPS_PLUS table.

IS_INCLUDED_WIP_FLUSH

CHAR(1)

If yes, then multi-facility WIP flush should include this LOT_GROUP when calculating weighted-average cycle time for future routes.

IS_INSERT_FROM_ETL

CHAR(1)

For APF, if Y then we include the column in our pre-built insert statement but not in our update statement. For REF views, if Y we include the column in the pre-build REF view but we only use it for insert and ignore for update. This allows the ETL to populate a default value on initial insert but then not update it since it will be updated manually.

IS_INTERNAL

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if the location is internal to the tool. For example, a bath inside a sink. This is critical to NextMove since we cannot direct a carrier to move to this port.

IS_IN_KIT

CHAR(1)

used to determine if this process group will show in kitting page

IS_IN_NMV_PICK_LIST

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if lot-step is within range to be displayed in NextMove Pick List according to hours/steps_to_schedule fields in GEN_FACILITIES

IS_IN_PRODUCTION

CHAR(1)

Boolean indicating whether a durable is in production or not.

IS_KEY_ON_FACILITY_DASH

CHAR(1)

Should be set for less than 5 of the most critical process families in the facility to keep them always displayed on the facility page in the Key Process Families section.

IS_KEY_ON_MODULE_DASH

CHAR(1)

Should be set for less than 5 of the most critical process families in the module to keep them always displayed on the module page in the Key Process Families section.

IS_LARGE_MANUAL

CHAR(1)

GrimRepo stores the data for manual tables and it really slows down if the table is large so CHK_TABLES warns if any manual table has over 500 rows. This flag tells CHK_TABLES to stop complaining.

IS_LAST_LOC_UNLOAD

CHAR(1)

Y means the last activity for the vehicle was a load. N means it was an unload.

IS_LAST_STEP_OPERATION

CHAR(1)

If Y then this step is the last step in an operation. By completing this step, the lot will move to a different operation which is usually the primary criteria to be counted as an oper move.

IS_LINE_SECTION_FROM_MAIN_RT

CHAR(1)

When a lot is on a rework route, our default is to use the line section from the main route rather than the line section from the rework route. This is because most facilities do not define a meaningful line section for their rework routes. For those facilities that define meaningful line sections for the rework routes and want to use them as the line section for lots on those routes, we set this value to N.

IS_LOAD_TIMER_COMBINED

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether a load and unload timer will be displayed, or just a single combined load timer.

IS_LOCATION

CHAR(1)

Y means this chamber is an acceptable location for material to be stored and the chamber will be passed through as an allowed location to other relevant DWH objects. The default is N which means the chamber is not an acceptable location.

IS_LOCATION_ASSUMED

CHAR(1)

This column flags whether or not the location value is an assumed value or not. An assumed value is when the location is set, usually within the ETL, based on certain conditions rather than actually coming from a source system directly.

IS_LONG_SETUP

CHAR(1)

Normally when rqd_setup from RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS does not match curr_setup from ETP_STATUS for the entity then the curr_rank is S for Setup. S is not blocked and lots are available to be scheduled using the appropriate setup penalty. If this is set to Y then the curr_rank is L for Long Setup. L is blocked and these lots are not available to be scheduled. This allows us to use the automatic functionality of ETP_STATUS for long setups without manual intervention.

IS_LOT_ASGN_INFO_RQD_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

Populating standard values for setup and batch information in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS by process+tool and leaving these columns null in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS_LOT/RTG_TOOL_ASGN_LOT_PROCESS in order to use the standard values from RTA is a recommended ETL strategy used at many sites. In contrast to IS_LOT_ASGN_RANK_RQD_FOR_SCH which has a default of Y, the default for this flag is N which means that our defaults are to only schedule lot-steps with ranks in RTAL and get batch/setup from RTA when this information is not populated in RTAL. But some sites want to use RTAL/RTALP exclusively and do not want to use any information from RTA. Setting this flag to Y does this and prevents the information from RTA from being used in WIP_STEP_FUT_ASGN_xxx views. Note if this flag is Y then the RANK flag must also by Y but if this is N then the RANK flag can be Y or N.

IS_LOT_ASGN_RANK_RQD_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

Our lot-tool assignments use a hierarchy where if we have any entries in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS_LOT or RTG_TOOL_ASGN_LOT_PROCESS for a lot then the lot is only allowed on those tools and any others in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS are inhibited. Normally if we have no entries in either lot assignments table then we use RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS. But for Scheduler we often only want to schedule lots which are included in the lot assignments table. Setting this flag to Y here or in RTG_PROCESS_GROUPS enables this behavior by setting eff_rank to I in WIP_STEP_FUT_ASGN_FOR_SCH for any lot without specific assignments by lot.

IS_LOT_BLOCKED

CHAR(1)

Boolean indicating whether a durable state causes associated lots needing to use the durable to show as blocked.

IS_LOT_PARAMETER

CHAR(1)

Flag to determine if the parameter is a lot parameter or one of the pre-defined paramter options.

IS_MAIN_ROUTE

CHAR(1)

Y indicates the route is the main processing route for PRD. N indicates it is a rework or alternate route.

IS_MANUAL

CHAR(1)

Y means the job is called manually so we should not expect it to be in ADM_LOAD_CFG_SCHED.

IS_MSO_ALLOWED_SUB

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether this step can be used as a process sub in the MSO application. This flag is only used by the UI for filtering purposes. A process sub is a metrology process that we cannot make a skip / take decision on, but can be run to clear counters.

IS_MSO_CONFIG_COPY_ENABLED

CHAR(1)

For sites using MSO, this flag allows the site to enable or disable the MSO rule configuration copy to this database. Usually this would be on to keep primary and secondary databases in sync, but in cases where and upgrade or planned failover is scheduled this can disable the auto copy job from executing.

IS_MSO_ON

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if the Metrology Sampling Optimizer application is being used. This will enable the triggers in WIP_EVENT_HIST_INSERT_BEF and EQP_EVENT_HIST_INSERT_BEF.

IS_MSO_SKIPPABLE

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether this step is allowed to be skipped by the MSO application. This flag controls the options for TO_MSO_PROCESS in the UI and it serves as a last check before sending a skip decision to the MES. Setting the flag to N will keep it from ever being sent as a skip step and will not show it as a Sample step in the UI

IS_MULTIPLE_REQUIRED

CHAR(1)

When more than one durable family of the same durable class is assigned to the same criteria, we use this field to determine whether to choose one or whether we need all. Our default indicated by N is that any of them can be used. Occasionally certain processes require multiple durables of the same group (i.e. double reticles) and you indicate this by setting this column to Y.

IS_N2

CHAR(1)

Flag to display N2 icon in NextMove if lot requires N2 (nitrogen purged) storage. In a future version we will allow more generic AMHS-related flags but this is specific to N2 for now.

IS_NEXT

CHAR(1)

Indicates record goes into WIP_STEP_HIST

IS_NMV_ON

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if the NextMove application is being used in production. This will enable SysMonitor alerts for NextMove checks

IS_NMV_PRIORITY

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates if this priority should be emphasized in NextMove

IS_NONSTD

CHAR(1)

Our column to indicate non-standard processing at the step. For example, an experiment or a chain that is only active at a particular step or set of steps and then goes back to being normal for the route. If an experiment is severe enough that it affects the final product and has to be planned separately then it will be its own prd or planprd.

IS_NORMALLY_SCHEDULED

CHAR(1)

We show facility shutdowns on the progress chart on the Dashboard Lot page but for a facility that does not operate 24-7 then we do not want to show weeknights or nights when it is normally scheduled to be shutdown.

IS_NOT_USED

CHAR(1)

Y means the job is not used at this site so we should not expect it to be in ADM_LOAD_CFG_SCHED.

IS_NST_HIDDEN_ON_HIST

CHAR(1)

If yes then do not include time in this NST state in the history. Most NST states should be Y unless there is a specific reason why the client wants it to be part of the total. An example calculation here is if a tool is PRD for 1 day, SBY for 1 day, SDT for 1 day, UDT for 1 day, and NST for 3 days then the totals for the week are 25% each for PRD, SBY, UDT, SBY because the NST is ignored.

IS_OK_TO_USE

CHAR(1)

Boolean indicating whether a durable is ok to use immediately.

IS_ONLY_ALARM

CHAR(1)

Indicates that the entire episode consists only of alarm states as determined by the is_alarm flag in EQP_L5_TRANSITION_STATES. Typically these episodes consist of the tool being logged UDT by an alarm event like SPC failure and then being logged back up soon after so we might not want to include these episodes in MTTF/MTTR calculations.

IS_ONLY_QUAL

CHAR(1)

Indicates that the entire episode consists only of qual states as determined by the is_qual flag in EQP_L5_TRANSITION_STATES. Typically these episodes consist only of a frequent qual that is run by Operations and the Maintenance team is not involved therefore we might not want to include these episodes in MTTS calculations.

IS_OPERATION_FROM_MAIN_ROUTE

CHAR(1)

Operation is a field defined in RTG_ROUTE_STEPS and the operation of a lot is the operation of its current route and step. But some facilities prefer for the operation to be based on the main route and step rather than the current route and step so that lots which are on rework routes will show the operation from their main route. Setting this flag accomplishes this but please note that this only works for current WIP status and not for history.

IS_OPER_MOVE

CHAR(1)

The critical Dashboard metric we call oper moves is moves according to the specific definition of the site, usually the moves calculation they used prior to installation of the FPS Dashboard. If Y then this step move meets the specific criteria for the site to be counted as an oper move.

IS_OPER_MOVE_IF_REWORK_END

CHAR(1)

So far the decision to count the move which ends the rework and returns the lot back to normal production is only by facility but we have it by lot group to be consistent with the decision for rework moves.

IS_OPER_MOVE_IF_REWORK_MOVE

CHAR(1)

This is usually set to Y for Development so that we count an oper move even if reworked. This flag does not affect moves which start rework, even though those are strictly speaking a subset; the separate IS_OPER_MOVE_IF_REWORK_START flag covers those.

IS_OPER_MOVE_IF_REWORK_START

CHAR(1)

See comments on IS_OPER_MOVE_IF_REWORK_MOVE.

IS_OUTPUT_FOR_BAY

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates if this rack qualifies as an output rack for the bay for NextMove.

IS_PARALLEL_OTHER_CH

CHAR(1)

NOTE: Currently this is not set and is always N! This flag is for chamber tools where the job is running on some chambers while another job is running on entirely different chambers. For example, we expect a job on chambers AB to be faster running alone than when running in parallel with another job on chambers CD.

IS_PERMANENT

CHAR(1)

This boolean flag includes whether this is permanently disabled at this site. With the default value of N, SYSMNTR_DISABLED will remind you that it is disabled which can be helpful so you do not accidentally leave it disabled forever.

IS_PLAN_PRIORITY

CHAR(1)

Flag indicates whether this priority is a plan_priority which is the permanent priority for the lot. If this is N that indicates this is a temporary priority such as queue time warning or SPC jeopardy.

IS_PM

CHAR(1)

This should be set to Y if the state should count as a Preventative Maintenance, PM, event. This should only be Y on Scheduled (SDT) States. This is used in the Mean time to (perform) PM, MTTPM metric. (Does not include Wait-times. Can include Qualifications or Verification tests)

IS_PM_EVENT

CHAR(1)

Is set to Y if the event included a Preventative Maintenance, PM, event. This is used in the Mean time to (perform) PM, MTTPM metric. Should possible be called has_PM_event. Check L5_state_diagram for states.

IS_PRESET

CHAR(1)

Used by MSOUI to determine what waivers are done through the UI preset option.

IS_PRIMARY_MSO_DWH

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if the MSO the DWH is the primary MSO database that should be writing decisions to the cleint MES.

IS_PRI_LINK

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating if this link_oper is the primary link_oper for this smp_oper

IS_PRI_SMP_BY_TYPE

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating if this route-step is the primary smp_oper for this smp_type

IS_QUAL

CHAR(1)

This should be set to Y if the state should count as a qual event and time spent in this state should count as qual time. The EQP_L5_QUAL_CHECK constraint ensures that this must be set to Y when mnt_group is QUAL. The is_qual column is critical for NMV_P_TOOL_QUAL_SUMMARY and this constraint is not perfect but it prevents the most obvious wrong case.

IS_QUEUE_SKIP_ENABLED

CHAR(1)

Flag set to allow lots to be automatically skipped if a lot that was run later on the main processing tool is already at metrology or has already run through metrology.

IS_QUEUE_TIMER

CHAR(1)

Flag to display queue timer icon in NextMove if lot is in queue time loop.

IS_REAL_TOOL

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether tool physically exists. An example where this is not set would be lot start or visual inspect.

IS_REF_VIEW_USABLE_BY_OTHERS

CHAR(1)

REF views exist solely to refresh their corresponding table. Therefore in CHK_ALL, we flag if a REF view is used by any other object. Usually the solution to escape the wrath of this warning is to use a LOAD_xxx view for the commonly used logic. But occasionally there is a case when it is either impossible or extremely undesirable to do this and we really want to use the REF view in another object. For these special cases we added this column but we hope that you never use it!

IS_REPEAT_IF_SET_BY_EVENT

CHAR(1)

This column is only relevant if GEN_SITE.SET_REPEAT_BY_EVENT is set to Y. If so, then any move for this event is counted as a repeat and effectively not counted as a move. Typically the MES event name does not indicate repeat so we will have to add a Repeat suffix onto the event name in our ETL if the move is recorded as a repeat in the MES.

IS_RESERVED

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates if the carrier has been reserved to a tool.

IS_REWORK

CHAR(1)

Y indicates the lot is on a rework route after the event is logged. If a lot is reworked then returns to the main route and repeats some steps, is_rework will be N but we will count those steps as repeats.

IS_REWORK_END

CHAR(1)

Event ended rework

IS_REWORK_START

CHAR(1)

Event started rework

IS_RUNNING_HOLD_IF_PROC

CHAR(1)

Normally when a lot goes on hold during processing we assume that it is no longer processing and we set the ECT state of the lot to HOLD and set the ETP state of the tool to SBY. But sometimes this can be a "running hold" which means that the lot continues processing and then will be on hold as soon as it finishes. There are two ways to indicate a running hold if put on hold during processing, either by this column for a hold_type or by the ignore_hold_for_proc_state column in EQP_TYPES for all tools in an eqp_type. The latter is normally used for metrology tools. This is an "or" condition so if a hold_type is Y that applies to all tools and if a tool is Y that applies to all hold types. When a lot goes on a running hold, we will set the ECT state of the lot to PRD-RUNHOLD and keep the ETP state of the tool in PRD. Then when the lot ends or moves to the next step, we will set the ECT state of the lot to HOLD and set the ETP state of the tool to SBY. Note that when we refer to setting the ETP state to SBY we technically mean that we use our normal END logic which will set to SBY unless a newer job has started then we keep ETP as PRD.

IS_SAMPLE

CHAR(1)

If Y then lots are allowed to skip this process

IS_SCHED

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates that lots in this group should be scheduled. This flag additionally causes TW groups to be included in WIP_STEP_FUTURE which they are normally not.

IS_SCHED_BLOCKED

CHAR(1)

to indicate if there is any preceding steps UNSCHED

IS_SCHED_QUAL

CHAR(1)

This should be set to Y if the state should count as a scheduled qual event. (This is typically a qual run by the equipment operator rather than by the maintenance group.)

IS_SCRAP_EVENT

CHAR(1)

If the event results in any number of units in the lot to be scrapped then this field is set to Y. It is common to have scrap occur not only from a scrap event but also from a move event where the lot loses some but not all units. Therefore we cannot just look at scrap events and this flag tells what to count as scrap for this particular facility.

IS_SDT_SETUP

CHAR(1)

Boolean column indicating if the eqp_state is Scheduled Down due to setup conversion. We will note this in ETP_MNT_EPISODE_HIST to differentiate from regular PMs.

IS_SEC_FOR_BEG_END

CHAR(1)

Set to Y to store begin and end events logged to this entity in the SEC_BEGIN_INST and SEC_END_INST columns in WIP_STEP_HIST. The common example is for steppers where the begin and end for the lot will be from the track but we also want to store the begin and end for the stepper.

IS_SHIP_EVENT

CHAR(1)

This flag tells us what to count as a ship for a particular facility. Related to the ship event is the finish event which is the last event for a facility-prd which either changes facility or changes prd or terminates the lot by changing the qty to 0 without merging. Often the ship event is the same event as the finish event. But when the ship event is different and logged prior to the finish event, we write a record to CTM_FINISHED_LOT_HIST when the ship event is logged with finish_inst blank. This record is include in Dashboard Ships Summary but not in Finished Lot Cycle Time. Then later when the lot finishes, we update the record keeping the ship_inst and populating the finish_inst so it is then including in Finished Lot Cycle Time. Technically this "insert at ship then update at finish" process is the same regardless of how far the ship is before the finish but it is most critical when the the ship is quite some time before the finish, for example, when wafer test is part of the same route but we want to count the ship when the lot finishes the fab steps.

IS_SPECIAL_TW

CHAR(1)

Specifies if this lot type is a special type of test wafer. This is used a grouping field for reporting.

IS_SPECIFIC_PRD

CHAR(1)

This indicates if the future hold is a line hold applicable to all lots at the step for the specific product.

IS_SPECIFIC_ROUTE

CHAR(1)

This indicates if the future hold is a line hold applicable to all lots at the step for the specific route.

IS_STAGING_STEP

CHAR(1)

We expect large amounts of WIP and long cycle times at staging steps. We still calculate cycle time like any other step but the important difference is that lots currently at a staging step are not counted as normal coming lots to future steps. Instead we show them in a special column labeled From Staging.

IS_START

CHAR(1)

Boolean flag where Y indicates the lot is an upcoming start and not an existing lot.

IS_SUB_DECISION_TAG

CHAR(1)

This flag should be set to Y if the sub should count to reset the skip / take counter for the decisions history. Setting the flag to Y will mean the sub counts as a take decision. Setting the flag to N will reset the at risk count, but will not change any skip / take decisions.

IS_TEXT_ONLY

CHAR(1)

For text_only badges, background color, shadow, and border are removed.

IS_TIMER_STEP_TO_SCHED

CHAR(1)

The flag to indicate if this is the timer step to schedule

IS_TIMER_WIP_PRIORITY

CHAR(1)

Flag inicates if this priority is excluded from multi area non queue timer wip percentage calculation. If this flag is set to Y, any non queue timer WIP of the priority will count as 100% in multi area queue timer logic.

IS_TOOL_RQD_FLCT_FIRST_STEP

CHAR(1)

For the purpose of Finished Lot Cycle Time calculations, we consider the first step on the route to be the first step with real tools allowed. But some sites have some routes where the first step is a staging step with no tools allowed that we would like to count. This parameter which has default of Y allows us to configure by facility whether to a real tool is required when determining the first step for FLCT.

IS_TOOL_RQD_FOR_COMP

CHAR(1)

Set to Y if we only want COMP events to have move types of COMP when an entity is logged with the event. If N then all COMP events will count as completes.

IS_TRUNCATE_ALLOWED

CHAR(1)

Indicates if the history table can be truncated in the ADM_MSO_UTILITIES package

IS_TW

CHAR(1)

Our standard filter to exclude test wafers is is_tw = N but what we really mean with this filter is to exclude any lots that do not add value for the facility. Lots which add value including sellable, development, and engineering and these lot groups should have is_tw set to N. Lots which do not add value are commonly grouped together and named "test wafers" which is why this flag is named is_tw. These include true test wafers like monitors and quals and dummies but also could include virtual lots used for training or testing, bare wafers, or really anything else including in the MES as a lot which does not add value. All of these lot groups should have is_tw set to Y. You could argue that the is_tw field might be more accurately named is_value or is_valuable or is_prod_eng_dev but is_tw is generally clear to most people. Plus it has the advantage that it is short which is nice given how frequently we use the is_tw = N filter.

IS_TW_ONLY

CHAR(1)

IS_TW_ONLY indicates that a PRD or ROUTE has only test wafer lots. This flag is slightly different than IS_TW, which is associated with lots via their LOT_GROUP. Some PRDS/ROUTEs are mixed and this is set to N if there are any non-TW lots.

IS_TW_USE

CHAR(1)

Applicable to TW routes only. If N (default), then this step is part of the process of building the test wafer. If Y, then this step is one at which the TW is used for process characterization by the owning module.

IS_UNLOADED

CHAR(1)

Boolean indicating whether the lot has been unloaded.

IS_UP

CHAR(1)

This field shows if the port mode of the stations is considered up or down. If all ports are down then rank will be R (Ports Down) and ETP will set the state to SBY-RANKR (Standby With All Ports Down).

IS_USED_FOR_GOALS

CHAR(1)

If yes, lot group will be included in goal calculations. Filter is applied in FPSBASE.WIP_REF_GOAL_EST_SHIFT view: IS_USED_FOR_GOALS = Y.

IS_USE_SETUP_CHG_FINAL

CHAR(1)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

IS_USE_TOOL_ASGN_OVR_ONLY

CHAR(1)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

IS_VALID

CHAR(1)

We consider a lot valid for our finished lot calculations when the lot moved through the first step and the last step on the main route for its product. There are some variations such as the lot moved through the first step on an older version of the route or finished with an event specifically marked as a ship event or the route did not have any steps.

IS_VALID_LOT

CHAR(1)

Flag to indicate of the lot logged is a valid lot. If the lot is not valid then the tool_to_clear value is used to reset the counter.

IS_VIRTUAL_CHAMBER

CHAR(1)

This flag determines whether a chamber is a virtual chamber on a tool. Virtual chambers are used for scheduling but are not tracked like real processing chambers or assist chambers in other applications. Virtual chambers exist in ETP but always contribute 0% towards the cluster calculation for the tool. An example of this usage would be to model each of the sources for an implanter as a virtual chamber, so the area would be able to log these chambers up and down as needed. When a source needs replacement, it can be logged down and the scheduler will not schedule lots needing that source, instead switching to one of the available sources. Another example would be modeling the robot as a virtual chamber on a tool.

IS_WAITING_FOR_PARTS

CHAR(1)

If this is set then the maintenance event is effectively on hold waiting for parts.

IS_WARN_WHEN_LOGGED_AFTER_COMP

CHAR(1)

We normally log an error in WIP_EVENT_HIST if an event is logged for a lot before its current step_ent_inst. This means that the events were logged out of order. Specifically it means COMP event was logged to WIP_EVENT_HIST and then another event with an inst before the inst of the COMP event was logged subsequently. For certain events, usually END events logged by a separate automation system outside of the MES, this behavior is acceptable and we can just ignore this and this flag allows us to configure this by event.

IS_WITHIN_APF

CHAR(1)

Y means the job is called within an APF rule or report so we should not expect it to be in ADM_LOAD_CFG_SCHED.

JOB_DEBUG_INFO

VARCHAR2(128)

Debug information written by trigger regarding the population of the job-related fields for each event.

JOB_GROUP

VARCHAR2(50)

To indicate which group. for first version, it will only allow REALTIME, 10MIN, SHIFT

JOB_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

Automatically set by trigger when the first lot of a job logs an event to the tool.

JOB_NAME

VARCHAR2(500)

the name of the scheduled-job, should also include schema name

KEEP_ACTIVE

CHAR(1)

Manual flag to keep record active even if no activity for the prd-route

KEEP_FULL_LOTS_PER_LOOP

CHAR(1)

This flag determines if the Scheduler will add another lot to the loop after a lot is placed on the schedule in order to always keep the full number of lots in the loop. Having this flag on might slow down the calculation but is critical for tools with setup penalties and many different setups -- for example reticles on Litho cells. We will explain with a long example here. This full number of lots in the loop is determined by the configurable parameter NUM_LOTS_TO_SCHEDULE_PER_LOOP which has a default of 50. We always start by placing the processing and dispatched lots on the schedule and then picking the top 50*2=100 lots to go in the first loop based on the scores. These scores include setup based on the newest dispatched lot to each tool. The Scheduler does its looping algorithm on these 100 lots and places the most important lot on the schedule. We will say it was scheduled to tool T1 for example. If this flag in N then the Scheduler proceeds with its looping algorithm on the remaining 99 lots and places the next most important lot on the schedule -- and continues to do this 48 more times until it places 50 of the 100 lots in the first loop on the schedule. Then it calculates the scores for all remaining lots -- including the leftover 50 and all that did not make it in the first 100 -- and picks the next best 100. Then it does 50 loops to place lots 51 through 100 on the schedule. Then recalculates scores and continues until the full schedule is complete. The weak spot with this faster logic is that if lot #101 in the original loop is the same setup as the 49th lot placed on the schedule but none of the remaining 51 lots in the first loop match this setup that we will place one of these 51 lots next causing a setup change and then schedule lot #101 which had the same setup later. This would result in a particular tool having a schedule with setups A-A-B-B-A when we could have done A-A-A-B-B. That is where this flag helps. If this flag is Y then we still pick the top 100, do the looping algorithm, and place the first lot on the schedule to tool T1 as before. But then we recalculate the scores for the lots 101 and above which were not in the original loop -- but only for those lots allowed to T1 where we just placed a lot. Of all of these remaining lots we pick the top score and add to the 99 lots remaining from the first loop. This keeps 100 lots in the loop at all times! Scheduler does its looping algorithm and places a second lot on the schedule (for T2). Now it recalculates the scores for remaining lots that can run on T2 and adds the top lot to the loop. Note that if it did not find any lots allowed to T2 then it will add another lot to the loop so now we will have 99. This flag solves the same setup weakness described above because when the lot placed on the schedule is setup S1 then the next lot added to the loop would be another S1 lot if the scores determined that same setup was important enough to maintain.

KEEP_IN_PRD_WHILE_JOBS_EXIST

CHAR(1)

This flag is used to keep tools in a PRD etp state if jobs are still active for any entity of this tool. If the value is set to Y then there must be no records in WIP_CURR_JOBS for the entity when an end event type occurs.

KEEP_MAIN_ROUTE_ACTIVE

CHAR(1)

One way to reduce the number of active routes is to not activate the main_route of lots that have been sitting in a bank for awhile. To do this, set this column to N.

LABEL_DURABLE

VARCHAR2(36)

is used to define the label of durable. in most of cases it will be Reticle

LABEL_DURABLE_CARRIER

VARCHAR2(36)

is used to define the label of durable carrier. in most of cases it will be Pod

LABEL_LOT_RANK

VARCHAR2(36)

is used to define the label of lot rank. it can be critical ratio or anything

LABOR_AREA

VARCHAR2(36)

LABOR_AREA allows the ability to create custom groups of tools that are not necessarily in the same bay. This allows you to assign tools to custom work areas that match the way they run the fab.

LABOR_EFFICIENCY_PCT

NUMBER(3)

This is a percentage that will be used to remove the time operators spend doing things other than loading tools from their total available time. This value is tool specific because the location of the tool matters for the delivery time.

LABOR_ROLE

VARCHAR2(36)

Labor roles indicate who can support processing on a particular eqp_type. For example, a metrology tool might require a more experienced technician to do the inspection than a processing tool which just needs to be loaded.

LABOR_SEC_PCT_FROM_LOAD

NUMBER(3)

Specifies the amount of LABOR_SEC_PER_CARR that is associated with loading vs unloading. The default of 50 means that load and unload take the same time each half of the total. Then if load took 60 sec and unload took 40 sec we would enter 100 sec in for the labor_sec_per_carr and enter (60/100)100=60 as the percentage

LABOR_SEC_PER_BATCH

NUMBER(8,3)

Required labor seconds for this labor role to run a batch

LABOR_SEC_PER_CARR

NUMBER(8,3)

Required labor seconds for this labor role to run a carrier

LABOR_SEC_PER_UNIT

NUMBER(8,3)

Required labor seconds for this labor role to run a wafer

LAST_ACTIVITY_MORE_THAN_2D_AGO

DATE

For frequently used PRDs and ROUTEs we do not want to keep updating the last activity time on every update. But we need to store the last activity time for PRD/ROUTEs which have no recent activity as we will delete them after GEN_FACILITIES.DAYS_TO_KEEP_PRD_ACTIVE days. To achieve these objectives, we only populate this field if the last activity was more than 2 days ago and then we clear it when the lot has new activity.

LAST_END_INST

DATE

Time when the last occurrence of this maintenance was completed if known. It is common for this field to be null for all records.

LAST_END_OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

Username of the user that logged last completed occurrence of this maintenance if known. It is common for this field to be null for all records.

LAST_FAIL_INST

DATE

when was the last time job ran failed

LAST_FAIL_NOTES

VARCHAR2(4000)

the notes from the last time job ran failed

LAST_HOLD_INST

DATE

Time when the lot was last placed on hold.

LAST_KNOWN_DURABLE_LOC

VARCHAR2(32)

The previous location of the durable.

LAST_KNOWN_LOCATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Often when a carrier is in transit we do not know exactly where it is but we only know where it came from. In this case we might set the location to something generic like TRANSIT and the last known location to where it came from.

LAST_KNOWN_LOCATION_INST

DATE

Time when the last_known_location was originally updated as the location of this carrier. This column and last_known_location are both updated by trigger.

LAST_LOCATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Last location of vehicle is set by trigger based on the previous location of the carrier most recently loaded from/to the vehicle.

LAST_LOCATION_INST

DATE

Time when the vehicle last loaded or unloaded a carrier.

LAST_LOGIN_INST

DATE

Last cart login time

LAST_LOGOUT_INST

DATE

Last cart logout time

LAST_NAME

VARCHAR2(36)

Last name of the user.

LAST_PROCESS_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

For rework and scrap events we automatically look up the last process tool for the lot. Process tool is determined by the process class of the tool and excludes metrology and support tools. It is likely this was the cause of the rework or scrap although by no means certain.

LAST_PROCESS_TOOL_BEG_INST

DATE

Time when the lot finished processing on the previous tool (excluding metrology).

LAST_RELEASE_INST

DATE

Time the lot was previously released from hold.

LAST_START_INST

DATE

Time when last completed occurrence of this maintenance started if known. It is common for this field to be null for all records.

LAST_START_OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

Username of the user that logged last started occurrence of this maintenance if known. It is common for this field to be null for all records.

LAST_STEP_CURR_PRTY

VARCHAR2(256)

The last step where the current lot_priority applies. After this step we assume the lot will return to its plan_priority.

LAST_SUCCESS_INST

DATE

when was the last time job ran successfully

LAST_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

For rework and scrap events we automatically look up the last tool where the lot processed including metrology tools.

LAST_TOOL_BEG_INST

DATE

Time of the last event on the previous tool (including metrology) for the lot occurred.

LAST_WFR_BEG_INST

DATE

Time when the last wafer of the job started processing.

LAST_WFR_END_INST

DATE

Time when the last wafer of the job finished processing.

LATE_DAYS_LOGISTIC_SLOPE

NUMBER(4,2)

The steepness of the S-curve function for lot days late. Larger numbers mean steeper curves - i.e. closer to a step function change.

LATE_DUE_INST

DATE

to store the late due time of the floating PM tool event, i.e., the late start time of the floating PM could be calculated via substracting the EST_DURATION_SEC value

LATE_INST

DATE

Latest time when maintenance can be started. In most systems, the entity in question will be mandatorily logged down if the maintenance is not started by this time.

LB_FUT_WIP_DELTA_CALC_TYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

Determines how future step WIP deltas are aggregated. Options are "SUM" and "WAVG". SUM means the straight sum is taken of the future step WIP deltas. WAVG means the weighted average of the future step WIP deltas is used.

LB_GROUPING

VARCHAR2(48)

Allowed values are "ROUTE STEP", "ROUTE FAMILY COMMON STEP", "ROUTE GROUP COMMON STEP", "COMMON STEP", "ROUTE FAMILY PROCESS", "ROUTE GROUP PROCESS", "PROCESS", "ROUTE FAMILY PROCESS FAMILY", "ROUTE GROUP PROCESS FAMILY", and "PROCESS FAMILY". This determines the level at which line balance is aggregated. ROUTE STEP means the line balance calculation is evaluated within each route for each step. COMMON STEP means the line balance calculation is evaluated across routes for each COMMON STEP, assuming common steps are shared across routes. PROCESS means the line balance calculation is evaluated across routes for each PROCESS, assuming processes are shared across routes. PROCESS_FAMILY means the line balance calculation is evaluated for each process relative to the process_families that are ahead. Normally a target WIP ratio is calculated for each route/step or process looking ahead at future route/steps or processes. When PROCESS_FAMILY is specified, the current target WIP ratio for the process is compared against the target WIP ratios for the future process_families, which includes processes that may be in different parts of the process flow. This setting can be used to slowdown the feed of WIP to process_families but may not result in balanced WIP across processes in the process flow.

LB_HORIZON_DAYS

NUMBER(3,1)

Line Balance horizon in days of cycle time. Controls how far downstream from each step, expressed in days of cycle time, the line balance calculation includes. This is treated as an OR condition in conjunction with LBR_HORIZON_NUM_STEPS.

LB_HORIZON_NUM_BLOCKS

NUMBER(2)

Line Balance horizon in number of line balance group units. Controls how far downstream from each step, expressed in number of blocks of line balance group, the line balance calculation includes. This is treated as an OR condition in conjunction with LBR_HORIZON_DAYS.

LB_NORMALIZATION_GROUPING

VARCHAR2(32)

This determines the grouping used to calculate the normalized line balance score. If set to facility then normalization is done across the facility. If set to route section or any other value then the normalization is done within the group which means there may be multiple max or min scores that represent different effective WIP deltas across the facility.

LB_NORMALIZATION_METHOD

VARCHAR2(24)

This determines the method used for normalization, which is either linear or logistic S-curve. Logistic creates greater seperation of scores that are closer to 0.

LB_QMODEL_MAX_XFACTOR

NUMBER(4,1)

The max X-factor that is allowed to be used when using the queueing model method to calculate target cycle time and corresponding WIP

LB_QMODEL_MIN_XFACTOR

NUMBER(4,1)

The min X-factor that is allowed to be used when using the queueing model method to calculate target cycle time and corresponding WIP

LB_QTIMER_START_STEP_PCT

NUMBER(3)

The percentage of target WIP that should be reallocated from steps in queue timers to the start step. If multiple timers overlap the WIP will be reallocated to the earliest start step.

LB_ROUTE_MIN_NUM_LOTS

NUMBER(3)

Filter for number of lots within a route for it to be considered within the line balance logic, helps with efficiency of computation as well as considering only main runners

LB_STEP_MIN_SMP_PCT

NUMBER(3)

Sets the minimum required sample rate to be considered in the line balance normalization calculation. Useful when metrology steps are dominating the line balance score.

LB_TARGET_BASIS

VARCHAR2(36)

Basis of determining line balance target distribution. Default is 1x process time from CTM_SUMMARY historical data, but can updated with TCT to use TCT_SEC instead.

LB_TARGET_METHOD

VARCHAR2(14)

Method of calculating the cycle time used to determine the ideal WIP distribution for the line balance WIP targets. 1X FACTOR means distribute the WIP based on the process time only. QUEUEING MODEL means distribute the WIP based on a target cycle time that is calculated using a queueing model. Note that the QUEUEING MODEL method relies heavily on the VARIATION_FACTOR set in EQP_TYPES.

LB_WIP_DELTA_WEIGHT_PCT_CURR

NUMBER(3)

The percentage of weight given to the current step WIP delta. This can be used to change the weighting of the WIP delta for the current step relative to future steps.

LB_WIP_DELTA_WEIGHT_PCT_FUT

NUMBER(3)

The percentage of weight given to the future step WIP deltas. This can be used to change the weighting of the WIP delta for the future steps relative to the current step.

LE_SEQ_WITHIN_SEC

NUMBER(2)

For rows with identical timestamps, sequence records to get proper sequence for logged entity.

LIMIT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(64)

limit type, can only be setup, recipe, recipe_family, recipe_group

LIMIT_VALUE

VARCHAR2(100)

the value of this type, for example the value of the recipe

LINE_SECTION

VARCHAR2(32)

Large grouping of the line, e.g. FEOL, BEOL, Cu, etc. There should be only a handful of values for the entire facility - or if the facility only has one section then we can leave this column blank.

LINE_SECTION_IF_NO_MAIN_RT

VARCHAR2(32)

Line section is in RTG_ROUTE_STEPS but the Dashboard uses this filter for the bank spotlight too so this allows us to put lots of this prd which are in a bank and not on a main route into a specific line section.

LINE_YIELD_PCT

NUMBER(6,3)

Sort yield percentage from the current step to the finish of the specified route/bank. If the route/bank is not the current one then this included all steps.

LINE_YIELD_PCT_TO_EOL

NUMBER(6,3)

Line yield percentage to end of line is the percentage of units expected to successfully complete the remaining steps on the route. Normally we multiply the line yield of all remaining steps for the Capacity Model but entering a value in this OVR table manually overrides that calculated number.

LINKS_REQ_ALLOWED_TAG_COND

CHAR(1)

Define if rule links require an allowed tag condition to be able to tag at the main process step. This is usually set to N unless the metrology step requires recipes to exist in those cases we set to Y to be able to only TAG when an allowed tag condition for the rule link is defined.

LINK_FIRST_KEY

VARCHAR2(250)

The key for the first step, for example COAT

LINK_NEXT_KEY

VARCHAR2(250)

The key for the next step, for example STEP

LINK_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Linked step assigned to the sampling step.

LINK_TEXT

VARCHAR2(100)

The text of the report link

LINK_TYPE

VARCHAR2(12)

This value must be SKIP, TAG, or ALL. If the value is SKIP, then any parent mso decision that is skip will force all child processes to also SKIP. If the value is TAG, then any parent mso decision that is tag will force all child processes to TAG. For ALL, all child processes will match the decision of the parent process.

LOAD_JOB

VARCHAR2(10)

Name of load job

LOAD_ORDER

NUMBER(3)

Order of objects to load within the load job

LOAD_SEC

NUMBER(4)

For throughput purposes, we would like the begin event to be logged when the first wafer of the lot enters the tool so that we can accurately track theoretical cycle time (TCT) which starts at this point. If the tool logs as desired then this column will be 0 and it usually is. But some tools do not log the begin event until some amount of time later, for example after the pumping time. This column exists to account for this delay and it is the number of seconds from when the first wafer enters until the begin is logged. We simply add this time to the processing time to get the TCT. This is by eqp_type as we estimate that all recipes of all tools in the same eqp_type will be consistent in this behavior. Please note that unload_sec is similar for any time after the end event until the lot can be unloaded.

LOCATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Location of a carrier or lot or durable which comes directly from the tracking system used at the site. This could be a port or internal tool location or tool or rack or stocker or zero footprint storage or room or really anywhere. Many non-automated sites allow users to manually enter locations into their system. Therefore unless we know for sure that the source data implements a size limitation, it is recommended to always trim the value in the ETL to 32 characters to fit into the column size and avoid load errors. For ports, location is the full name of the port which is unique across the entire site and usually includes the tool name. Please see the comment in the port column which explains the difference between location and port. Rack locations are similar.

LOCATION_INST

DATE

Time when the carrier arrived at the location.

LOC_ON_RACK

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the short name of the location on the rack, probably a combination of the x, y, and z coordinates. This field is unique within the given rack and is used to save space when we already know the rack, for example on the rack NextMove screen. If the rack is the location then this should be blank. This column is in contrast to the location field which is the full name of the location. Location is unique within the entire site and almost always includes the rack name. Location is what is in MHS_CARRIERS and gets set when the carrier arrives as the location.

LOC_ON_VEHICLE

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the short name of the location on the vehicle, probably named something simple like S1, S2, etc. but perhaps if the vehicle has two levels perhaps A1, A2, B1, B2, etc. This field is unique within the given vehicle and is used to save space when we already know the vehicle, for example on the vehicle NextMove tablet. This column is in contrast to the location field which is the full name of the location. Location is unique within the entire site and almost always includes the vehicle name. Location is what is in MHS_CARRIERS and gets set when a carrier is placed on the vehicle.

LOGGED_ENTITY

VARCHAR2(36)

Entity to which event is logged in the MES. This could be a main tool, subtool, entity, or port. In MNT tables this could be a vehicle or durable as well which is why the column width is wider. If main tool or port, we apply the event to all entities. If subtool we apply to all within the subtool. If entity we apply only to the entity.

LOGICAL_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

Used for infomational purpose and is populated if known otherwise it will match the recipe.

LOGS_AUTO_BEGIN

CHAR(1)

For tools that log auto begin events we want the manual begin (i.e. the MES lot start or batch start or track in) to count as a DISPATCH event. But for tools which do not log auto begin events, we want the manual begin to count as a BEGIN_M event. We automatically calculate logs_auto_begin for each tool and then we set events which are configured as BEGIN_M in WIP_EVENTS to DISPATCH where logs_auto_begin is Y.

LOGS_LOT_BEG_END_FROM_EQP_CHG

CHAR(1)

This flag is for some older simple tools that automatically log that the tool started and finished processing but do not know the lot. When this is set to Y then when the eqp_state changes to PRD we look up the most recently dispatched lot and log a BEGIN event for that lot. Similarly when the eqp_state changes from PRD then we log an END event. For batch tools, we assume all dispatched lots are in the batch when we log BEGIN and we assume all processing lots are in the batch when we log END. If you set this to to Y for any tool then you must insert both BEGIN_FROM_EEH and END_FROM_EEH into your WIP_EVENTS table.

LOG_QUERY_START

CHAR(1)

This is for tables loaded by APF only where we run the APF report first and then the sqlplus query. Normally we just log the start and end of the object so the total time includes both report and query. If you want to track each independently set this to Y and we will log a record in ADM_LOAD_HIST at the end of the report which is also the start of the query.

LOT

VARCHAR2(32)

A lot is a group of units that process together. Usually lot_id or lot_number in MES. All units in a lot are in the same carrier but there may be multiple lots in a carrier.

LOTS_AT_RISK_AVG_LOWER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have an average lots at risk under the lower limit value. The lots at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

LOTS_AT_RISK_AVG_UPPER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have an average lots at risk under the upper limit value. The lots at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

LOTS_AT_RISK_MAX_LOWER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have a max lots at risk under the lower limit value. The lots at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

LOTS_AT_RISK_MAX_UPPER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have a max lots at risk under the upper limit value. The lots at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

LOTS_IN_JOB

NUMBER(2)

Set to the number of lots in the job. The value in WIP_EVENT_HIST represents the number of lots which have started processing in this job *so far*, while the value in WIP_STEP_HIST (written after the job completes processing) represents the total number of lots in the job.

LOT_ACTIVITY_INST

DATE

Date/time when the lot last had activity.

LOT_ASGN_RATIO

NUMBER(5,2)

This is the ratio of lot assignments by tool calculated by the DWH

LOT_DUE_INST

DATE

the due date of the lot

LOT_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(24)

Lot_family is a grouping of lot_type which is mainly use for goal planning. We set goals by family and are allowed to switch goals for different lots of different types within the family. We also report goal performance by family.

LOT_GROUP

VARCHAR2(8)

Lot_group is a grouping of lot_family and is the highest grouping in the lot type hierarchy. There should be only a few values for lot_group, i.e. Prod, Dev, TW. We group WIP and moves by lot_group on the dashboard and we group cycle time calculations by lot_group so this is an important field.

LOT_GROUP_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(24)

The name of the lot_group displayed on all dashboards and reports. We allow a longer more descriptive name here although often this will be the same as the lot_group.

LOT_GROUP_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(8)

Define what lot groups will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

LOT_GROUP_NA

VARCHAR2(8)

Lots that are of the defined lot mso group will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NA the check is ignored.

LOT_GROUP_TO_SCHED_LIST

VARCHAR2(64)

By default we will schedule all lots when a tool is in a state where mfg_state is MFG (PRD and SBY but not ENG). For NONMFG states use this column to schedule lots of certain lot_groups, most likely test wafers.

LOT_MSO_GROUP

VARCHAR2(8)

Grouping of lot types to be used specifically for the MSO application for tag conditions and counter settings.

LOT_MSO_GROUP_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(8)

Define what lot mso groups will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

LOT_MSO_GROUP_NA

VARCHAR2(8)

This is the counter definition value for lot mso group. If lot mso group is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the lot mso group value.

LOT_NA

VARCHAR2(16)

Lots that have a matching lot id will be tagged or never be tagged depending on the condition type selected.

LOT_OR_ALT_ID

VARCHAR2(128)

This is the primary key of this table which is the actual lot ID if available or an alternate ID if not. That alternate ID would likely be a combination of the product and start date range. Note that we can record starts representing more than one lot with a single record in this table. For example, we might have 200 starts for a product during an upcoming work week and we would enter 200 as start_qty and the start of the work week as inst and the end of the work week as start_range_end_inst. Then we would assume those starts would be distributed in lots matching the max_qty_in_carrier for the facility across the entire work week. Alternatively we might record single lot starts with a specific start time by entering the lot as lot_or_alt_id and the qty as start_qty and the start time as inst and leave start_range_end_inst blank.

LOT_PARAMETER_NAME

VARCHAR2(32)

Lots that have this MES parameter set with its corresponding value will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NULL the check is ignored.

LOT_PARAMETER_VALUE

VARCHAR2(32)

Lots that have this MES parameter value will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NULL the check is ignored.

LOT_PARM_NAME

VARCHAR2(32)

Lots that have this MES parameter set with its corresponding value will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NULL the check is ignored.

LOT_PARM_VALUE

VARCHAR2(32)

Lots that have this MES parameter value will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NULL the check is ignored.

LOT_SEQ_WITHIN_SEC

NUMBER(2)

For rows with identical timestamps, sequence records to get proper sequence

LOT_SUBTYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

This is an optional field to add a level to lot_type. This field is not used in logic but is displayed on hold and scrap pages of Dashboard.

LOT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(24)

Lot_type is the base of the hierarchy that determines lot_family then lot_group. Ideally lot_type will come straight from the MES with little modification.

MAIN_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

Primary route used by the prd. Excludes rework and alternate routing. We allow this column to be null in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY because we may not be certain what the main route is when we fix for missed events. In that event we trust the WIP_EVENT_HIST triggers has loaded the correct information into WIP_EVENTS_CURR_STEP.

MAIN_ROUTE_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(36)

Route family of the main route for the prd of the lot.

MAIN_ROUTE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

Route group of main route. Often referred to as technology.

MAIN_RT_REMAINING_PCT

NUMBER(5,3)

On the Lots search page in the Dashboard 5.4, we show a bar from the time the lot started in the current facility until its due date. On this bar we show a red pace arrow as we do on all of our fill-up bars to show where the lot should be now to be on schedule based on the commit cycle time from the start to the due date. This red arrow is at a time we call pull_point_pace_inst and in order to calculate this time, we first calculate route_remaining_pct. Route_remaining_pct is the commit cycle time remaining divided by total commit cycle time. Then pull_point_pace_inst is that percentage remaining from facility_ent_inst to pull_point_inst. The calculation is facility_ent_inst + ((pull_point_inst - facility_ent_inst) * route_remaining_pct / 100).

MAIN_RT_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

When lot is on a rework or alternate route, this is the step where it will return to the main route. We use this for planning purposes so we can calculate remaining steps. We allow this column to be null in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY because we may not be certain what the main route step is when we fix for missed events. In that event we trust the WIP_EVENT_HIST triggers has loaded the correct information into WIP_EVENTS_CURR_STEP.

MANL_RESERVE_CH_TO_USE

VARCHAR2(24)

List of chambers to use for processing set by NextMove when lot is reserved.

MANL_RESERVE_INST

DATE

The actual time the lot was manually reserved by NextMove will be helpful especially for compliance and debugging to have these columns. In the absence of the Scheduler this will also determine the order to run the reserved lots.

MANL_RESERVE_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

Stores tool reserved by NextMove

MANUFACTURER

VARCHAR2(36)

Manufacturer of the tool used for display purposes only.

MAP_COORD_X

NUMBER(4)

This is the x coordinate of the bay on a map of the building. MHS_BAY_TO_BAY_MATRIX_PLUS uses the distance to estimate the bay-to-bay transit time if it is not specifically populated in MHS_BAY_TO_BAY_MATRIX.

MAP_COORD_Y

NUMBER(4)

This is the y coordinate of the bay of a map of the building. See MAP_COORD_X comment for more details.

MAX_ALLOWED_PER_UNIT

NUMBER(4)

the maximun allowable per unit

MAX_BATCH_SIZE_CARRIERS

NUMBER(2)

Maximum number of carriers which can be loaded together in a batch. This column must be populated and is used for ETP and for scheduling to determines whether the tool loads in batches. Non-batch tools will have a value of 1 and batch tools limited by units will be populated according to the comment in max_batch_size_units. This is not used for throughput calculation because we can have tools which load multiple carriers at once but whose throughput is calculated per unit.

MAX_BATCH_SIZE_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

The maximum number of lots allowed in one batch

MAX_BATCH_SIZE_UNITS

NUMBER(7)

Maximum number of units which can be loaded together in a batch for a tool where the batch size is limited by the number of units. This value should nearly always be greater than the standard lot size. If it is less, that means that standard lots must be split in order to run on this tool. This is rare but possible therefore we have no constraint and allow this value to be as small as 1. This column will be null for non-batch tools. For batch tools,There are three cases to consider here. The first case is where the limit is only on carriers which is most common. For example, a furnace can load up to 6 carriers regardless of the units in each carrier. In this case, max_bs_carriers is 6 and max_bs_units is null. The second case is where the limit is only on units. For example, the tool can load 100 wafers regardless of the number of carriers. In this case, max_bs_units and max_bs_carriers should both be 100 which indicates that we could theoretically load a full batch of 100 carriers each with one unit. The third case is where the limit is on both carriers and units. For example, you can load up to 4 carriers and up to 80 units (meaning you cannot load 4 carriers of 25 units each nor can you load 5 carriers of 15 wafers each). In this case, max_bs_carriers is 4 and max_bs_units is 80.

MAX_CAL_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This is used to set how many seconds allowed to run the single-looping calculation. This includes all time taken for parallel calculation in AVG_CAL_SEC. As an example, if AVG_CAL_SEC is 300 and MAX_CAL_SEC is 360 then the first 300 seconds will be done with parallel calculation and the remaining 60 with serial/single-loop calculations. If scheduler takes more than this time to complete, it will be tagged as SLOW. This value should be greater than or equal to AVG_CAL_SEC. If equal to AVG_CAL_SEC, all calculations will be done via parallel calculations.

MAX_CARRIERS_TO_RESERVE

NUMBER(2)

Maximum number of carriers the tool is allowed to reserve. This is tool specific and the process might have a different restriction and we take the min.

MAX_CONSECUTIVE_SKIP_WARN

NUMBER(5)

Value to be used in reporting and for alerts when the maximum number of skips is getting high for the rule. This value does not impact actual sampling decisions.

MAX_CONSECUTIVE_SKIP_WARN_WVR

NUMBER(5)

The warning value consecutive skips for the defined rule and tool waiver.

MAX_CONSEC_SKIP_MES_PARAMETER

VARCHAR2(100)

Configurable parameter that will be sent to the MES if the maximum consecutive skip trigger mes action limit is exceeded.

MAX_CONSEC_SKIP_TRG_MES_ACTION

NUMBER(5)

Maximum number of consecutive skip decisions that are allowed for a PERCENT/TIME rule before MES action is triggered by MSO. This limit will not automatically set lots to tag, rather tell the MSO system to initiate a message to the MES (i.e. log tools down)

MAX_CON_SKIP_TAG_LOT_BASE

NUMBER(5)

Max consecutive skips to hit sample percent. Calculated from 1/n value. Should not be changed or updated. This value is not actually used in the percent rule algorithm.

MAX_CON_SKIP_TAG_LOT_DEFAULT

NUMBER(5)

Default value to be used in percent rule calculation. Initial load defaults to base MAX_CON_SKIP_TAG_LOT_BASE value + 20%. This value is used in the percent rule algorithm unless there is a rule override value.

MAX_CON_SKIP_TAG_NEXT_LOT_OVR

NUMBER(5)

Maximum number of consecutive skip decisions that are allowed for a PERCENT/TIME rule before the next lot that process will be tagged to measure, regardless of the sample rate. In cases where rule interaction may tag multiple lots we do not want to skip many lots until the sample rate drops.

MAX_CON_SKIP_TAG_NEXT_LOT_WVR

NUMBER(5)

When the consecutive skips count reaches this limit, MSO will tag the next available lot for the defined rule and tool waiver.

MAX_CON_SKIP_TRG_MES_ACTN_WVR

NUMBER(5)

When the consecutive skips count reaches this limit, MES action will be triggered for the defined rule and tool waiver.

MAX_CTM_XFACTOR

NUMBER(5,2)

Maximum x-factor, which is a multiplier of raw process time, that cycle time will be allowed to be for predicting future step arrival times. For example, if the value is set to 1.5 for hot lots, then cycle time will be capped at 1.5 * process time for each step.

MAX_DAYS_FOR_MNT_INSTANCE

NUMBER(3)

The maximum days in the future that we will show subsequent instances of maintenance events. Note that the next instance is not affected by this maximum. See comment on mnt_instances_per_event column for example.

MAX_HOLD_SEC_FOR_WSF

NUMBER(8)

Prevent huge cycle times at steps where a minority of lots have been on hold for an exceedingly long time

MAX_LAR_MES_PARAMETER

VARCHAR2(100)

Configurable parameter that will be sent to the MES if the maximum lots at risk trigger mes action limit is exceeded.

MAX_LAR_TRIGGER_MES_ACTION

NUMBER(9)

Maximum number of consecutive lots at risk for a PERCENT/TIME rule before MES action is triggerd by MSO. This limit will not automatically set lots to tag, rather tell the MSO system to initiate a message to the MES (i.e. log tools down)

MAX_LAR_TRIGGER_MES_ACTN_WVR

NUMBER(9)

When the lots at risk value reaches this limit, MES action will be triggered for the defined rule and tool waiver.

MAX_LAR_WARN

NUMBER(9)

Value to be used in reporting and for alerts when the maximum number of lots at risk is getting high for the rule. This value does not impact actual sampling decisions.

MAX_LAR_WARN_WVR

NUMBER(9)

The warning value of lots at risk for the defined rule and tool waiver.

MAX_MERGE_NUM_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

At some sites we schedule lots to be merged there can be limitations to the total number of additional lots that can be merged together in a single carrier. This limit maybe met without reaching the maximum number of wafers in the lot. If this number is set to 1 then another lot can be merged into the same carrier with this lot. 0 or null here means no lots can merge into this carrier

MAX_MSO_DECISION_STEPS

NUMBER(4)

The maximum number of steps away between a MSO main process step and metrology step can be so that the MSO can make a skip/tag decision. If this value is null then the limit is not applied otherwise the steps must be within range when evaluating a process link for an MSO rule.

MAX_NUM_TO_FIX_EQP

NUMBER(5)

Maximum number of entities allowed to be fixed automatically by ADM_FIX_EQP_STATUS. Typically if this procedure wants to fix a large number of entities this indicates a significant problem with the load which should be addressed.

MAX_NUM_TO_FIX_WIP

NUMBER(5)

Maximum number of lots allowed to be fixed automatically by ADM_FIX_WIP_EVENTS_CURR_STEP. Typically if this procedure wants to fix a large number of lots this indicates a significant problem with the load which should be addressed.

MAX_PROC_TIME_SEC

NUMBER(7)

We typically have decent logic to ignore certain cases and only take 10-50% but this is another way to eliminate bad data. We do not recommend setting this unless you investigate certain cases of throughput oddities and decide there is no other method.

MAX_QTY_IN_JOB

NUMBER(7)

Normally we assume that the maximum qty in a job for a non-batch tool is the max_qty_per_carrier for the facility. However sometimes the maximum per job is less than that and this column allows us to override. For example, the max_qty_per_carrier for the facility is 25 but a certain eqp type can do no more than 13 units per job. In this case, if the carrier has 13 wafers or less then we schedule normally but if it has more than 13 then we must ask for a split.

MAX_QTY_PER_CARR

NUMBER(7)

Maximum number of wafers in a carrier - also known as maximum lot size - which is typically 25 for a wafer fab.

MAX_RCP_CHG_SEC

NUMBER(4)

Maximum time allotted for recipe change. If standby time between lots of different recipes exceeds this time then the remainder counts as standby.

MAX_SEC_ADM_FIX_WSF

NUMBER(3)

This is the time limit for the ADM_FIX_WIP_STEP_FUTURE procedure. To avoid locking, updates to WIP_STEP_FUTURE must be made serially with inserts to WIP_EVENT_HIST therefore this procedure must be in the RealTime job. Most of the time it does nothing but after a particularly big change we might have a bunch of lots to fix. When this happens, we fix as many lots as possible in the time limit and then save the rest for the next job in order to not make the RealTime data get too far behind. The default setting is 60 seconds and if you repeatedly go over this limit then we recommend scheduling CHK_WSF_LOTS_TO_FIX more frequently.

MAX_SEC_TO_KEEP_POD

NUMBER(6)

used to determine how long will keep the pod on the tool before to switch another pod. by default, it should be 0 which means it allows to switch the pod without any restriction.

MAX_STEP_SEC

NUMBER(7)

This is a cap on the cycle time for steps in this process family. The most common use is for a process family which has historically been bad but we do not want the cycle time to show that. We hesitated on capping the historical numbers and prefer to only cap commit and target but we somewhat reluctantly agreed to cap history too.

MAX_STEP_SEC_NOHOLD_FOR_WSF

NUMBER(8)

Prevent huge cycle times at steps where a minority of lots have been waiting for an exceedingly long time

MAX_USAGE

NUMBER(9)

the max usage for change_from before it change to the new value

MAX_WAIT_SEC_FOR_TIMER

NUMBER(7)

The Scheduler will not consider a tool eligible for scheduling timer lots if the WAIT_SEC_TO_SCHED is greater than this value in seconds.

MAX_WAIT_TIME_EXTRA_LOTS_RQD

NUMBER(3)

to indicate how many more lots this priority is willing to wait to batch, this need to work with max_wait_time_pct; by default, 999 meaning not going to way, but the minimum is 1, additional lot required to wait.

MAX_WAIT_TIME_PCT

NUMBER(3)

to indicate how much time this priority is willing to wait for the coming lots to batch, this need to work with max_wait_time_extra_lots_rqd; if value is 0, then it means not going to wait at all.

MAX_WEIGHTS

NUMBER

used to determine the maximum weight for eachF evaluation

MAX_ZONE_SIZE_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

The maximum number of lots that can be scheduled to this zone in any batch.

MAX_ZONE_SIZE_UNITS

NUMBER(3)

The maximum number of units (i.e. quantity) that can be scheduled to this zone in any batch.

MEAN_AVAIL

NUMBER(5,4)

This is the mean availability for the tool over the period of time defined by num_days_for_cv_of_av in gen_site.

MEAS_RESULT

VARCHAR2(1)

Result of measurement. For facilities not using FPS Sampling this value is for display purposes only and can be pass/fail or a number or anything. For facilities using FPS Sampling this field is used to dynamically adjust the sampling rules and must be a letter grade A-F.

MERGE_INTO_PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

This is the prd of the lot into which this lot is merged if that prd is different than the prd of this lot. Typically this is an assembly step. This is important to track the prd flow from individual components into the final shipped prd.

MERGE_LOT_LIST

VARCHAR2(512)

Lot (or list of lots) merged with this lot by this merge event. A value here indicates this was a merge event.

MES_ACTION_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(256)

User can store a comment value by rule that can be sent to the MES when logging a tool down.

MES_CHAMBER

VARCHAR2(19)

If MES Chamber is populated it means that the site is using the Lookup table within FabGuard and the hopes is that this matches a MES chamber name.

MES_EVENT_NUMBER

NUMBER(3)

This optional field is used to simplify the ETL for MES such as PROMIS where the event is stored as a number.

MES_PROCESS_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

This is the process group from the MES used to determine tool assignments. In some MES this is absolutly like our process group but in other MES this can be overridden with other methods or systems which is why this is a separate column. This is used only in our ETL to determine tool assignments and not in any DWH logic.

MES_STEP_ENT_INST

DATE

This is the time when the step was entered according to MES. Since we calculate step_ent_inst in the DWH based on the events, we only use this to confirm that any differences in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY are not due to a lag in the data load. Not all MES will have this exact time but we expect most will have something reasonably close. The time entered the current stage or operation or step or process or recipe would all be sufficient.

MES_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

If MES Tool is populated it means that the site is using the Lookup table within FabGuard and the hopes is that this matches a MES tool name.

METHOD

VARCHAR2(6)

Method used to load data in table or execute procedure

MFG_GROUP_INST

DATE

Time when the mfg_group last changed.

MFG_PCT_PER_CH

NUMBER(7,4)

This optional value is the mfg_pct of the tool when this chamber is the only chamber of its ch_type that is MFG (PRD or SBY) while all chambers of all other ch_types are MFG. This column applies to sequential chamber tools which have chambers of more than one ch_type and have multiple chambers with the same ch_type. The default if this column is not set is to assume that all ch_types are bottlenecks of the tool so if 3 of 4 chambers of one type are MFG then the mfg_pct for that type is 75. If 2 of 3 then 66.7% and so on. But typically one ch_type is the bottleneck which means that if a chamber of another type is NONMFG (ENG or UDT or SDT) then the mfg_pct of tool is better than the ratio. Let us say a tool has two clean chambers C1+C2 and three deposition chambers C3+C4+C5. C1+C2 have ch_type CLEAN while C3+C4+C5 are all DEP. If both C1+C2 are NONMFG then the mfg_pct of the tool is 0% regardless of the status of the DEP chambers because it has no CLEAN chamber. Similarly if all three of C3+C4+C5 are NONMFG then it is also 0%. Of course if all chambers are MFG then it is 100%. But if at least one chamber is MFG while at least one of the CLEAN chambers and at least one of the DEP chambers is MFG then the tool can still run albeit with a degraded throughput. By default if only one of C1+C2 is MFG then the mfg_pct of the ch_type CLEAN is 50%. Similarly if one of C3+C4+C5 is MFG then the mfg_pct of DEP is 33.3% and if two then 66.7%. Technically the default calculation is 100/n where n is the number of chambers of the ch_type. But if the CLEAN chambers are the bottleneck and only one DEP chamber is NONMFG then the throughput will exceed the default of 67% and this mfg_pct_per_ch value is an estimate of this. If the mfg_pct_per_ch for DEP is 40 that means the throughput will be 40% with one DEP chamber up and 80% with two DEP chambers up. So the mfg_pct of the ch_type is p * number of MFG chambers (but no more than 100 of course) and the mfg_pct of the tool is the minimum of the mfg_pct of each ch_type. One final note is that mfg_pct_per_ch is an approximation of the contribution of each chamber for all recipes but in reality each recipe can be different. If we know the throughput for the chamber combination for the recipe then we use that instead of the mfg_pct_per_ch. For example, if C4 is NONMFG, mfg_pct_per_ch tells us the tool mfg_pct is 80% and we use that 80% number if the tool is standby or if we do not know the throughput on C1+C2+C3+C5 for the recipe running. But if we know that recipe runs at 30 UPH with all five chambers but 27 UPH with C1+C2+C3+C5 then we set the tool mfg_pct to 90%.

MINS_NO_WEH_TO_LOAD_HIST

NUMBER(2)

Normally we insert history data for the last shift/day when data_date is after the end of the last shift/day. But at sites with low activity which do not log events frequently we might want to insert the history data soon after the end even with no new events. This field is the number of minutes after the end to wait before we go ahead and write the history even if no new event has been logged.

MINS_TO_USE_ENT_AS_BEG_IF_ZERO

NUMBER(3)

If this value is set and end_proc_inst is logged less than 60 seconds after beg_proc_inst and end_proc_inst is less than this many minutes after step_ent_inst then we will use step_ent_inst as beg_proc_inst for throughput calculations. This is typically used at metrology operations.

MINS_WAIT_TO_LOAD_HIST

NUMBER(2)

This is the number of minutes into the shift/day to wait before loading data from the previous shift/day into the WIP_END_SHIFT_HIST/WIP_PLAN_DAY_HIST table. This delay is to prevent loading incomplete data for the last shift/day in case WEH events are inserted out of order. For example, if we have at event at 07:01:20 but we configure to 2 minutes then we will not insert into WESH. Instead we will wait until we have an insert after 07:02:00.

MINUTES_UNTIL_SCHED

NUMBER(7)

This value should be set only for NONMFG states and represents the number of minutes from the time when the eqp state changed until we will schedule lots to a tool in this state as long as that time is no earlier than remaining_mins_until_sched from now. The default value in EQP_L6_DETAILED_STATES can be overridden by an entry in EQP_OVR_MINS_UNTIL_SCHED for a specific eqp_type and eqp_state. If the value is EQP_L6_DETAILED_STATES is null then we will not schedule. For example, the current time is 10:00, the current state is SCH-SERVICE, state changed at 02:00, minutes_until_sched is 600, and remaining_mins_until_sched is 90. 02:00 + 600 minutes is 10:00 which is more than 90 minutes away therefore we schedule lots to this tool starting at 10:00. But once the clock passes 08:30 then the original estimate of 10:00 is less than 90 minutes away then we perpetually estimate that the tool will be up in 90 minutes. So at 08:35 we schedule starting at 10:05 then at 08:40 we schedule starting at 10:10 and so on.

MIN_BATCH_SIZE_CARRIERS

NUMBER(2)

Minimum number of carriers which should be loaded together in a batch. Scheduler will do everything possible to wait for at least this many carriers before scheduling.

MIN_BATCH_SIZE_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

The minimum number of lots required in one batch

MIN_BATCH_SIZE_UNITS

NUMBER(7)

Minimum number of units which should be loaded together in a batch. Scheduler will do everything possible to wait for at least this many units before scheduling.

MIN_BATCH_WAIT_MINS

NUMBER(5)

Minimum amount of time that a group of lots MUST wait before scheduling a group of lots below the minimum batch size. This value must be populated for the Scheduler to apply minimum batch logic. Null means Scheduler will not evaluate minimum batch constraints.

MIN_CASCADE_BATCHES

NUMBER(2)

Minimum number of batches allowed in a cascade is used for dispatching/scheduling. If a tool is below the minimum it should run a lower priority lot to maintain the cascade.

MIN_CASCADE_QTY

NUMBER(3)

Minimum number of wafers allowed in a cascade is used for dispatching/scheduling. If a tool is below the minimum it should run a lower priority lot to maintain the cascade.

MIN_CON_SKIP_ALLOW_TAG_BASE

NUMBER(5)

Min consecutive skips to hit sample percent. Calculated from 1/n value. Should not be changed or updated. This value is not actually used in the percent rule algorithm.

MIN_CON_SKIP_ALLOW_TAG_DEFAULT

NUMBER(5)

Default value to be used in percent rule calculation. Initial load defaults to MIN_CON_SKIP_ALLOW_TAG_BASE value - 20%. This value is used in the percent rule algorithm unless there is a rule override value.

MIN_CON_SKIP_ALLOW_TAG_OVR

NUMBER(5)

Minumum number of consecutive skip decisions that must occur for a PERCENT/TIME rule before the next lot that process will be tagged to measure, regardless of the sample rate. In certain cases we do not want lots that run back to back at the main process step be selected to measure at Metrology.

MIN_CON_SKIP_ALLOW_TAG_WVR

NUMBER(5)

When the consecutive skips count reaches this limit, MSO will begin to allow tagging lots if the sampling criteria is met for the defined rule and tool waiver.

MIN_DISP_SEC_RQD_FOR_COMP

NUMBER(3)

This parameter allows us to configure the minimum seconds required from DISP to COMP in order to set move_type to COMP. It is typically set only for metrology tools where pass-through moves are common. It only applies if a tool is required for COMP and events have been logged to a tool but no automatic BEGIN nor END events.

MIN_EST_PCT_OF_SUBFAM

NUMBER(2)

If at least this percentage of the total completes of a subfamily run on a tool then that counts counts as being in the subfamily for purposes of Dashboard and Goal Planner. Please note that a tool can also be in a subfamily by exceeding percentage of min_est_pct_of_tool.

MIN_EST_PCT_OF_TOOL

NUMBER(2)

If a tool runs at least this percentage of its total completes of the subfamily then that tool counts as being in the subfamily for purposes of Dashboard and Goal Planner. Please note that a tool can also be in a subfamily by exceeding percentage of min_est_pct_of_subfam.

MIN_KIT_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Minimum kit time for pod kitting

MIN_PROC_TIME_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Normally we ignore process times less than 60 seconds when calculating throughput to avoid the dreaded case when the operator logs begin and end together. However some tools actually process jobs in less than 60 seconds so we need to override this with a smaller number. If desired we could also override with a larger number.

MIN_QTY_FOR_BNS

NUMBER(6)

Minimum current WIP quantity required for a bottleneck score to be calculated. If the current WIP quantity is below this number then the bottleneck score will be set to 999.

MIN_QTY_PER_LOT

NUMBER(7)

Lots with a quantity that is greater than or equal to the value set be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected.

MIN_QTY_TO_USE_CTM_WEEK_HIST

NUMBER(7)

We want to avoid using records from CTM_WEEK_HIST with just a few wafers moved which would lead to huge misleading values. We normally want this value to be units in a full lot which is usually 25 for wafer fabs and larger for backend sites where the qty is in units of die. However we might set slightly larger like 26 for wafer fabs to require at least two lots including one full lot.

MIN_RQD_PER_UNIT

NUMBER(11,2)

the minimum required quantities/pct to run one unit

MIN_SEQ_DELTA_FOR_WSF

NUMBER(2)

At some facilities, the steps on the active routes jump around frequently so we can set this greater than 0 if we choose not refresh WSF for all changes. If we set to 2 then means we would only refresh WSF if seq_num changed by at least 3. Most sites should have this set to the default of 0.

MIN_SETUP_COST_FOR_RANK_S

NUMBER(4)

See comment on MIN_SETUP_SEC_FOR_RANK_S.

MIN_SETUP_SEC_FOR_RANK_S

NUMBER(4)

Sometimes we actually have zero setup penalty for certain combinations in EQP_SETUP_CHG_MANUAL and we want to ignore these when we set the rank to S which leads to the ETP state of Standby With Setup Rqd. That will happen which both min_setup_sec_for_rank_s and min_setup_cost_for_rank_s are set to the default values of 0. But we might also want to ignore setups with a tiny albeit nonzero penalty which we can do by setting one or both of these columns to a tiny value greater than zero. Our rank logic will only count the setup change if the setup_sec is more than min_setup_sec_for_rank_s or the setup_cost is more than min_setup_cost_for_rank_s.

MIN_STEP_SEC

NUMBER(7)

See MAX_STEP_SEC comment. This minimum limit should rarely be used.

MIN_STEP_SEC_TO_EOL

NUMBER(11)

Total minimum step cycle time to the end of line

MIN_WAIT_SEC

NUMBER(7)

All lots must wait at least this many seconds at the step before processing. This column is the opposite of the others and can only be populated if the others are null. Also start_step and end_step must be the same since this can only apply at a single step.

MIN_WEIGHTS

NUMBER

used to determine the minimum weight for each evaluation

MISS_CASC_INST

DATE

Time when the last cascade was missed or the current cascade will be missed.

MNT_CREATED_INST

DATE

Time when this maintenance event_id was first created in the system.

MNT_DUE_INST

DATE

Time when the next occurrence of a time-based maintenance is due or expected. See `early_inst` and `late_inst` for the window of time in which the maintenance can be performed

MNT_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

Stockers and vehicles are locations but they are also maintenance entities. Location is independent of facility so the mnt_facility is not relevant as far as location. But maintenance entities needed a facility and this mnt_facility column is used exclusively for that purpose.

MNT_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(50)

MNT_FAMILY is assigned to each EQP_TYPE. Tools in the same MNT_FAMILY are similar and share the same maintenance schedule.

MNT_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

Grouping field for upcoming maintenance on Dashboard and Mnt Viewer. This can be any value and should be formatted for display.

MNT_INSTANCES_PER_EVENT

NUMBER(2)

The number of future instances we will show for each maintenance event. This column works together with max_days_for_mnt_instance. For example, if this is 7 and max_days is 31 then we will show daily PMs for the next week (limited by 7 instances) and weekly PMs for the next month (4 or 5 instances limited by 31 days) and only the next instance of an annual PM.

MNT_INTERVAL_SEC

NUMBER(9)

Indicates the frequency of future occurrences of this maintenance. For example, a daily PM will be listed once with due_inst set to the next occurrence and `mnt_interval_sec` set to 86400 so we know to plan for it to occur again 24, 48, 72, etc. hours after `mnt_due_inst`.

MNT_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

MNT_MODULE is the module responsible for maintaining the tool and is a property of MNT_FAMILY. See comments on the module column in GEN_MODULES for how it relates to eqp_module and mnt_module.

MNT_NAME

VARCHAR2(128)

Name identifying the scheduled maintenance event which is unique for the `logged_entity`. For example, daily qual or weekly PM.

MNT_TECH_USERNAME

VARCHAR2(64)

The unique identifier of a technician that also needs to exist in GEN_USERS.

MNT_WORK_AREA

VARCHAR2(50)

This field is only used for custom reporting but it gives us one more field to assign each mnt_family to a work area which is more specific that the mnt_module.

MODEL_NUMBER

VARCHAR2(50)

Model of tool provided by manufacturer. This value is only used to display in the Dashboard.

MODE_LOT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(24)

Most frequently used lot type for the ROUTE. This is used as a default lot type for starts of this PRD if the lot type is not specified in the starts plan.

MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

Modules are departments of people who manage certain areas of the fab. The modules are assigned ownership of a set of tools to operate and maintain as well as steps on the route that they are responsible for executing. Since many of our tables include tool and step information together, we must distinguish between the owner of the step (WIP_MODULE), the owner of the operation of the tool (EQP_MODULE), and the owner of the maintenance of the tool (MNT_MODULE). WIP_MODULE is used to credit moves and set goals. Each route-step is assigned to a process family and then its wip_module is defined by the process family. EQP_MODULE is used to group tools particularly for tool performance reporting. Similar to WIP, each tool is dynamically assigned to a process family based on its assignments and then its eqp_module is defined by the process family. MNT_MODULE is usually the same as EQP_MODULE but unlike EQP_MODULE is not dependent on assignments but only on the EQP hierarchy. Each tool is assigned to an eqp_type and each eqp_type is assigned to a mnt_family and each mnt_family is assigned to a mnt_module.

MODULE_ABBR

VARCHAR2(5)

Abbreviation of module. For example Implant module would be abbreviated as IMP.

MODULE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(20)

The name of the module displayed on all dashboards and reports. We allow a longer more descriptive name here although often this will be the same as the module.

MODULE_OR_ANY

VARCHAR2(128)

MODULE from v$session or the word ANY which signifies any MODULE.

MOVE_TO_BANK

VARCHAR2(36)

If this step moves the lot to a bank then populate this with the name of the bank. Typically this is the last step on a production route but it can be in the middle of the route as well.

MOVE_TYPE

VARCHAR2(9)

Move_type is populated with a value in WIP_MOVE_TYPES (COMP, ISKIP, etc.) for all records where is_next = Y. It is null when the qty changes but is_next = N and these "delta only" records will always have a delta_type. Note that it is possible and not unusual to have both move_type and delta_type when the lot both moves and changes qty with the same event.

MPU

NUMBER(8,4)

MPU is a commonly used abbreviation which stands for minutes per unit. It is often referred to as MPW which for minutes per wafer but MPU is better because the unit is not always wafer.

MPU_LCL

NUMBER(8,4)

Lower control limit for MPU used in our Throughput monitoring. Obviously this must be less than the manual MPU value.

MPU_UCL

NUMBER(8,4)

Upper control limit for MPU seconds used in our Throughput monitoring. Obviously this must be greater than the manual MPU value.

MSG_TIME

TIMESTAMP(6)

This column can be used for a DATE or TIMESTAMP associated with the record. If the record is from a different system like APF then this could be the timestamp from the APF repository. Or if we want to record a message about an event inserted in WIP_EVENT_HIST then this could be the INST of that event. Therefore this value could be in a different time zone from SYS_TIME. If the msg_time is not specified then we will fill in with SYSTIMESTAMP.

MSO_COPY_SOURCE_DB_LINK

VARCHAR2(128)

Database link to use to copy MSO data from. This is used to keep the MSO rule configurations in sync.

MSO_EVENT

VARCHAR2(128)

Contains the name of the Equipment Event to be used in Metrology Sampling Optimizer.

MSO_MES_OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

The operator that the MES uses when MSO sends interdictions to tools. Required for the view SYSMNTR_P_MSO_NOTIFICATION.

MSO_PROCESS

VARCHAR2(100)

Process definition for this step to be used by the Metrology Sampling Optimizer. MSO process is defined differently to avoid conflict with regular process and common step and because the definition can vary greatly from those concepts

MSO_PROCESS_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(100)

Defines how mso process will be included in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

MSO_PROCESS_NA

VARCHAR2(100)

This is the counter definition value for mso process. If mso process is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the mso process value.

MSO_RULE_COUNTER_LIMIT

NUMBER(9)

The rule limit that causes the MES action to trigger.

MSO_RULE_COUNTER_TYPE

VARCHAR2(30)

The type of counter that is evaluated.

MSO_RULE_COUNTER_VALUE

NUMBER(9)

The value for the rule counter at the time the MES action is triggered.

MULT_ORDER_WITHIN_CTC

NUMBER(2)

If there are multiple ch_type_cnt_thp records available for the ch_type_cnt_input then this is the non-unique order of preference. It is likely that you might want to set all values to 1 so that we can break ties with the remaining clauses in the GET_THP_VALUES function.

MVIN_MULTIPLIER

NUMBER(1)

This is specifically for our movein counting logic. Moveins are counted similar to completes so we can also have the (mvins + completes) / 2 logic, however, a complete always changes the step while a movein never changes the step. So the most flexible way to count moveins is to set this to 1 for the event(s) that each site wishes to count as a movein and to set this to -1 for the event(s) to subtract from the count. Typically BEGIN_M and/or DISP events will be 1 and ABORT and/or CANCEL events will be -1.

NEEDS_TO_MOVE_INST

DATE

The inst NextMove made the carrier delivery state decision.

NEVER_STOP_FOR_QUEUE

CHAR(1)

Often we want to exempt all lots of certain high priorities from stopping due to excess WIP in a queue time sequence.

NEVER_WAIT_FOR_MIN_BATCH

CHAR(1)

For the very highest priority lots, we typically want to ignore any min_batch_size requirements and always run the lot immediately. If this flag is set to Y for a priority then lots of that priority will never wait to form a batch even if the tool and/or recipe has a min_batch_size specified by lots and/or carriers and/or units. Technically this flag forces rcp_min_batch_wait_mins to always be 0 in WIP_STEP_FUT_ASGN_xxx views.

NEXT_BANK

VARCHAR2(36)

Event moved the lot to this new bank

NEXT_BEG_PROC_INST

DATE

Notes the end of a Green to Green (GTG) series as determined in ETP_STATUS.

NEXT_CHG_TS

TIMESTAMP(4)

For CHGLOG and automatic HIST tables, this is null when inserted and then updated with SYSTIMESTAMP of the next change. This means that this record existed in the original table from CHG_TIMESTAMP until this time.

NEXT_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

Event moved the lot to this new facility

NEXT_INST

DATE

The value of next_inst and ect_to_inst are null for the current record for each lot. This null value means "a yet unknown time in the future." Most "greater than" filters should include the current record. To support these common filters, we created corresponding next_inst_not_null and ect_to_inst_not_null columns. In these columns, the current record has a value of 1 January 2099. Therefore a simple "greater than" filter will always include the current record, at least for the next eight decades. The xxx_not_null columns each have an index so these queries will be fast.

NEXT_INST_NOT_NULL

DATE

See column comments for NEXT_INST.

NEXT_JOB_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

The Job ID that completed with out error to end a Green to Green (GTG) series

NEXT_MAIN_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

Event moved the lot to this new main route

NEXT_MAIN_RT_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Event moved the lot to this new step on the main route

NEXT_NEEDS_TO_MOVE_INST

DATE

The inst of next NextMove carrier delivery state decision.

NEXT_OPERATION

VARCHAR2(50)

Operation of the next_step used primarily to determine is_oper_move. Populated by trigger.

NEXT_PLANPRD

VARCHAR2(64)

If this event results in the planprd of the lot changing the new value is stored here.

NEXT_PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

Event moved the lot to this new prd

NEXT_PROCESS

VARCHAR2(50)

Process of the next step. Populated by trigger.

NEXT_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

Event moved the lot to this new route

NEXT_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Event moved the lot to this new step

NMV_ADDL_BADGE_COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

This is the color of the additional badge on NextMove. See comment on NMV_ADDL_BADGE_LABEL for details.

NMV_ADDL_BADGE_LABEL

VARCHAR2(7)

By default, NextMove displays a badge next to the carrier indicating that it is a priority lot but this column allows us to show an additional badge indicating anything that we wish to highlight.

NMV_USE_DISP_INST

CHAR(1)

A flag that will help decided whether to use the start time or dispatch time.

NONSTD_CTM_FACTOR

NUMBER(3,2)

Factor to multiply cycle time if non-standard compared to standard is not known. For example, if this is 1.5 and we know the standard CTM is 6 hours and we do not know the non-standard CTM then we would estimate it to be 9 hours.

NON_THREAD_TOOL_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Rank for other tools at the End Step for the lot that processed on the thread tool at the start step

NON_TIMER_WIP_PCT

NUMBER(3)

When calculating the time required to process WIP through a queue timer segment, we normally consider both WIP on queue timers, as well as non-queue-time-limited WIP in the same area, equally in terms of their impact on the available capacity of the tools required to run the segment. If this is set to <100%, then we under-weight the impact of the non-queue-time-limited WIP accordingly. We strongly recommend keeping it at 100%, because setting it to a low value can cause scheduler to prioritize excessive queue timer WIP, and delay running non-queue-time-limited WIP.

NON_TW_RQD_FOR_GTG

CHAR(1)

Flag used to determine if PRD unites are required to close a Green-to-Green window.

NON_TW_UNITS

NUMBER(7)

The number of non-test units that ran on the given shift and entity.

NUMBER_FORMAT

VARCHAR2(20)

The most common formats are N0 (integer), N1 (one decimal place), and 0% (percentage with no decimal places). Complete information is at https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/standard-numeric-format-strings.

NUMERIC_RANK

NUMBER(1)

This is a non-unique numeric rank from 1 to 9 where 1 is first choice and 9 is last choice.

NUM_CAP_ENTS_OVR

NUMBER(5,2)

Override for the number of cap entities in this eqp_type, to be used by the line balance calculation.

NUM_COUNTER_RESETS

NUMBER(3)

How many times the counter has been reset since min_used_counter_read_inst. This is used as a data quality as a data quality check.

NUM_DAYS_FOR_CV_OF_AV

NUMBER(3)

This is the number of days of history to use when calculating the coefficient of variation of availability by tool.

NUM_DISCS_FOR_JOB

NUMBER(2)

Number of discs used in the job as estimated by our throughput logic.

NUM_ENTS_SDT_TOOL

NUMBER(2)

Number of logged entities for this tool which are in the SDT state. This is populated by UPDATE_ETP_STATUS_EQP procedure.

NUM_ENTS_UDT_TOOL

NUMBER(2)

Number of logged entities for this tool which are in the UDT state. This is populated by UPDATE_ETP_STATUS_EQP procedure.

NUM_EVENTS_KEEP_DASH_TOOL_HIST

NUMBER(4)

For speed reasons, we get the recent tools for the Dashboard tool page from the table EQP_LAST_EV_OLDER_1HR which is build specifically for this purpose. This table keeps the last x events for each tool regardless of time and x is controlled by this parameter. The default is 100 but at sites with a small and fast DWH this could be set higher.

NUM_LOTS_HIST_CUTOFF_BASE

NUMBER(5)

Base value for number of lots to use for history when calculating percentage. This value should not be changed or updated. This value is not actually used in the percent rule algorithm.

NUM_LOTS_HIST_CUTOFF_OVR

NUMBER(5)

Number of lots to keep in the sampling decision history. Based on the history is how the MSO makes a decision to sample, calculate the sample rate and counters. This only applies for a PERCENT rule.

NUM_OTHER_SLOW_JOBS_TO_ABORT

NUMBER(1)

To prevent overloading the data warehouse with too many jobs running at once, we want to prevent multiple slow jobs from running at the same time. The way we do this is to decline to start a slow job that is scheduled reasonably frequently like 10mi or 30mi when too many other slow jobs are running. These jobs will run again reasonably soon so it is not a big deal to have them not run once or twice. We cannot decline to start the EaSh or StWk jobs since they are not scheduled frequently but we want to count them as running when considering whether to start 10mi and 30mi. Technically we do this with this column. A value greater than 0 means that we will not start the job if at least that many other slow jobs are running. Any value including 0 means that when running that it will be counted by other jobs consider whether to start. EaSh and StWk will always have a value of 0 which means they count as slow jobs but are always started on schedule. A common configuration would be to set both 10mi and 30mi to 2 when means that each job will not start when at least 2 of EaSh, StWk, and the other x0mi job are already running. At some sites, 10mi is essential so we could set to 0 meaning that it will always start on schedule and only 30mi will be submit to postponement. At sites when EaSh is reasonably fast then we might want to set 10mi and/or 30mi to 1 which that they do not start at all while EaSh is running. Please note that technically it is possible for too many jobs to be running simultaneously. One way would be if both 10mi and 30mi are running when EaSh starts then all three would be running even though 10mi and 30mi are set to 2. However since EaSh is by far the slowest of the three then we assume that either 10mi and 30mi will finish soon so we will get out of this state relatively quickly.

NUM_REQUESTS

NUMBER(4)

# of lots request to use this durable to process in the next 12 hours, based on step enter time

NUM_REQUESTS_AT_OPER

NUMBER(4)

the number of requests that the lots are now at the operation

NUM_REQUESTS_PRTY

NUMBER(4)

# of priority lots request to use this durable to process in the next 12 hours, based on step enter time

NUM_ROUTE_GROUPS_IN_COMING_WIP

NUMBER(2)

The coming WIP hover message on the Dashboard can be broken down by route_group and this field sets how many route_groups are shown, based on most current WIP, with the rest being assigned to Other.

NUM_SEQ_AWAY

NUMBER(4)

Number of steps away including all steps which will or might be skipped. We name this column seq because it is just the delta in seq_num between the current step and the future step.

NUM_SIBLING_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

A count of other lots that were also split from the same parent.

NUM_STEPS_AWAY

NUMBER(4)

Number of steps away not including steps which we know will be skipped nor those which we estimate will be skipped at least x pct of the time. This x value is configurable in GEN_FACILITIES using the smp_pct_for_num_steps_away column.

NUM_STEPS_JUMPED

NUMBER(3)

Number of steps on route jumped by this move event. Each of these steps will have a JUMP event logged in WIP_STEP_HIST.

NUM_STEPS_MOVED

NUMBER(3)

The sequence number of the next step minus the sequence number of the previous step when moved on the same route. Importantly this is negative if the lot moves backwards. If this is greater than 1 then num_steps_jumped should be one less than this value but these are calculated differently so we record both and this is a reasonable check.

NUM_TECHS_RQD

NUMBER(1)

We assume that each maintenance event requires one technician but this column allows us to indicate that more than one person is required to complete the event.

NUM_TOP_TOOL_ASGNS_TO_EVL

NUMBER(3)

to indicate the number of top tool assignments will be evaluated in the scheduler on the SCHED-GROUP. Default to 999, it means it will most likely to evaluate on every tool assignment

NWSCH_BACKLOAD_INST

DATE

This Column indicates that the lot has been backloaded (Scheduled to Track In Early), This column should only have a value when the track in

NWSCH_EARLY_START

DATE

This Column stores the estimated earliest sched start for a lot. To be used for NextMove or dispatching

NWSCH_JOB_SEQ

VARCHAR2(64)

The sequence of sched job on the lot step level

NWSCH_MATCHED_PATTERN

VARCHAR2(2000)

This Column stores the pattern that was matched by placing this lot on the schedule

NWSCH_MAX_HIST_PATTERN

VARCHAR2(2000)

This Column stores the total history required to check on the tool. The scheduler calculation only looks back as far as the longest allowed pattern configured

NWSCH_MIN_HIST_PATTERN

VARCHAR2(2000)

This Column stores the history including this lot that matched the pattern in nwsch_matched_pattern column

NWSCH_PATTERN_UNIT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

This Column stores the unit type used for pattern matching. For now, value can be either LOT or JOB.

NWSCH_ZONE_TO_USE

VARCHAR2(1)

The assigned tool zone for this lot

OBJECT_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

This could be an object name (we will disable loading of that object in the scheduled jobs), a load job (we will disable loading of all objects in that scheduled job), an FPSAPP prefix (we will disable loading of all objects with that prefix), a constraint (we can explain why it is permanently disabled), or a trigger (technically an object so we can get away with omitting this from the column name and also to explain why it is permanently disabled).

OFFROUTE_SEC

NUMBER(9)

If the current route of the lot is not the same as the main route then the lot is offroute and we record the estimated seconds to return to the main route here.

OLD_PROC_STATE

VARCHAR2(25)

In previous versions of ETP, this was the proc_state to assign in ETP_STATUS when lot of this type was processing. This column is no longer used except to transition from old version to new version.

ONE_ROW

NUMBER(1)

A column whose value is 1 which is the primary key of the table ensuring only one row.

ONLY_KEEP_POD_IF_1_PORT_AVAIL

CHAR(1)

used to determine if it will only run the pod switch rule when only 1 port available

ONLY_SKIP_EVENTS_COUNT_AS_SKIP

CHAR(1)

At most sites, we want to count any moves that move a lot forward to a future step as either ISKIP or DSKIP if it is not a COMP. But if this is set to Y then we only count moves with an event_type of SKIP as SKIP. Any other moves will count as ROUTE which we ignore we calculate moves as COMP + ISKIP + DSKIP - REPEAT.

OOC_PREDICTION_INST

DATE

The estimated time when this indicator will exceed the control limit.

OPERATION

VARCHAR2(50)

Operation is usually the primary level of routing in the MES and the level where the facility typically reports moves. FPS only allows one tool per step so our step is a lower level of routing than operation although both may be the same if the MES only allows one tool per operation. Note that because operation can include multiple steps and therefore multiple process families that we cannot have any association to equipment by operation.

OPERATION_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(50)

All xxx_display columns are used in place of the column xxx for display purposes. The values of these columns can be changed at any time without having to worry about other tables referencing it.

OPERATION_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(50)

Defines how opertion will be included in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

OPERATION_ENT_INST

DATE

Enter time for this operation

OPERATION_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(36)

Grouping of route-step that is completely dependent on routing information from MES. The primary use of this field is for filtering on Operations Dashboard. Unfortunately for our database structure and naming convention, this field no longer has any link to operation. This is because operation is used primarily for Oper Moves and it is normal for steps in an operation to belong to multiple MES routing groups. For example, a sink step and a furnace step and a measurement step are in the same operation but each step belongs to the appropriate sink/furnace/measurement MES routing groups which we store in operation family. Since Dashboard already uses both operation and operation_family extensively and independently, we decided not to rename either column but simply remove the link. Please note that operation family is similar to process family and in fact they are often the same. The key differences are that operation family has nothing to do with equipment and that comes straight from ETL with no complex logic. Process family is the link between routing and equipment for the Operations Dashboard and therefore has complex logic.

OPERATION_NA

VARCHAR2(50)

This is the counter definition value for operation. If operation is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the operation value.

OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

In history tables, this is the username of the person or system who logged the event. In EQP_MNT_FUTURE, this is the username of the person who input the information about the maintenance event. Usernames can be looked up in GEN_USERS to get full names, email address, etc. Please note that the existence of each username in GEN_USERS is optional, meaning that it is never required for the username logged in the operator column to be in GEN_USERS.

OPPORTUNITY_STATE

VARCHAR2(12)

FPS Enhanced Tool Performance group assigned to each transition_state and to each etp_family. This assignment determines the default grouping on all Tool Performance charts and determines the color on all views including Dashboard and Gantt charts.

OPTIONAL_DASH_ORDER

NUMBER(4)

Maintenance teams want to specify a certain sort order for maintenance events on each tool in the Gantt chart. For example, they want to put the most frequent or important ones first instead which ones have the earliest `mnt_due_inst`. If this order is not specified then it will use the default sorting which is by `mnt_due_inst`.

OPT_SORT_WITHIN_SEC

NUMBER(21,6)

This number is the order of the event within the same second for the same lot (WEH) or wafer (WWH) or entity (EEH). If the event is logged with a sequence number then this value should be that sequence number (and it is fine if this is an overall sequence number even though it only matters compared to other events in the same second). Otherwise if the event time includes milliseconds then this can be the milliseconds. Otherwise just choose the best sort order. This value does not need to be 1, 2, 3, etc.

ORDER_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

The customer order to which this lot belongs.

ORIG_DUE_INST

DATE

Original Due Date of this lot

ORIG_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

See comments in OTHER_FACILITY column

ORIG_FAC_LOT

VARCHAR2(32)

When lot is duplicated for shared facilities, this is the original lot. This will also be the part of the duplicated lot before the slash but having this column avoids needing to parse. For example, in the record for lot ABC123.0/FAB1, this value of orig_fac_lot will be ABC123.0.

ORIG_FAC_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

See comments in OTHER_FACILITY column

ORIG_LOT_DUE_INST

DATE

the original due date of the lot

ORIG_PLAN_OUT_INST

DATE

Original plan out date for this lot in the current facility which was set for the lot at its creation or when it entered this facility.

ORIG_START_INST

DATE

Original Start Date of this lot. Normally it is the same of START_INST, but it can also be different since it was supposed to start earlier but it was not.

OSUSER_OR_ANY

VARCHAR2(30)

OSUSER from v$session or the word ANY which signifies any OSUSER.

OTHERS_TO_LOAD_IF_CHG

VARCHAR2(128)

This allows us to load a table only if another table changed. This is rarely used but can save time.

OTHER_COUNTER_MSG

VARCHAR2(500)

to store other counter message, like 2nd counter msg or 3rd counter msg

OTHER_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

Used if the step is actually processed in another facility. For example, a lot may go to the Test facility for an electrical test in the middle of the Fab route. In this case, on the Fab route OTHER_FACILITY is set to Test. In the Test facility there will be a fake short route with only this single step and the ORIG_FACILITY and ORIG_FAC_ROUTE will be set to the name of the Fab facility and the Fab route. This case is distinguished by non-NULL values in ORIG_FACILITY, OTHER_FACILITY, and ORIG_FAC_ROUTE columns.

OTHER_FACILITY_W_ACTION

VARCHAR2(32)

This field is populated by the trigger when an event is logged for a lot that is duplicated because it is at a step where it will run on a tool in another facility. This value is used by the OTHER_FACILITY_EACH_LOOP procedure if it exists.

OTHER_FAC_LOT

VARCHAR2(32)

When lot is duplicated for shared facilities, this is the other lot. The value here will be the lot plus a slash then a suffix representing the other facility. For example, in the record for lot ABC123.0 duplicated in FAB1, this value of orig_fac_lot will be ABC123.0/FAB1.

OTHER_NOTE

VARCHAR2(500)

Some description for this scheduler

OTHER_TABLE_WHERE_LOADED

VARCHAR2(30)

Some of our APF reports load multiple tables in the same report. It is required to pick one of those tables to name the update. The other tables will have the method of OTHTAB with the name of the other table whose job loads it in this column.

OUTER_MAX_PCT

NUMBER(4,1)

Inner upper limit for this target type.

OUTER_MIN_PCT

NUMBER(4

Outer lower limit for this target type.

OUTPUT_RANK

NUMBER(1)

Preference where we want to send carriers which have recently completed processing on this tool. These are typically input racks/stockers for the bay. This is a non-unique numeric rank from 1 to 9 where 1 is first choice and 9 is last choice.

OUTPUT_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Bay output rack assigned to the carrier if it reserved to a tool that is not nearby or not scheduled to run soon to move to an overflow area.

OUTSIDE_SOURCE

VARCHAR2(50)

For all PRDs that are externally sourced (e.g. purchased or produced at an external site), this field describes their source.

OVERFLOW_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Rack to send the carrier when it is not reserved or scheduled to run soon

OVR_ACTUAL_CH_USED

VARCHAR2(24)

Allows our external source to populate ACTUAL_CH_USED column overriding WIP_EVENT_HIST.

OVR_ACTUAL_MACHINE_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

Allows our external source to populate ACTUAL_MACHINE_RECIPE column overriding WIP_EVENT_HIST.

OVR_ADD_TO_GP_CUTOFF_MINS

NUMBER(3)

Override the default Goal Planner add to cutoff minutes from GEN_FACILITIES

OVR_BEST_PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

The is_best_record_for_planprd value is automatically calculated in RTG_ACTIVE_PRD_ROUTES but if you wish to override the calculation and force a specific prd to be the best then you can populate this column.

OVR_BG_COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

This column defines the color used in the reports for displaying WIP qtys by ECT state. Since hold groups are an ECT state this color will be the color used in the Dashboard reports for the associated hold group.

OVR_CAP_MINS

NUMBER(6)

Override Capacity Minutes is an optional setting to allow the GP to use different values than the normal FPS Capacity value calculated by process family

OVR_CARRIER_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(32)

The ID of the carrier for application display purposes. For example, the internal/referential carrier ID might be a zero-padded hexidecimal number, while the human-readable labels on the carriers might be an unpadded decimal equivalent (e.g. CARRIER=A1B2, OVR_CARRIER_DISPLAY=41394).

OVR_CAST_EXPEDITE_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Estimated expedite transit time to move a cassette between bays.

OVR_CAST_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

If populated, Scheduler and NextMove will use this value in place of any other logic for determining the transit time for a lot from this station to the associated tool.

OVR_CH_PATH_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

This assignment rank is on the chamber path level and will override the tool assignment rank if populated. If null, the scheduler will use the tool assignment rank

OVR_COMMIT_CT_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

Commit_ct_days is set for each bank in RTG_BANKS but occasionally we want to override for a specific product and we do that with this field.

OVR_COMMIT_STEP_SEC

NUMBER(7)

See comments in OVR_TARGET_STEP_SEC column.

OVR_CTC_MULTIPLIER

NUMBER(4

This is the ch_type_cnt multiplier. For example, this would be 3 for an ch_type_cnt_thp of 1ETCH and a ch_type_cnt_input of 3ETCH which means that a throughput value from 1ETCH is multiplied by 3 to be used for 3ETCH. Technically speaking it is multiplied for UPH and divided for MPU.

OVR_CTM_VALID_LOTS_2D

NUMBER(4)

This column allows users to specify the minimum lot count for cycle time to be considered valid for the 2 day period and not apply fill in logic on the lot group level. If this is null then the gen_facilities ctm_valid_lots_2d will be used

OVR_CTM_VALID_LOTS_7D

NUMBER(4)

This column allows users to specify the minimum lot count for cycle time to be considered valid for the 7 day period and not apply fill in logic on the lot group level. If this is null then the gen_facilities ctm_valid_lots_7d will be used

OVR_CTM_VALID_LOTS_FULL

NUMBER(4)

This column allows users to specify the minimum lot count for cycle time to be considered valid for the full period and not apply fill in logic on the lot group level. If this is null then the gen_facilities ctm_valid_lots_full will be used

OVR_CTM_VALID_LOTS_LONG

NUMBER(4)

This column allows users to specify the minimum lot count for cycle time to be considered valid for the long period and not apply fill in logic on the lot group level. If this is null then the gen_facilities ctm_valid_lots_long will be used

OVR_CUSTOMER

VARCHAR2(64)

Normally customer is defined in RTG_PLANPRDS but in some cases we have different lots of the same planprd which go to different customer so we can override here by lot.

OVR_DEST_PLANPRD

VARCHAR2(64)

If this is blank we assume the planprd does not change when a lot moves to the next facility and/or prd. If the planprd changes then this is the new planprd.

OVR_EQPTYPE_FOR_CAPACITY

VARCHAR2(50)

This is an alternative to shared parent tool that currently works only for custom reporting. This field tells us to count this chamber in a different eqp_type than its main tool for capacity modeling purposes.

OVR_EQP_STATE_SHORT_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(12)

For several applications including NextMove BayView we need to show the state in 12 characters or less. By default we will use the first 12 characters of the eqp_state but if you have longer state names then you can improve the display by overriding with 12 or fewer clearer characters in this column.

OVR_ESTIMATED_HOLD_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Estimated hold is an estimate for the duration from when a lot goes on hold until when it is released. Our default values are calculated based on history in WIP_HOLD_ESTIMATES and CTM_SUMMARY. However we can override the calculated values with a specific value for the hold type by populating this field. Furthermore we can override for a specific lot by populating ovr_release_inst in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY. See comments on OVR_REMAINING_HOLD_SEC for an example on how estimated hold duration and remaining hold duration are used together.

OVR_EST_END_INST

DATE

Estimated time when the lot will end processing on the tool.

OVR_EST_LINE_YIELD_PCT

NUMBER(6,3)

Override line yield to be used for products of this PRD

OVR_EST_MACHINE_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

When we use this path table then this value overrides the est_machine_recipe specified in the RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS_LOT or RTG_TOOL_ASGN_LOT_PROCESS table. It is common for the tool to use a different machine recipe for each different run path because the chambers are often listed in the recipe. But it is perfectly fine for the tool to use the same machine recipe for all run paths since we calculate THP separately for each ch_type_cnt. We require this column to be populated even when it is the same as in the RTA_LOT table to avoid having to join the tables even time we use the PATH table.

OVR_EST_NEXT_BEG_INST

DATE

Estimated time when the next job must start processing on the tool in order to maintain full cascading and not lose productivity.

OVR_ETP_STATE_BG_COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

This column feeds to the ETP_STATE_DIAGRAM to allow chosen SBY-RANK{rank} background colors to be overridden for displays on the Dashboard and other applications. SBY ETP_STATES for these ranks are automatically built, so overriding them in L6_DETAILED states is not possible.

OVR_EVENT_TYPE_AT_START_STEP

VARCHAR2(12)

This value specifies what event at the OVR_START_STEP_IF_NOT_FIRST step is the official start inst of the lot. The options here are BEGIN, END, COMP, or DISPATCH. If you configure BEGIN, then it will use the beg_proc_ordered_not_null time from wip_step_hist for first step on the lots route. END will use the end_proc_ordered_not_null time, COMP will use the inst value, and DISPATCH will use the dispatch_ordered_not_null value. If this value is left null, then it will use the step_ent_inst.

OVR_FACILITY_OF_BANK

VARCHAR2(6)

Occasionally a lot is of a prd owned by one facility but at a bank owned by another facility. Here we can indicate the facility which owns the bank. When reporting lots in bank, we will show the total by the facility of the prd as well as the total by facility of the bank.

OVR_HEADER_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(100)

Normally we get the column_header_display from DASH_C_COLUMNS but certain tables have limited width available so this override allows us to set a shorter header for a particular table. For example, we might set column_header_display for SHIFT_OPER_MOVES to Oper Moves in DASH_C_COLUMNS but we might override by setting this value to Op Mv for the ROUTE_GROUP_SUMMARY table which has limited width. In addition, the special value of "null!" sets column_header_display to null when it is normally populated in DASH_C_COLUMNS.

OVR_HOLD_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

This field should be populated when the module responsible for lots on hold of this hold_type is different from the module of the current step. The most common example of this is a facility that has a separate METROLOGY module. It is quite common for a lot to go on hold at a step owned by the METROLOGY module but the hold_type is typically owned by a traditional module like LITHO, ETCH, DIFFUSION, etc. If populated for the hold_type then we set the hold_module to this value in WIP_LOTS_PLUS. If blank then we use the process_module.

OVR_IS_LOT_ASGN_RQD_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

This requires lot rank for this process group even when the value of IS_LOT_ASGN_RANK_RQD_FOR_SCH in GEN_FACILITIES is set to N. Note that Y for facility cannot be overriden with N here because that is a risk of doing this incorrectly. If the facility has a mix - for example, process groups like sorters and inspection tools might not have lot assignments - then we have to set to N for facility and Y for all process groups that have lot assignments.

OVR_IS_QUEUE_ALLOWED

CHAR(1)

We stop lots from starting the first step in a queue timer when WIP is too high but this flag allows this specific lot to start despite this. Use for priority lots or sendahead lots or when we want to trickle lots into the timer.

OVR_IS_QUEUE_STOPPED

CHAR(1)

This is Y if we know from the customer logic that lots cannot start the first step in the queue because their logic has determined that there is too much WIP already in the queue sequence. In the future, we will also use our own logic for this so we stop lots if this is Y or if our logic says to stop. In both cases, we can allow specific lots to go through using ovr_is_queue_allowed in WIP_LOTS_STATIC.

OVR_IS_SCHED

CHAR(1)

This flag overrides value from column is_sched of table wip_lot_groups.

OVR_JOB_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

Allows us to specify the job_id in the ETL if the MES already provides this. In the normal case when this value is not populated, the standard logic to define job_id based on events is used.

OVR_LABOR_ROLE

VARCHAR2(36)

Override labor role for this recipe

OVR_LABOR_SEC_PER_BATCH

NUMBER(8,3)

Override labor batch time for this recipe

OVR_LABOR_SEC_PER_CARR

NUMBER(8,3)

Override labor carrier time for this recipe

OVR_LABOR_SEC_PER_UNIT

NUMBER(8,3)

Override wafer time for this recipe

OVR_LINE_SECTION_OF_BANK

VARCHAR2(32)

This column sets the line section for lots in a bank for both WIP_LOTS and WIP_STEP_HIST. If this value is not populated for the bank then we get line section from the main route and step if populated. If not, we have a default for the prd otherwise we just set the default for the facility.

OVR_MAX_BATCH_SIZE_CARRIERS

NUMBER(2)

Override the default maximum batch size carriers from EQP_TYPES for this specific criteria

OVR_MAX_BATCH_SIZE_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

Override The maximum number of lots allowed in one batch. This can be fewer than both the max_batch_size_carriers and max_batch_size_units because a single carrier may have multiple lots and the client may have business rules that limit the number of lots regardless of the total available space

OVR_MAX_BATCH_SIZE_UNITS

NUMBER(7)

Override the default maximum batch size units from EQP_TYPES for this specific criteria

OVR_MAX_MERGE_NUM_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

The maximum number of additional lots allowed to merge with current lot in a single carrier

OVR_MIN_BATCH_SIZE_CARRIERS

NUMBER(2)

The minimum number of carriers required in one batch

OVR_MIN_BATCH_SIZE_LOTS

NUMBER(2)

The minimum number of lots required in one batch.

OVR_MIN_BATCH_SIZE_UNITS

NUMBER(7)

The minimum number of qty required in one batch

OVR_MIN_BATCH_WAIT_MINS

NUMBER(5)

Minimum amount of time that a group of lots MUST wait before scheduling a group of lots below the minimum batch size

OVR_MIN_GOAL_COMP_FOR_BNS

NUMBER(6)

Override the default minimum goal completes when calculating bottleneck score. An adjusted goal less than this number will show a BNS = 100.

OVR_MSO_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Overrides the default CH_TYPE for grouping of chambers to be used for rules in MSO that will allow for different rule configurations for chambers on the same tool. Will generally be used similar to chamber types, but this override field allows a grouping specific to MSO.

OVR_OPERATION_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

Populating this field will force an operation to be assigned the specified module. If this field is not populated then the module that has the most processes in the operation will be assigned automatically.

OVR_PERMISSION

NUMBER(3)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

OVR_PLAN_AVAIL

NUMBER(5,2)

Normally the planned availability set for each eqp_type applies to all chambers but for custom reporting only we can override the value for a specific chamber with this column.

OVR_PLAN_AVAIL_MAIN_TOOL

NUMBER(3)

Normally the planned availability set for each eqp_type applies to all chambers but for custom reporting only we can override the planned availability of the main tool with this column. Typically it will be much higher.

OVR_PLAN_UTIL

NUMBER(5,2)

Normally the planned utilization set for each eqp_type applies to all chambers but for custom reporting only we can override the value for a specific chamber with this column.

OVR_POD_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

If populated, Scheduler and NextMove will use this value in place of any other logic for determining the transit time for a pod/durable from this station to the associated tool.

OVR_PROCESS_CLASS

VARCHAR2(12)

When the process family is set by process and not by tool but the process class is set by tool then we cannot set the process_class in RTG_PROCESS_GROUPS in a straightforward manner. Therefore we set here and get the process class during the calculation.

OVR_PROCESS_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(50)

See https://help.inficonims.com/display/DW/Guide+to+Process+Families.

OVR_PROCESS_STATE_DETAILS

VARCHAR2(600)

This column will override the process state details for the Dashboard if populated. It is important to note that this column is technically independent from the process_state which is calculated based on events from WIP_EVENT_HIST. For example, immediately after a lot is dispatched, this column might still have a message about WAIT when the process state just changed to DISP. To reduce the duration of these discrepancies, you should refresh WIP_LOTS_VERIFY in the RealTime job or at least every 1-2 minutes if you populate this column.

OVR_PROCESS_SUBFAMILY

VARCHAR2(100)

This column is the first of three ways to set process_subfamily. If populated this will be the process_subfamily for all route-steps using this process. The other two ways are by durable and by setup.

OVR_PROCFAM_BY_TOOL_ASGN

VARCHAR2(50)

See https://help.inficonims.com/display/DW/Guide+to+Process+Families.

OVR_PROC_CT_DAYS_FOR_FLCT_XF

NUMBER(5,1)

Some sites prefer to use a fixed number for the processing time of each prd in the denominator of their X-Factor calculation. The FLCT app will use this value if populated in the X-Factor calculation instead of the calculation processing time. For sites which combine prd in the same facility to report a sequence of prds in FLCT, this value must be populated for the last prd in the same sequence but it should have the value of the total processing time for all prds in the sequence.

OVR_PROC_TIME_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Override processing time for this lot at this step from the normal value calculated by THP_EQPTYPE_AUTO. Setting this value also forces a TAKE decision for this step in WIP_STEP_FUTURE.

OVR_PURGE_CHGLOG_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

By default we purge history from CHGLOG tables at 365 days for small tables and 99 days for large tables. To override that default for the corresponding CHGLOG table then set in this value. If you do not want to purge at all then set this to 9999.

OVR_RELEASE_INST

DATE

Specify a time when the lot will be released from hold. This will override our normal logic to estimate the release time based on WIP_HOLD_ESTIMATES, CTM_SUMMARY, and WIP_HOLD_TYPES.

OVR_REMAINING_HOLD_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Remaining hold is an estimate for the minimum duration from now until a lot on hold will be released. The default value is half of the estimated hold duration calculated based on history in WIP_HOLD_ESTIMATES and CTM_SUMMARY. However we can override the calculated default value with a specific value for the hold type by populating this field. Unless overriden by ovr_release_inst in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY, the release time for a lot on hold is the latest of the release time calculated using estimated hold duration and the release time calculated by remaining hold duration. This means that remaining hold duration must be less than estimated hold duration and that it becomes relevant when the lot is near or past its release time calculated using estimated hold seconds. Here is an example using a lot which went on hold at 1:00 with an estimated hold duration of 6 hours and a remaining hold duration of 2 hours. The release time calculated using estimated is 7:00. At any time before 5:00, the time using remaining is before the time using estimated so our release time is 7:00. When time passes 5:00 then the time using remaining is after the time using estimated so at 5:01 the release time is 7:01. At 6:00 the release time is 8:00 and this will continue to be pushed 2 hours from current time until the lot is released. If is_allowed_for_sched is Y then Scheduler will schedule the lot at the current step no earlier than this release time and will schedule future steps based on the estimated complete for the current step which uses this release time (and adds processing time if the lot has not yet been processed). There are some hold types which we want to ignore and pretend the lot is not on hold and schedule immediately. To do this, set ovr_remaining_hold_sec to 0 and ovr_estimated_hold_sec to 1.

OVR_RORP

VARCHAR2(256)

The Capacity Model does its calculations by rorp, step. In FPSBASE.RTG_PRDS_PLUS, rorp is set to prd by default if ovr_rorp is null. Populating ovr_rorp in the ETL (with route, for example) will override the default and set rorp = ovr_rorp.

OVR_RQD_SETUP

VARCHAR2(100)

For eqp types where the setup is not the recipe or process, populate the setup with this value. Possible use cases are where multiple recipes or processes share the same setup or where we want to represent the setup with a shorter name than the long name of the recipe. This column has the ovr prefix because we have the ability to configure the eqp_type to use either the process or the recipe as the setup in EQP_TYPES.

OVR_SAME_JOB_IF_WITHIN_SEC

NUMBER(3)

Our default behavior is to consider a subsequent begin event to a batch tool in the same batch if within 20 seconds. For a non-batch tool the default is to only consider in the same job if in the same second. This flag can be used to adjust this if necessary.

OVR_SBY_STATE_LONG_DESC

VARCHAR2(1000)

Normally the long description for the standby and missed cascade states associated with this rank are automatically generated using description but this field allows override.

OVR_SBY_STATE_TECH_DETAILS

VARCHAR2(1000)

Normally the technical details for the standby and missed cascade states associated with this rank are automatically generated but this field allows override.

OVR_SBY_W_NST_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

This column is not yet used but the idea is that if this column is populated then ETP logic will override standby state with the NST state specified in this value for all tools in standby during the period of the shutdown. This should definitely be set for a full shutdown and could be set for a partial shutdown if desired.

OVR_SCHED_WEIGHTS

NUMBER(4,1)

This is how much weight to give the chamber path rank. When populated, this will override the weights for chamber path rank and tool assignment rank. If null, then Scheduler will take the value from the configuration table SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS. example 1: ovr_sched_weights is 40 -> the chamber path rank will have a weight of 40, regardless of what ovr_ch_path_rank is. example 2: ovr_sched_weights is null and ovr_ch_path_rank == "A" -> the chamber path rank will get the weight for "A" from SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS example 3: ovr_sched_weights is null and ovr_ch_path_rank is null-> the chamber path rank will use the tool assignment rank and get the weight from SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS

OVR_SCHED_WEIGHTS_BY_TOOL

NUMBER(4,1)

This is how much weight to give the tool assignment rank. When populated, this will override the weights for tool assignment. If null, then Scheduler will take the value from the configuration table SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS. Note that ovr_sched_weight is also in the PATHS table so you can override either by tool or by chamber path.

OVR_SCHEMA_REPOSITORY

VARCHAR2(14)

This will be populated with the name of the GrimRepo repository if we want to separate this prefix outside of the standard DWH_schema repository. For example, this will be SCH_schema for SCH so that all Scheduler objects will go into a separate SCH_schema repository. This does not need to be unique so we could, for example, have APP, FBK, and SEC in a common support repository.

OVR_SORT_ORDER

NUMBER(4)

The default sort order of chambers within a tool is to put assist and virtual chambers last then sort by ch_type then ch_short_display. To override this sort order just populate this optional column. If this is set for some chambers but not all on the tool then chambers where this is blank will be last sorted by the default order.

OVR_START_STEP_IF_NOT_FIRST

VARCHAR2(256)

This value specifies which step in the route is the official start step for lots to begin accruing cycle time for this route.

OVR_STATION_VAR

VARCHAR2(12)

This allows us to pass a value for $Station to an APF report or rule. This is rarely used.

OVR_STEP_COMP_INST

DATE

Specify a time when the lot will complete the step. We will use this mainly for banks and staging steps with a release plan. For steps that require processing on a tool, please use ovr_est_end_inst instead.

OVR_STEP_SEC_FOR_FUT

NUMBER(7)

For WIP_STEP_FUTURE cycle time predictions, we normally use the automatically calculated cycle time from CTM_SUMMARY as configured in ctm_column_for_wip_step_fut from GEN_FACILITIES (i.e. FULL, COMMIT, 7D_MED, 2D_WAVG, etc.). The ovr_step_sec_for_fut columns in RRS and WIP_STEP_FUTURE_OVR allow us to override this value with a manual value for a specified route-step or a specified lot-route-step. The ovr column from RRS is used in the CTM_SUMMARY logic so it will be the value of step_sec_nohold_for_wsf and step_sec_for_wsf_if_take in CTM_SUMMARY and RTG_ROUTE_STEPS_PLUS as well as the value in WIP_STEP_FUTURE. The ovr column from WSF_OVR is specific to the lot and therefore is only used in UPDATE_WIP_STEP_FUTURE so you will only see this value in WIP_STEP_FUTURE. In addition, a value in WSF_OVR indicates that the lot will TAKE at this step. If both are populated, WSF will use the more specific value by lot from WSF_OVR. The most common use of this column is to override the 10 second default for staging steps used by the Scheduler. Other than staging steps, we recommend using these overrides rarely.

OVR_TARGET_CT_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

Target_ct_days is set for each bank in RTG_BANKS but occasionally we want to override for a specific product and we do that with this field.

OVR_TARGET_STEP_SEC

NUMBER(7)

We normally automatically calculate commit/target cycle times by weighting across steps based on historical information so that the total for the route equals the specified total for commit/target in RTG_PRDS. This column along with ovr_commit_step_sec allows us to override that automated calculation for certain route-steps with a specific value. We encourage leaving these columns blank.

OVR_UTIL_OF_AVAIL_FOR_MAQT

NUMBER(4,3)

This is the override value used in the multi area queue timer wip ETL (RTG_REF_QUEUE_MULTI_AREA_WIP) for the utilization of availability used in determining the % of the available tools in the timer to process the WIP. If left null, the ETL will use the plan avail * plan util. This was created as the plan avail and plan util columns are used for the Dashboard targets on the tool state history charts and some clients want to use non target values for the queue timer evaluation.

PARAMETER_NAME

VARCHAR2(50)

The name of the parameter.

PARAMETER_SKIP_VALUE

VARCHAR2(50)

Parameter value that will be set when a lot is to skip the metrolgoy step.

PARAMETER_TAG_VALUE

VARCHAR2(50)

Parameter value that will be set when a lot is to be measured/inspected at the metrology step.

PARENT_CARRIER

VARCHAR2(32)

The typical use of this field is when a carrier is in a box then we set this to the box. This is optional and we do not store any other information about the parent carrier.

PARENT_LOT

VARCHAR2(32)

The parent lot should ideally be the original parent but it could be the most recent parent if multiple splits have occurred.

PARENT_TO_MSO_PROCESS

VARCHAR2(100)

This to_mso_process will be the determining decision for the linked child to_mso_process

PART_DISPLAY

NVARCHAR2(1024)

A more user-friendly way of displaying the parts, could possible also be the name or the Part_ID.

PART_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

A unique identifier for the parts.

PATTERN_ID

VARCHAR2(32)

unique key to identify the recipe sequence

PATTERN_START_INST

DATE

the point in time where the pattern should start to be considered. any wsh entry that has started is considered as part of the existing pattern

PAUSE_INST

DATE

When a lot has begun processing on a tool and an event with event_type of PAUSE is logged, pause_inst captures the time of the pause. If multiple pauses happen to the same lot, the last pause_inst is used. See description of PAUSE ect_state for more details.

PCT_FEWER_ROWS_ERR

NUMBER(2)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

PCT_FEWER_ROWS_WARN

NUMBER(2)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

PCT_MORE_ROWS_ERR

NUMBER(4)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

PCT_MORE_ROWS_WARN

NUMBER(3)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

PENDING_SDT_OR_QUAL_OR_ENG

VARCHAR2(4)

When this is populated with either SDT or QUAL or ENG this means that the tool is processing but will stop when all jobs which are currently processing complete. When in this pending state, the process state of lots which are qualified to run on this tool will be DOWN just as if the tool was already SDT or QUAL or ENG. This pending state does not affect ETP logic during efficient processing but after the tool misses cascade then goes to standby then it will be pending maintenance rather than the normal standby state.

PERF_DAYS_AVG_WIP_BY_ECT_STATE

NUMBER(4)

This column specifies the number of days to load the average WIP by ECT state for the Performance charts. Since the DASH_P_ECT_WIP_SHIFT_HIST uses the huge ECT_HIST table directly, we want to restrict the number of days that we are allowed to query from it independently of the range selected in the application. So even if you query the Performance for the last 60 days you will only see the avg WIP by ECT state data from the last x days per this configuration. The shorter this number is the faster the performance query will be for the Performance application.

PERF_HIST_DAYS_FOR_SHIFT_DAY

NUMBER(4)

This is a special purge_days limit for our Historical Performance application. We require PERF tables and tables used in PERF views to have at least this many days of data in them (at least once the initial data population reaches this many days) so technically we prevent the purge_days column in CFG_TABLES for these tables to be less than this limit. This column applies to tables where the data is summarized by shift or day while the PERF_HIST_DAYS_FOR_WEEK_MONTH column applies to the week or month tables.

PERF_HIST_DAYS_FOR_WEEK_MONTH

NUMBER(4)

See comment in PERF_HIST_DAYS_FOR_SHIFT_DAY column.

PERIOD_LABEL

VARCHAR2(64)

Label of the week, month, quarter, or year to display on FLCT application. Note this is also part of the primary key of this table.

PERIOD_SORT_ORDER

NUMBER(4)

This column is only to sort the periods in the FLCT application. Normally this will match the period_start_inst but when sites has multiple period types like months and years then it is nice to be able to control the sort order.

PERIOD_START_INST

DATE

Start of period when this forecasted total cycle time applies. We assume it applies from this period until the next period_start_inst for the same prd and period type.

PERM_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Permanent rank is typically loaded by ETL from a combination of the MES, recipe management system, and existing preference logic already used at the site. Possible values are in FPSADMIN.RTG_PERM_RANKS.

PERM_RANK_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(256)

Optional comment entered by user or system who last updated permanent rank

PERM_RANK_UPDATED_INST

DATE

Datetime populated by trigger when permanent rank was last updated

PERM_RANK_USER

VARCHAR2(64)

User or system who last updated permanent rank

PHONE

VARCHAR2(24)

Phone number of the user.

PHOTO_LAYER

VARCHAR2(12)

The photo layer the step belongs to.

PK_COLUMN1_VALUE

VARCHAR2(1000)

The value of the first column of the primary key.

PLANPRD

VARCHAR2(64)

Planning product used for all planning purposes. All lots with the same planprd are interchangeable to ship to the customer regardless of their prd, route, technology, wafer size, etc. For detailed information on prd vs. planprd see table comments in RTG_PLANPRDS.

PLANPRD_OUT

VARCHAR2(64)

Planprd of final flushed product. See detailed comments and examples in table overview.

PLAN_AVAIL

NUMBER(5,2)

Planned availability used in goal planner and capacity model. Plan_avail + plan_sched + plan_unsched = 100.

PLAN_DAY

VARCHAR2(13)

Name of plan day must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_plan_day rather than plan_day in case we want to change the naming convention for the plan_day.

PLAN_EFF_LOSS

NUMBER(4,2)

Percentage of the total time planned to be lost to unavoidable efficiency loss. This percentage is part of availability but not part of utilization. If this column is populated with a value greater than 0 then plan_util + plan_eff_loss + plan_eng + plan_tw must equal plan_avail. This column is not used by the FPS CM but exists for sites to store this information to use for their own CM.

PLAN_ENG

NUMBER(4,2)

Percentage of the total time allocated to engineering. This percentage is part of availability but not part of utilization. If this column is populated with a value greater than 0 then plan_util + plan_eff_loss + plan_eng + plan_tw must equal plan_avail. This column is not used by the FPS CM but exists for sites to store this information to use for their own CM.

PLAN_MONTH

VARCHAR2(9)

Name of plan month must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_plan_month rather than plan_month in case we want to change the naming convention for the plan_month.

PLAN_MONTH_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(13)

Particularly at sites which use a fiscal year starting in July we might want to show a longer month in certain places that includes the fiscal month and calendar month for clarity.

PLAN_OUT_INST

DATE

Current planned out date for this lot in the current facility.

PLAN_PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(7)

Permanent priority of the lot set in the MES generally by planning.

PLAN_PRIORITY_NA

VARCHAR2(7)

Lots that are of the defined plan priority will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NA the check is ignored.

PLAN_QUARTER

VARCHAR2(6)

Name of plan quarter must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_plan_quarter rather than plan_quarter in case we want to change the naming convention for the plan_quarter.

PLAN_QUARTER_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(13)

Particularly at sites which use a fiscal year starting in July we might want to show a longer quarter in certain places that includes the fiscal quarter and calendar quarter for clarity.

PLAN_REWORK

NUMBER(4,2)

Percentage of the total time allocated to processing rework lots. The tool is utilized during this time but this additional capacity for rework lots must be allocated in addition to the standard capacity needed based on starts. Since this percentage is part of plan_util, it is different than plan_eff_loss, plan_eng, and plan_tw. This column is currently not used by the FPS CM but is planned for a future version. Currently it exists for sites to store this information to use for their own CM.

PLAN_SCHED

NUMBER(5,2)

Planned scheduled downtime used in goal planner and capacity model.

PLAN_TW

NUMBER(4,2)

Percentage of the total time allocated to processing test wafers. This percentage is part of availability but not part of utilization. If this column is populated with a value greater than 0 then plan_util + plan_eff_loss + plan_eng + plan_tw must equal plan_avail. This column is not used by the FPS CM but exists for sites to store this information to use for their own CM.

PLAN_UNSCHED

NUMBER(5,2)

Planned unscheduled downtime used in goal planner and capacity model.

PLAN_UTIL

NUMBER(5,2)

Planned utilization used in goal planner and capacity model. Must be less than plan_avail.

PLAN_UTIL_DEGRADE_PCT

NUMBER(3)

This is normally 100 when the facility is completely shutdown but this column allows for partial shutdowns where we expect that the facility will continue running but at a far lower output. Technically what we do with this value is we multiply the time at the step during the shutdown by this multiplier and assign that cycle time to the shutdown. For example, if this is 75 then we expect the output to degrade by 75%. So for a tool where we normally expect 60% utilization, we would expect 15% utilization during the shutdown period. If a lot waited for 8 hours then we count 2 hours to WAIT and 6 hours to SHUTDOWN in our cycle time calculations.

PLAN_UTIL_MAX

NUMBER(5,2)

Optional column to define the maximum utilization possible. If populated, it must be between plan_util and plan_avail. This column is not used by the FPS CM but exists for sites to store this information to use for their own CM.

PLAN_WEEK

VARCHAR2(7)

Name of plan week must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere.

PLAN_YEAR

VARCHAR2(6)

Name of plan year must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_plan_year rather than plan_year in case we want to change the naming convention for the plan_year.

POD_CAPACITY

NUMBER(3)

Maximum number of pods that can be stored. We define pod as a carrier for a durable.

POD_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(64)

This column is optional and only applies to pods/durables and not cassettes/lots. Certain durables must be stored in a specific group of pods and this is designated with this column.

POD_FAMILY_RQD

VARCHAR2(64)

Certain durables must be stored in a specific group of pods and this is designated with this column.

POD_SWITCH_WINDOW

NUMBER(6)

To indicate how far to look ahead and behind when determining the severity of a pod switch. by default, it should be 0 which means it will not check for processJobs within some time window

PORT

VARCHAR2(5)

Port is the short name of the port on the tool like P1 or LLA. This field is unique within the given tool and is used to save space when we already know the tool, for example in the dashboard tool hover where we show the status of each port. This column is in contrast to the location field which is the full name of the port. Location is unique within the entire facility and almost always includes the tool name like ET99P1 or ET99LLA. In addition, location is usually available from the MES or AMHS as this must be an exact match with the location in MHS_CARRIERS if this gets set when a carrier is placed on the port. On the other hand, the shorter port column is often not available in the MES so we either populate manually or with some complex if-then logic in the ETL based on the naming standards.

PORT_GROUP

VARCHAR2(12)

Optional value if tool has different groups of ports, for example 150mm and 200mm. RQD_PORT_GROUP in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS indicates what is required for each lot.

PORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(24)

PORT_MODE is the port equivalent to EQP_STATE. Examples might be AUTOMATIC, MANUAL, SEMI-AUTOMATIC, or DOWN. If configured in GEN_FACILITIES, the view DASH_P_TOOL_PORTS can overlay whether the port is occupied along with its carrier and the WIP processing states over the port modes as long as the port mode has is_up set to Y. Therefore it is not necessary to reflect occupied or empty when developing the ETL logic to populate the EQP_PORTS table.

PORT_MODE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(48)

The name of the port_mode displayed on all dashboards and reports. We allow a longer more descriptive name here although often this will be the same as the port_mode.

PORT_MODE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(24)

Grouping field of the port mode for reporting. If port modes are not particularly specific then this might be the same as the port mode.

PORT_MODE_GROUP_BG_COLOR

VARCHAR2(24)

Color assigned to the port_mode_group.

PORT_MODE_OPERATOR

VARCHAR2(64)

Username of the operator who set the current port mode.

PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

Prd determines the route which is used to process the lot in the facility and what tools, recipes, durables, etc. can be used at each step. Prd also determines the next facility for the lot when it finishes its route. For detailed information on prd vs. planprd see table comments in RTG_PLANPRDS.

PRD_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Define what Prds will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

PRD_MSO_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Product group to be used for the Metrology Sampling Optimizer, generally based on similarity of technology or volume.

PRD_MSO_GROUP_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Define what PRD_MSO_GROUPS will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

PRD_MSO_GROUP_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Lots that are of a product in the defined PRD_MSO_GROUP will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NA the check is ignored.

PRD_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Lots that are of the defined product will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NA the check is ignored.

PRD_TO_USE_FOR_CT

VARCHAR2(64)

We often have many prds and routes which are similar and we want to report CT as a group and we can use this field for this. You either enter the target_ct_days and commit_ct_days or you enter prd_to_use_for_ct to use the target and commit for another prd. For example we have prds A and B which are similar. You enter 80 days as target and commit for A then enter A as the prd_to_use_for_ct for B. Then all lots of A and B will be reported with the CT for A and we will not report CT for B.

PRD_TO_USE_FOR_PROBE_CARD

VARCHAR2(64)

Use value from another product for the probe card required

PREFERRED_EQP_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

The EQP_MODULE of a tool is automatically calculated based on the module of its primary process family. It is highly discouraged to have tools that are commonly used with multiple process families, but if this case exists you can prefer one module by setting this field. This should normally be blank. Please note this column has nothing to do with the MNT_MODULE for this tool which is assigned in EQP_MNT_FAMILIES, and is always uniquely specified by tool -> eqp_type -> mnt_family -> mnt_module.

PREFERRED_PROCESS_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(50)

See https://help.inficonims.com/display/DW/Guide+to+Process+Families.

PREFERRED_WIP_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

The wip_module is the module of the primary process family. This field only applies when using OVR_PROCFAM_BY_TOOL_ASGN in EQP_TOOLS to set process_family based on tool. When this happens a process might have multiple process families and if they are in different module and this field is populated we prefer the process family with the matching module. This field will usually be blank.

PREFER_TO_JOIN_BATCH

CHAR(1)

When set to Y, the scheduler will prefer to add a lot to an already started batch over starting a new batch, even if the score for starting a new batch would be higher

PRELOAD_REFRESH_ACTION

VARCHAR2(100)

Indicate the action for the data refresh

PRELOAD_REFRESH_CONTROLLER

VARCHAR2(100)

Indicate the controller for the data refresh

PREP_SEC

NUMBER(4)

The time in seconds required to prepare the lot before track in.

PREV_END_PROC_INST

DATE

End_proc_inst of the previous job on the tool before the job including this lot. Subtracting this from the end_proc_inst of this job gives us the end-to-end time (EET) which is critical for throughput calculations.

PREV_MISS_CASC_INST

DATE

Previous time a cascade was missed.

PREV_PROCESS

VARCHAR2(50)

Process of the previous job on the tool before the job including this lot. Used in combination with prev_recipe to determine if this job cascaded and if it required a setup change.

PREV_RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

Recipe of the previous job on the tool before the job including this lot. Used in combination with prev_process to determine if this job cascaded and if it required a setup change.

PREV_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

The station the carrier was previously on for the last decision

PRE_BATCH_ID

VARCHAR2(12)

is used to tell the id of this pre-batch sequence

PRE_SCHED_ORDER_HOURS

NUMBER(5)

Defines how many hours the lot scheduled will be assigned this prev-sched-order score

PRE_SCHED_ORDER_ON_DOWN_TOOL

CHAR(1)

Defines if it should assign the prev-sched-order score to the lots scheduled on the down tools. by default, it will be N, meaning it will not give any pre-sched-order score to the lots scheduled on the down tools

PRE_SCHED_ORDER_STEPS_AWAY

NUMBER(5)

Defines how many steps away will be assigned this prev-sched-order score

PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(7)

This is the priority value as it is stored in the MES for each lot. It might be a number or a letter or word depending on the MES and the facility.

PRIORITY_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(20)

The name of the priority displayed on all dashboards and reports. Typically priority is short like P1, P2 so we allow a longer more descriptive name here that should be more familiar to the users.

PRIORITY_SORT

NUMBER(3)

Unique sort of priority. Sort ascending gives the order from highest to lowest priority. Therefore the smallest number in priority_sort is the highest priority.

PRIVILEGE

VARCHAR2(40)

Privilege needed to be granted in caps like SELECT.

PROCESS

VARCHAR2(50)

Process defines what occurs at a step. Different steps can share the same process if they are identical. Process should normally determine allowed tools and recipe although it can be overridden by step, route, prd, lot, and experiment for exceptions. Each process is dynamically assigned to one or more eqp_type-process_family combinations with use_pct. One process_family is determined to be primary. If grouping is done correctly, a process should only be one eqp_group with no crossover.

PROCESS_ADDL_INFO

VARCHAR2(50)

Additional information on the process which we show on the Dashboard process summary. For example, the most common machine recipe.

PROCESS_CHANGE_TYPE

VARCHAR2(64)

defines what change type each value in the sequence represents. setup/recipe/recipe_family/recipe_group. note: cannot mix change_types

PROCESS_CLASS

VARCHAR2(12)

Top-level grouping of process groups with same general purpose (i.e. Process or Metrology or Nonwafer). Allowed values are defined by FPS and are listed in FPSADMIN.RTG_PROCESS_CLASSES. This field can also be defined in EQP_TOOLS using the ovr_process_class field if we do not know it for the process group.

PROCESS_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(50)

The name of the process displayed on all dashboards and reports. We allow a longer more descriptive name here although often this will be the same as the process.

PROCESS_END

VARCHAR2(50)

the process for the timer end step

PROCESS_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(50)

See https://help.inficonims.com/display/DW/Guide+to+Process+Families.

PROCESS_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

Process group is the critical field where tools and processes come together for the purposes of Scheduler. Process group is in both EQP_TOOLS for the tools and in RTG_PROCESSES for processes. Ideally all tools that run the same set of processes with no crossover including back-up and emergency tools would be in the same process group but it is important to note that this is not technically required for Scheduler as long as all process groups are in the same sched group.

PROCESS_GROUP_END

VARCHAR2(36)

the process group for the timer end step

PROCESS_GROUP_START

VARCHAR2(36)

the process group for the timer start step

PROCESS_LINK_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Process link group to that will allow the UI to tie links to rule. This value can be entered more than once to specify multiple to/from combinations.

PROCESS_LINK_GROUP_DESC

VARCHAR2(256)

Description of the group of process links that is created by the ETL but can be assigned to a rule through the MSOUI.

PROCESS_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

WIP_MODULE is used to credit moves and set goals. See comments on the module column in GEN_MODULES for info on this column and how it relates to eqp_module and mnt_module.

PROCESS_START

VARCHAR2(50)

the process for the timer start step

PROCESS_STATE

VARCHAR2(5)

Process state is the most commonly used level of our Enhanced Cycle Time hierarchy. This displays on Dashboard, Scheduler, Cycle Time Analyzer, and Finished Lot Cycle Time Reporter. Process state is the parent of ECT state, however, there is configuration for when to show the process state of Reserved in each application which is done in WIP_ECT_STATES.

PROCESS_SUBFAMILY

VARCHAR2(100)

Route step family is used for the Dashboard to separate processes in a process family based on shared but limited assignments. It is also the base for GP subfamily.

PROCESS_SUB_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

PROCESS_SUB_GROUP for the process sub.

PROCESS_SUB_GROUP_DESC

VARCHAR2(256)

Description of the group of process subs that is created by the ETL but can be assigned to a rule through the MSOUI.

PROC_INST

DATE

Time when the process state last changed. Note that PROC_INST does not change when a lot ends during cascading. This leads to records in FROM_INST = TO_INST but END_PROC_INST is later. Furthermore if an END and BEG are logged at the same second with the END first then the second record after the BEG will have the same FROM and same END but a new BEG so the PK on ETP_PROC_HIST must have both BEG and END_PROC_INST in addition to the normal FACILITY, ENTITY, FROM_INST.

PROC_SORT_WITHIN_FAC

NUMBER(5)

This is an overall sort order for all processes in the facility regardless of route. It is used when displaying differing routes together

PROC_STATE

VARCHAR2(25)

Current processing state of each entity. Updated by a trigger on WIP_EVENT_HIST.

PROC_STATE_EVENT_ONLY

VARCHAR2(5)

The proc_state_event_only column is the process state derived exclusively from lot and wafer events. This is the parent of process_state and it is equal to process_state when the value is ENDED, PROC, PAUSE, ABORT, DISP, and STUCK because these process states come only from events. When the value is HOLD then we look at the hold groups to determine if the process state is HOLD or LONGH. And when the value is WAIT then we look at the complex ect_state_if_wait column to determine if the process state is STG, INHIB, BLOCK, DOWN, WAIT1, WAIT2, or WAIT3. The link between process_state and proc_state_event_only in the ECT diagram is not used in the logic in WIP_LOTS_REALTIME or GET_PROC_STATE_EVENT_ONLY but the values should always match.

PROC_TIME_LOOK_AHEAD_PCT

NUMBER(3)

For batching logic in the Scheduler, the percentage of the processing time that we will wait for future lots to arrive to make a full batch. For example, high priorities might have 0 for this column meaning we will never wait for future lots. Standard priority default is 100 meaning if the batch processing time is 2 hours that we would wait for up to 2 hours for future lots to arrive. Low priority might be 200 meaning we will wait up to 4 hours. Of course Scheduler might choose to process an incomplete batch sooner based on other logic but this is upper bound.

PRODUCT_SCORE

NUMBER(2)

Scheduler Evaluation slider value for product priority slider

PRTY_CTM_FACTOR

NUMBER(3,2)

Factor to multiply cycle time for this priority group compared to other groups if not known. For example, if this factor is 1.5 and we know the CTM is 6 hours for another priority group whose factor is 1.0 then we would estimate it to be 9 hours for this group.

PRTY_CTM_GROUP

VARCHAR2(7)

This is one of the primary keys of our CTM tables. We use this group rather than the priority because we often have several different priorities which are close and are expected to have the same cycle time.

PRTY_TRANSPORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(10)

Priority level transport mode. If no other mode is specified, this will be the value used to direct wip with a specific priority.

PULL_POINT_COLUMN_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Either due_inst from WIP_LOTS_STATIC or demand_inst from WIP_FLUSH can be used as the date to calculate pull points for Line Viewer and WIP Flush.

PURGE_CHGLOG_DAYS_ADMIN_CFG

NUMBER(5,1)

Since FPSADMIN CFG tables are not in CFG_TABLES, we set purge_chglog_days for all of them using this value.

PURGE_CHGLOG_DAYS_APP_C

NUMBER(5,1)

Since FPSAPP C tables (i.e. PFIX_C_xxx) are not in CFG_TABLES, we set purge_chglog_days for all of them using this value.

PURGE_CHGLOG_DAYS_APP_W

NUMBER(5,1)

Since FPSAPP W tables (i.e. PFIX_W_xxx) are not in CFG_TABLES, we set purge_chglog_days for all of them using this value.

PURGE_COLUMN_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

This must be the name of a DATE or TIMESTAMP column which is the first column in an index. See PURGE_DAYS.COLUMN_NAME comment for purge details.

PURGE_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

All history tables must have the PURGE_COLUMN_NAME and PURGE_DAYS set. We automatically purge data older than DAYS to keep the history tables to a reasonable size. We must keep at least 10 days worth of data in all tables (except DASH_P_H_SHIFT_SUMMARY) with the logic being that gives us 3 days to append from the raw table to the week history. If you do not want to purge then set DAYS to 9999.

QTY

NUMBER(7)

Quantity of units in the lot according the qty_unit defined for the facility. It is required for all lots in each facility to have their qty defined in the same units therefore the change in the unit is critical to defining the facility. For example, a pretest facility might have a sort step in the middle where we learn the qty of die. Prior to this step we know only the wafer qty but after this step we know both wafer and die. Since wafer is the only qty we know throughput the flow then wafer must be defined as the qty unit for this facility. Die can then be populated as sec_qty when it is known. Similarly the wafer saw facility might have a step in the middle where we cut the wafers into die. After this step we no longer know the number of wafers which means that die must be the qty unit for this facility and wafers can be the sec_qty prior to the saw step. Please note that a lot with qty of 0 is allowed but only if the sec_qty is greater than 0. This is unusual but one case is where we know the wafers will be scrapped but cannot be scrapped quite yet.

QTY_AVAIL

NUMBER(12)

How many of any part is available at this point in time.

QTY_DELTA

NUMBER(7)

Difference in number of wafers due to an event that changes lot quantity

QTY_IN_JOB

NUMBER(7)

The number of units in the job. For example a batch tool with 5 carriers each with a 25 wafer lot would have 125 in the job. This is also important for non-batch tools where we have multiple lots in a carrier as the job might include all lots or only selected lots.

QTY_MEAS

NUMBER(7)

Quantity of units measured at this metrology step. This is less than or equal to the qty_in_job. The standard case is where we have a 25 wafer lot so the qty_in_job is 25 but we only measure 3 wafers on the metrology tool so qty_meas is 3.

QTY_NEEDED

NUMBER(2)

The number of units needed of the source product for each unit in the next product. Typically this is 1 but occasionally we might assemble 2 A and 1 B together to make 1 C.

QTY_UNIT

VARCHAR2(12)

Defines the unit used to measure number of quantity. The key here is that this quantity must be known throughout the entire route through the facility. For example in a sort facility where lots enter in wafers and are broken into die but the number of wafers is still known when the lot completes the facility then the qty_unit must be wafer. It cannot be die because die is not known when the lot enters so die will be the sec_qty_unit. Similarly at a final test facility where the lots enter with both wafers and die known but only die are known when the lot completes the facility then the qty_unit must be die. It cannot be wafer because wafer is not known when the lot completes so wafer will be the sec_qty_unit. Please note the entire process from only wafers to only die must be split into at least two facilities because of this requirement.

QTY_UNIT_PLURAL

VARCHAR2(12)

Plural form of the quantity unit. For example if qty_unit is defined as wafer then the plural form would be wafers.

QTY_UNIT_SHORT

VARCHAR2(3)

Short display of the quantity unit. For example if qty_unit defined is wafer then this could be wfr.

QUEUE_STATUS

VARCHAR2(8)

Display field showing the current status of this lot within a queue time sequence.

QUEUE_TCT_SEC

NUMBER

The total process time (TCT_SEC) between the start step and the end step, but not include the step that is est_smp_pct < 50 (defined on sched-group level)

RACK

VARCHAR2(32)

Rack is the parent of location and is where we ask to send the carrier.

RACK_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(32)

Optional column to show a user friendly station name on the NextMove GUI which is different that the station name on the barcode.

RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Rank is a single character like P for primary or A for alternate or S for setup. The ranks defined in perm, temp, extl_rank columns in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS tables are in RTG_PERM_RANKS. The ranks defined automatically in WIP_STEP_FUT_ASGN views are in RTG_CURR_RANKS. All ranks are defined by FPS and the specific values are used in the Scheduler therefore we must translate in the ETL to assign to the most appropriate perm_rank.

RANK_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(24)

The name of the rank displayed on all dashboards and reports. Rank must be a single character so we allow a longer more descriptive name here. For example Primary might be the rank_display for the rank P.

RANK_SORT

NUMBER(3)

This is an important field because we sort the allowed tools for a lot by the rank_sort and choose the first one as the best tool for the lot which determines the process state. Rank_sort is unique across the union of RTG_PERM_RANKS and RTG_AUTO_RANKS so that the RTG_RANKS view has a unique rank_sort.

READY_INST

DATE

Time when the lot was ready to be processed (e.g. after recipe downloaded).

REASON

VARCHAR2(1000)

Reason why the action was triggered. This is used to provide a comment to MES.

REASON_WHY_ACTIVE

VARCHAR2(64)

This shows the highest-priority reason which this PRD/ROUTE is considered active. See RTG_REF_ACTIVE_PRD_ROUTES_BASE for the list and ordering of possible reasons.

RECIPE

VARCHAR2(100)

the recipe; the est_machine_recipe

RECIPE_CHG_INST

DATE

Time when the recipe change occurred.

RECIPE_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(100)

the recipe family for this eqp type; each family can have be assigned to multiple groups

RECIPE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(100)

the recipe group for this eqp type; each group can have multiple families

RECIPE_VERSION

VARCHAR2(12)

This field is for historical tracking purposes only and is not used in any FPS calculation.

RECURSIVE_LEVEL

NUMBER(2)

Levels of segments within a section

RECYCLE_APP_POOL

VARCHAR2(50)

the name of IIS App Pool

RECYCLE_COMMENTS

VARCHAR2(1024)

comments from the results

RECYCLE_END_INST

DATE

when the recycle ended

RECYCLE_START_INST

DATE

when the recycle started

RECYCLE_STATE

VARCHAR2(12)

the state of the recycle, listed in sch_recycle_state

RECYCLE_URL

VARCHAR2(500)

the web servie where to run the recycle application

RELEASE_INST

DATE

This is the time is when the script was built by Build_official_upgrade_script.sh.

REMAINING_MINS_UNTIL_SCHED

NUMBER(7)

See comment for MINUTES_UNTIL_SCHED column.

REMOVAL_DATE

DATE

Date the tool will be removed from the fab used for future capacity modeling. Currently we do not filter tools from current use if this date is in the past as we expect the tool to be deleted from this table. However this is something to consider.

REPAIR_REASON

VARCHAR2(36)

These are the values that can be found in EQP_EVENT_HIST REPAIR_REASON. A value from a reasonably short list of user-defined explanations of how the entity will be repaired or what caused it to go down.

REPORT_INST

DATE

Date/time when the WIP Flush last updated. Obviously this is the same for all rows.

REQUIRE_ALL_CHAMBERS

CHAR(1)

This indicates that all chambers specified in CH_ALLOWED must be used. Normally we only require one chamber of each chamber type and can run with fewer chambers and a degraded throughput but not when this flag is set.

REQUIRE_ALL_CH_FOR_SCHED

CHAR(1)

This is set to Y only if we are using the FPS Scheduler for chamber tools where ch_type is not yet set properly. In this case we must use all chambers in the ch_allowed provided to us and cannot schedule if any of these chambers is not available.

REQUIRE_LOCATION_SCAN

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates if the rack requires a location scan

RESCHED_MAX_CAP_SEC

NUMBER(6)

WILL REMOVE SOON

RESCHED_MIN_CAP_SCORE_PCT

NUMBER(4)

how much better on the tool score to determine if it should break the current reservation to reschedule to another tool.

RESCHED_MIN_CAP_SEC

NUMBER(6)

How much better on sched-start-time on the lot to determine if it should break the current reservation to reschedule to another tool

RESERVE_INST

DATE

Time when the lot was reserved to the tool either by Scheduler or external or manual reservation. As opposed to dispatch, reserve is only in the FPS DWH and therefore can be automatically undone.

RESERVE_SEC_BUFFER

NUMBER(6)

Defines the buffer on un-reserving lots by time. Lots with start times outside the reservation window plus this buffer will be unreserved by the queue manager

RESERVE_SEC_DURABLE

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_SEC_LOT

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_SEC_PRTY_DURABLE

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_SEC_PRTY_LOT

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_STEPS_DURABLE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_STEPS_LOT

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_STEPS_PRTY_DURABLE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESERVE_STEPS_PRTY_LOT

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

RESULT_REFRESH_ACTION

VARCHAR2(100)

Indicate the action when it needs to send the signal that the new result is ready

RESULT_REFRESH_CONTROLLER

VARCHAR2(100)

Indicate the controller when it needs to send the signal that the new result is ready

RETICLE_SET

VARCHAR2(64)

Reticle set used for the product.

RN_DESC_OF_STEP_MOVES

NUMBER(3)

If a lot moves through multiple steps within one loop of the WIP_EVENT_HIST load then there is no reason to call UPDATE_WIP_STEP_FUTURE for each step. If WIP_APD_EVENT_HIST includes more than one step move for a lot then we can skip the call to UPDATE_WIP_STEP_FUTURE for all but the last move. This column is automatically populated in the ADM_LOAD_EVENT_HIST_VIA_APD procedure. Then in the triggers, we skip the call to UPDATE_WIP_STEP_FUTURE if the value is greater than 1.

ROLE_NAME

VARCHAR2(100)

This is used to define the role name.

RORP

VARCHAR2(256)

The Capacity Model does its calculations by rorp which stands for "route or prd" although it could technically be something in between route and prd. This is controlled by the ovr_rorp column in FPSINPUT.RTG_PRDS. In FPSBASE.RTG_PRDS_PLUS, rorp is set to prd by default if ovr_rorp is null. Populating ovr_rorp in the ETL (with route, for example) will override the default and set rorp = ovr_rorp.

RORP_DISPLAY_PLURAL

VARCHAR2(25)

This is the display value for rorp in plural form. For example, if rorp is populated by prd, it should be Products.

ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

Route that has threading requirements

ROUTE_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(256)

Define what routes will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

ROUTE_FAMILY

VARCHAR2(36)

Route_family indicates that all routes within the family have similar or even identical steps and have the same segments. At facilities where various prds share the same route it is likely that the route will be the route_family. This is sometimes referred to as the main process flow. It is used on Segment Summary and Line Viewer to group similar routes.

ROUTE_FAMILY_SCORE

NUMBER(2)

Scheduler Evaluation slider value for route family priority slider

ROUTE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

Route_group is the parent of route_family. Route_group is used on the Dashboard and other applications as a large grouping for filtering. At many sites this is referred to as technology.

ROUTE_MSO_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Route group to be used for the Metrology Sampling Optimizer, generally based on similarity of technology or volume.

ROUTE_MSO_GROUP_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Define what ROUTE_MSO_GROUPS will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables.

ROUTE_MSO_GROUP_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Lots that are of a part in the defined ROUTE_MSO_GROUP will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NA the check is ignored.

ROUTE_NA

VARCHAR2(256)

Lots that are of the defined route will be tagged or never tagged, depending on the condition type that is selected. If the value is NA the check is ignored.

ROUTE_OR_EACH

VARCHAR2(256)

Key field set to either EACH for every route value within a given facility, or a specific Route value where any override values are set

ROUTE_SCORE

NUMBER(2)

Scheduler Evaluation slider value for route priority slider

ROUTE_SECTION

VARCHAR2(32)

A large grouping of route steps used for line balance and should be set to contain at least a week of steps based on cycle time. Line balance uses this grouping instead of segment so that it can be configured independently from segment which is used in the Dashboard for display purposes, but they can also be set the same if desired. The section should be large in order to minimize the impact of short-term WIP distribution changes on step WIP targets because line balance calculates step WIP targets based on the WIP currently in each section.

ROUTE_SECTION_SORT

NUMBER(6)

Sequence number of route segment within a section

ROUTE_SEGMENT

VARCHAR2(36)

Route_segment allows for clear hierarchical segment organization for Segment Summary and Line Viewer on Dashboard. This is often referred to as stage and typically will come from the MES (as opposed to facility_segment which we will typically have to define for our purposes). We recommend that all routes in the same route family have the same route segments in the same order so that the Line Viewer by route family will be consistent but if this is not the case then we approximate the order as best we can.

RPT_OWNER_NAME

VARCHAR2(64)

This field is used to indicate who owns this FPSRPT object. It is for informational purposes only and not used in the FPS DWH.

RPT_PROJECT

VARCHAR2(50)

This field is used to categorize FPSRPT objects. It is for informational purposes only and not used in the FPS DWH.

RQD_BEG_PROC_INST_OF_END_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot must start processing on the tool at the step which ends the queue timer.

RQD_COMP_INST_OF_END_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot must complete (also referred to as move out of) the step which ends the queue timer.

RQD_DISPATCH_INST_OF_END_STEP

DATE

Time when the lot must dispatch to the tool at the step which ends the queue timer.

RQD_PCT_TO_UPDATE_WSFS

NUMBER(2)

When less than this percentage of lot steps are evaluated/placed before timeout, the scheduler will not update WIP_STEP_FUTURE_SCHED data for the run. Note that this is not the percent of scheduled lots - only the percent evaluated. If this parameter is set to 70 and in a run all lot/steps are evaluated by 31 percent cannot be scheduled (due to tool assignment or other), then the scheduler will still update WIP_STEP_FUTURE_SCHED. This flag is primarily to prevent SLOW scheduler runs from clearing WIP_STEP_FUTURE_SCHED.

RQD_PORT_GROUP

VARCHAR2(12)

Optional value if tool has different groups of ports, for example 150mm and 200mm. This indicates what is required for each lot and PORT_GROUP in EQP_PORTS indicates what ports can run this group.

RQD_QUAL_EVENT_ID

VARCHAR2(32)

Used when a recipe requires a certain qual in order to be allowed to run. Often multiple recipes will require the same qual. One example is in Litho where several recipes all require a certain track monitor to pass in order to be allowed to run. When the qual has not passed (either failed or expired) then the curr_rank will automatically be set to Q which indicates the recipe is permanently allowed but not currently qualified.

RQD_SETUP

VARCHAR2(100)

Rqd_setup is determined by ovr_rqd_setup in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS and use_process_as_rqd_setup and use_est_mach_rcp_as_rqd_setup from EQP_TYPES. The latter two columns allow us to easily specify for an eqp_type that setup times should be calculated by process or est_machine_recipe. For traditional setups that are a group of recipes we use ovr_rqd_setup.

RSV_WEIGHTS_ON_NEXT_RQD_STEP

NUMBER(7,2)

to assign the points to the next required step if the current step is reserved/dispatched

RT_STEP_BANK_ENT_INST

DATE

If the lot is at a step then this is the time when it entered the current route-step. If the lot is at a bank then this is the time it entered the current bank.

RULE_CLASS

VARCHAR2(36)

Unique name for the class.

RULE_CLASS_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(36)

Display name to show on the dashboard.

RULE_CLASS_SORT

NUMBER(3)

Display order of the class on the dashboard.

RULE_CONDITION_MAX

NUMBER(8)

Allows user to define a recommended max value for the rule condition. When user is updating a rule, this will give them values to keep the condition within. It will not actually restrict the value though.

RULE_CONDITION_MIN

NUMBER(8)

Allows user to define a recommended min value for the rule condition. When user is updating a rule, this will give them values to keep the condition within. It will not actually restrict the value though.

RULE_DESCRIPTION

VARCHAR2(256)

Allows the user to give the rule a description that is more detailed than the rule name.

RULE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

Unique name for the group.

RULE_GROUP_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(36)

Display name to show on the dashboard.

RULE_GROUP_MIN_CONDITION_OVR

NUMBER(8)

Minimum value allowed for rule group to override the sample condition. If toolstatus condition dynamically moves the sample condition below this value, then this will cap it. Rule Group dynamic sampling will not be allowed to go lower than this threshold.

RULE_GROUP_Q_SKIP_WIP_LIMIT

NUMBER(12)

WIP limit used to trigger post tag skipping of lots for rules where allowed. If WIP for the rule group exceeds this limit, then lots will be allowed to skip by the queue manager if the lots pass checks and rule allows.

RULE_GROUP_SORT

NUMBER(3)

Display order of the group on the dashboard.

RULE_GROUP_TOOL_MSO_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Sets the assigned tool mso group for the rule group. This allows us to determine the percent of tools that are up for the rule group.

RULE_OWNER

VARCHAR2(50)

Configurable text field to assign a rule owner.

RULE_OWNER_EMAIL

VARCHAR2(128)

Configurable text field to assign a rule owner email.

RUN_ID

VARCHAR2(50)

the run id from the last successful scheduler

RWK_IF_EXPIRED

CHAR(1)

Indicates whether rework is required after queue timer expires. If allowed, we need to specify the route and step that we expect the lot to move into for rework.

RWK_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(256)

If the queue timer is from a rework route to the main route then this is the name of the rework route and the route column is the name of the main route.

RWK_START_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

If the queue timer moves to a rework route and step from the main route then this is the start step on the rework route. The timer handling is treated the same once it enters rework, with the rework step starting the timer like the normal start step.

SAH_CHAMBERS

VARCHAR2(24)

Send ahead chambers

SAH_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

Send ahead tool

SAH_TYPE

VARCHAR2(8)

Send ahead type is primarily used to set lot_priority. We often want to prioritize a sendahead lot only to the metrology tool so we can get metrology as soon as possible and start processing more lots.

SBY_INST

DATE

Time when the standby state last changed.

SBY_OR_CSC_DISPLAY_SUFFIX

VARCHAR2(33)

The ETP_STATE_DISPLAY for the standby and missed cascade states associated with this rank will be Standby/Missed Cascade followed by this suffix.

SBY_PRECEDENCE

NUMBER(3)

This column fits these ranks in with RANK_SORT for the other standby states to give the overall standby precedence. This value has be unique including not matching any in RTG_RANKS.

SBY_STATE

VARCHAR2(9)

Current standby state of each entity. Updated various ways depending on customer.

SBY_TRANSITION_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

The transition state for the standby and missed cascade states associated with this rank will be SBY/PRD-CSC followed by this suffix.

SCAN_GRADE

VARCHAR2(5)

Scan grade. This will determine if we need to increase the sample rate if the scan quality begins to deteriorate.

SCAN_RESULT

VARCHAR2(5)

Scan result. This will either be Pass or Fail

SCHEDULE_DISPLAY

NVARCHAR2(1024)

A user friendly display for the schedule.

SCHEDULE_ID

VARCHAR2(64)

A unique identifier for a schedule. Possibly a shift and a date.

SCHEDULE_STATUS_OFFSET_DAYS

NUMBER(1)

If the expected out inst is more than this many days after the pull point (a.k.a. due or demand) inst then we consider the lot to be late. We also consider it late if it is in the next plan week even if less than this number of days behind.

SCHED_BACKLOAD_INST

DATE

to indicate the the scheduled early start time, if it was possible. This should only be updated backload was possible

SCHED_BATCH_CRITERIA

VARCHAR2(140)

Scheduler will populate the batch criteria data here when it has info

SCHED_BURDEN_RATE

NUMBER(12,2)

Priority of the schedule, E.g. normal shifts = 1, Over-time work that costs more =2. Therefore, Overtime has twice the burden as normal time.

SCHED_CH_TO_USE

VARCHAR2(24)

Please note that the Scheduler often populates this with M which indicates the main tool therefore we often should filter out a value of M when using this value since that it not a valid chamber combination. When this is populated with any value other than M then we use this as est_ch_used rather than calculating with GET_CH_ALLOWED_STATUS or GET_CH_PATH_STATUS.

SCHED_EARLY_START

DATE

This Column stores the estimated earliest sched start for a lot. To be used for NextMove or dispatching

SCHED_END_TIME_WAIT_PCT

NUMBER(4)

used to determine if this priority will allow late sched-end time for batching

SCHED_EXTL_MODEL_ID

VARCHAR2(128)

to indicate the external model id of the tool that this lot is scheduled to

SCHED_EXTL_MODEL_STATE

VARCHAR2(128)

to indicate the external model state of the tool that this lot is scheduled to

SCHED_GROUP

VARCHAR2(36)

This is the grouping of tools and processes which the FPS Scheduler schedules together. Since this is a parent of tool via tool->process_group and a parent of process via process->process_group, by definition each tool and each process can only be in one sched group. We need all related tools and processes to be in the same sched group for efficient scheduling. One example is sinks and furnaces because of queue times and batching. Another example is for smaller facilities like Assembly or Test where we might schedule the entire facility together.

SCHED_GROUP_DESC

VARCHAR2(256)

Longer description of sched_group

SCHED_GROUP_STATE

VARCHAR2(5)

State is constrained to one of three values. ON: Running for production. DEV: Schedule is visible for authorized users only (Q-Mgr and Scheduler run as if ON). OFF: Rarely used except when setting up a new sched_group.

SCHED_INSPECTION_INST

DATE

the time scheduled to do the inspection

SCHED_IS_EXCLUSIVE_CHAMBER

CHAR(1)

to indicate if the chamber is exclusive on the tool where this lot scheduled to

SCHED_LOT_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(6)

to indicate the transit time needed to move the lot to the scheduled tool

SCHED_NOTES

VARCHAR2(128)

The notes will be used to be displayed in scheduler in lot list report on the lot level

SCHED_PROCESS_CHANGE_SEC

NUMBER(6)

to indicate the process change time needed to run this lot

SCHED_QUEUE_START_DELAY_INST

DATE

to indicate the earliest time that to start to process the queue-start-step

SCHED_REASONS

NVARCHAR2(512)

The Reason why the scheduler will need to schedule this step or not

SCHED_RESERVE_INST

DATE

The actual time the lot was reserved by the scheduler will be helpful for compliance and debugging.

SCHED_RQD_PORT_GROUP

VARCHAR2(12)

to indicate the required port group information of the tool that this lot scheduled to

SCHED_SORT

NUMBER(3)

The sorting used by the scheduler to prioritize lots. This is more generic than priority_sort as different priorities may have the same sched_sort.

SCHED_START

DATE

The first start time for the durable to be used

SCHED_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

the tool from the first lot that scheduled

SCHED_TRANSIT_SEC

NUMBER(6)

The transit time from the carriers current location to the destination

SCHED_WAIT_ETP_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

The only way for ETP to know that the Scheduler is asking to wait is for the Scheduler to populate this column indicating that the lot is scheduled but waiting for a particular reason. This column must be an exact etp_state value starting with SBY-IW so it has a check constraint and a foreign key on ETP_STATE_DIAGRAM.

SCHED_WEIGHT

NUMBER(4

is used to determine the sched weight of this lot type in the sched-group

SCHED_WEIGHTS

NUMBER

This is how much weight to give the chamber path rank. When populated, this will override the weights for chamber path rank and tool assignment rank. If null, then Scheduler will take the value from the configuration table SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS. example 1: ovr_sched_weights is 40 -> the chamber path rank will have a weight of 40, regardless of what ovr_ch_path_rank is. example 2: ovr_sched_weights is null and ovr_ch_path_rank == "A" -> the chamber path rank will get the weight for "A" from SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS example 3: ovr_sched_weights is null and ovr_ch_path_rank is null-> the chamber path rank will use the tool assignment rank and get the weight from SCH_C_GROUP_PERM_RANKS

SCHED_ZONE_TO_USE

VARCHAR2(1)

While zone restricted batch scheduling is enabled, this column will be populated with the zone assignment corresponding to the ZONE in EQP_ZONES for the scheduled tool.

SCH_ADD_SEC_SCHED_END

NUMBER(5)

This is used for the scheduler, to add seconds to the sched_end time if lot is still in PROC

SCH_BACKLOAD_SEC

NUMBER(5)

Use for the Scheduler to determine how early from the end of the previous job, the next batch/lot can start without missing the cascade. For Example: The previous job finishes at 4 pm. If the backload sec is set for 10800 seconds. The next job can start at 1 pm if it can arrive in time. If the cannot arrive by 1 pm then the lot must start after the previous lot unloads from the tool. In other words it must start after the sched end.

SCH_BATCH_BUFFER_IN_MINS

NUMBER(5,1)

A buffer in minutes used for case where future batch has at least one lotstep that is not yet at operation and the previous step for that lotstep is not scheduled. The estimated start time of the batch will be delayed by this much beyond the expected arrival inst of the incoming lot.

SCH_BATCH_INT_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This column is used to set the default value of the batch interval time, the time between the end time from the previous batch and the end time from the next batch. The BATCH_INT_SEC is defined as the additional time to process each batch.

SCH_BATCH_MATCH_QTY_THRESHOLD

NUMBER(3,1)

If not null, this value determines the break point between linear and 1/delta scoring for the batching rule based on variation in lot wafer quantity within the batch. The threshold is based on the standard deviation of the lot quantities. If the standard deviation in lot wafer quantity is less than or equal to SCH_BATCH_MATCH_QTY_THRESHOLD then the scoring decreases linearly (e.g. 10-delta). If it is more than SCH_BATCH_MATCH_QTY_THRESHOLD then it will be scored as a an inverse relationship (e.g. 10/(delta+1)). If the value of SCH_BATCH_MATCH_QTY_THRESHOLD is null, then the rule will not score for that tool and return a default score (currently zero).

SCH_BREAK_CASCADE_PROC_CHANGE

CHAR(1)

When this flag is set to Y, process change times will not be applied until after the required resources (chambers, tools) are idle. When set to N, the change times will begin at the time the scheduler would normally allow another lot to be started (i.e. cascade)

SCH_CHG_CAL_METHOD_COST

VARCHAR2(4)

This is used for the scheduler, to determine how to calculate the cost for process/setup/recipe when there are multiple changes. The default value will be SUM, this means, if there are more than 2 setups that require changes, it will add up total cost

SCH_CHG_CAL_METHOD_SEC

VARCHAR2(4)

This is used for the scheduler, to determine how to calculate the time for process/setup/recipe when there are multiple changes. The default value will be MAX, this means, if there are more than 2 setups that require changes, it will take longer time for the entier changes

SCH_CRITICAL_RATIO_OVR

NUMBER(5,2)

This column allows for a user defined CRITICAL RATIO to be used by the scheduler. If this value is populated, it will be used by the scheduler instead of any value of CRITICAL RATIO that would be calculated by the FPS sytems.

SCH_CUSTOM_SETUP_MSG

VARCHAR2(64)

Allow users to define a custom message to display on top of a lot box.

SCH_CUSTOM_TARGET

NUMBER(5,2)

This is a numeric value that can be passed to the Scheduler for use in scoring lots. It will be the value used in the CUSTOM TARGET scoring evaluation

SCH_DAYS_LATE_OVR

NUMBER(5,2)

Our normal days late calculation uses due_inst and changes over time as that date approaches. This value overrides that normal calculation with a fixed number of days late that does not change over time. A positive value means the lot is behind schedule. This only applies to the Scheduler. The normal use case is for important development lots where we do not really have a due date but we just want them to always count as two days late putting them ahead of normal lots that are less than two days late but behind normal lots that are more than two days late.

SCH_DISPATCH_CAPACITY

NUMBER(4)

This is used for the scheduler, to indicate how many lots allowed to dispatch

SCH_DISPATCH_NUM_STEPS_AWAY

NUMBER(2)

This is used for the scheduler, to indicate how many steps away the lots allowed to dispatch

SCH_DISPATCH_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This is used for the scheduler, to indicate how far the lots allowed to dispatch

SCH_ENABLE_BATCH_SAME_NUM_STEP

CHAR(1)

Used for Scheduler. This flag enables the scheduler only batch the lots with the same num_steps_away if it is within num_steps_away to reserve

SCH_ENABLE_CAST_PORT_TO_SCHED

CHAR(1)

This is used for the scheduler, to enable/disable if it will need to schedule on the cast ports

SCH_ENABLE_CHAMBER_TO_SCHED

CHAR(1)

This is used for the scheduler, to enable/disable if it will need to schedule on the chamber level; by default, it is set to schedule on chamber level.

SCH_ENABLE_POD_PORT_TO_SCHED

CHAR(1)

This is used for the scheduler, to enable/disable if it will need to schedule on the pod ports

SCH_FIRST_UNIT_SEC

NUMBER(9,3)

This column is used to set the default value of the first unit time to process a lot on this EQP_TYPE. The FIRST_UNIT_SEC is defined as the time to process the first unit on the tool starting in a standby state.

SCH_HOURS_TO_LOAD_WSH

NUMBER(5)

This is used for the scheduler, hours to load the wip step hist info

SCH_IGNORE_ON_EXPIRY

CHAR(1)

THE FLAG WHICH INDICATES TO STOP SCHEDULING UPON EXPIRATION OF THE TIMER

SCH_IGNORE_TIMER

CHAR(1)

When set to Y, this timer will not be loaded into the scheduler for consideration.

SCH_INHIBIT_SEC_FOR_DOWN

NUMBER(6)

Used for Scheduler. This flag prevents lots from scheduling to down entities if the expected downtime of the entity is equal to or longer than this flag. This flag should be null if you never want to inhibit lots from scheduling (this is the default). Setting to 0 will always inhibit lots from scheduling to down entities

SCH_IS_DE_RATE_LOT_AFT_RSV

CHAR(1)

To indicate if the scheduler will de-rate the lot score when it is outside of reservation window

SCH_IS_DE_RATE_TOOL_AFT_RSV

CHAR(1)

To indicate if the scheduler will de-rate the tool score when it is outside of reservation window

SCH_IS_DISP_INST_AFT_SETUP

CHAR(1)

Used for Scheduler. This flag is to indicate if the dispatch inst should be before the setup or after the setup. normally, it should be before the setup since it needs the lot to be tracked in to trigger the setup. but there will be some cases the dispatch time will be after setup

SCH_MAX_BATCH_DISP_INT_SEC

NUMBER(5)

The max dispatch interval in seconds for a process job

SCH_MAX_PREV_SCHED_ORDER

NUMBER(5)

Defines the maximum previous sched order that will return a nonzero score from previous schedule order rules. For example, if set to 5, then the first 5 lots on the schedule from the previous scheduler run will generate a score, but the 6th and later lots will score zero

SCH_MAX_SEC_TO_KEEP_POD

NUMBER(5)

To indicate how long the cell tool is willing to keep the same pod to run on the tool. for example, if it sets to 3600, then it means it will try to keep the same pod running on the tool for an hour. after one hour, it is free to switch another pod to ru

SCH_MAX_THP_PCT

NUMBER(6)

This column sets the maximum percentage of the default process time for the eqp type over which long processing times are ignored by the Scheduler. The processing times used in the Scheduler are calculated statistically using historical data. Occasionally we see processes, usually on rework routes, where our calculated processing times are way too long which impacts the schedule by pushing out the start time of all following lots. In order to reduce the impact of this, you can set this value to ignore long times relative to the default for the eqp_type. This value is a percentage so 200 means that values twice as long as the default are ignored and the default is used instead. This default processing time (or TCT which stands for Theoretical Cycle Time) is based on the sch_first_unit_sec, sch_unit_int_sec, and sch_batch_int_sec columns which are also configured in this EQP_TYPES table. For example on a given eqp type, sch_first_unit_sec is 200 and sch_unit_int_sec is 100 so a normal 25 unit lot has a default tct_sec of 2600 seconds. This column sch_max_thp_pct is set to 200 therefore only historical tct_sec under 5200 seconds (2500 X 200/100) is valid. Any tct_sec greater than 5200 seconds is ignored and the Scheduler will use the default of 2500 seconds as TCT_SEC for this process.

SCH_MAX_TRANSIT_SEC_TO_DISP

NUMBER(4)

To indicate the how far the lot is eligible to be dispatch to the sched-tool

SCH_MAX_WAIT_SEC_FOR_TIMER

NUMBER(7)

The Scheduler will not consider a tool eligible for schedulign timer lots if the WAIT_SEC_TO_SCHED is greater than this value in seconds.

SCH_MIN_DISP_SEC

NUMBER(6)

This is used for the scheduler, default minimum dispatch sec

SCH_MIN_SEC_TO_FILL_SCHED

NUMBER(5)

The scheduler will not attempt to fill a gap in the scheduler (whitespace) if the duration of the schedule gap is less than this value.

SCH_PATTERN_INVALID_COST

NUMBER(6)

The cost applied in the scheduler scoring when a lot or job fails pattern match

SCH_PATTERN_INVALID_SEC

NUMBER(9)

The setup change time / delay applied in the scheduler when a lot or job fails pattern match

SCH_POD_SWITCH_WINDOW

NUMBER(5)

To indicate how far to look ahead and behind when determining the severity of a pod switch. for example, if it is set to 3600, then the pod switch rule will look for processJobs an hour ahead and behind the current processJob being evaluated

SCH_PREFER_START_IN_HOURS

NUMBER(5,1)

When given a choice between a tool with a start time before this many hours or after, the scheduler will prefer the one within this many hours - even if it has a lower tool score.

SCH_PROC_STATE_IF_NOT_RESRV

VARCHAR2(5)

This is the process state assigned to this ECT state on the Scheduler if the lot is not reserved. Since the various WAIT states like WAIT1/WAIT2/WAIT3/DOWN/BLOCK/INHIB are already handled by the Scheduler logic, we typically assign WAIT as this value for all of these states. This value should never be modified.

SCH_PROC_TIME_LOOK_AHEAD_PCT

NUMBER(3)

Used by the scheduler to determine the maximum percent of processing time that a lot should be allowed to wait for incoming lots to form a complete batch. If incoming lots would result in a partial batch, the wait percent is scaled accordingly.

SCH_RESCHED_MIN_CAP_SCORE_PCT

NUMBER(4)

how much better on the tool score to determine if it should break the current reservation to reschedule to another tool.

SCH_RESCHED_MIN_CAP_SEC

NUMBER(6)

How much better on sched-start-time on the lot to determine if it should break the current reservation to reschedule to another tool.

SCH_RESERVE_ONLY_AFTER_SCHED

CHAR(1)

Used for scheduler queue manager. If set to Y, the queue manager will only reserve a lot if the scheduler has started and completed once after the lot arrived at the operation.

SCH_RESET_SCORE_ON_EXPIRY

CHAR(1)

THE FLAG WHICH INDICATES QUEUE TIMER SCORE SHOULD BE SET TO ZERO UPON EXPIRATION OF THE TIMER

SCH_RSV_LOT_BUFFER

NUMBER(2)

Defines the buffer on un-reserving lots by capacity. Jobs with start order outside the reserve capacity plus this buffer will be unreserved by the queue manager

SCH_RSV_SEC_BUFFER

NUMBER(6)

Defines the buffer on un-reserving lots by time. Lots with start times outside the reservation window plus this buffer will be unreserved by the queue manager

SCH_RSV_SEC_DURABLE

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. How far in advance in terms of time should durables be reserved - non-priority lots.

SCH_RSV_SEC_LOT

NUMBER(6)

This column determines how many seconds a lot may be reserved from the current time. If 10800 is set, each tool within this eqp_type will have a reservation window of 3 hours - for non-priority lots. Which means that if the lot falls within the step limit and the lot would start processing within the 3 hour limit, it may be reserved on the tool.

SCH_RSV_SEC_PRTY_DURABLE

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. How far in advance in terms of time should durables be reserved - priority lots

SCH_RSV_SEC_PRTY_LOT

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. How far in advance in terms of time should lots be reserved, starting from Now - for priority lots

SCH_RSV_STEPS_DURABLE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. The number of steps in advance to reserve a durable - non-priority lots.

SCH_RSV_STEPS_LOT

NUMBER(4)

By default, it will be set to 0 on this column since most of time it should only reserve the lots that are currently at the operation and ready to be processed. Once the lot is reserved, unless something unexpected happens, otherwise, the scheduler will not change the decision on this reservation.

SCH_RSV_STEPS_PRTY_DURABLE

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. The number of steps in advance to reserve a durable - priority lots.

SCH_RSV_STEPS_PRTY_LOT

NUMBER(4)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. the Number of Steps to reserve - for priority lots.

SCH_SCHED_WEIGHTS_IN_RSV_WNDW

NUMBER(4)

To indicate the sched weights for this eqp_type in the reservation window

SCH_SHOW_GANTT_CHART_CAST_PORT

CHAR(1)

This is used for the scheduler, to enable/disable if it will display sched-bar for cast ports on gantt chart

SCH_SHOW_GANTT_CHART_CHAMBER

CHAR(1)

This is used for the scheduler, to enable/disable if it will display sched-bar for chambers on gantt chart

SCH_TIMER_EXP_PREFER_TOOL_HRS

NUMBER(5,1)

When selecting the best tool at a timer end step, the scheduler will prefer a tool that beats the timer expiration by at least this many hours over tools that have later start times. This takes precedence over the tool scores.

SCH_TOOL_IDLE_SCORE_JOBS

NUMBER(4)

To get a score for the Tool Idle Time rule, the lot must be one of the first jobs (ordered by start time) scheduled to the tool.

SCH_TOOL_IDLE_SCORE_SEC

NUMBER(6)

To get a score for the Tool Idle Time rule, the lot must be scheduled to begin processing within this time window from the start of the scheduler run

SCH_UNIT_INT_SEC

NUMBER(9,3)

This column is used to set the default value of the unit interval time, the time between the end time from the previous unit and the end time from the next unit, to process a lot with more than 1 units on this EQP_TYPE. The UNIT_INT_SEC is defined as the additional time to process each unit. Usually this value is greater than 0 for a non-batch tool and 0 for a batch tool.

SCH_UNRESERVE_DIFF_SETUP

CHAR(1)

Is used to determine if the queue-manager will need to remove the reserved lots if the new tracked-in lots have different setup.

SCH_USE_TOOL_THP_ESTIMATES

CHAR(1)

This column has a default value of Y but by setting this to N you can configure the Scheduler to not use tool-specific throughput estimates. The use case is when you know that one tool in the eqp_type has been faster than another tool in recent weeks but we do not want the faster tool to get any preference in Scheduler. Technically speaking, when this flag is set then calls to GET_THP_VALUES from Scheduler objects will not lookup estimated values in THP_TOOL_AUTO but will get all estimated values by eqp_type from THP_EQPTYPE_AUTO. This flag does not apply to lots which have already started processing on the tool and have an actual_machine_recipe since at this point the tool is already chosen and getting the most accurate data is more important than avoiding preferring one tool over another. In addition to one tool actually processing lots faster, please note that faster throughput estimates can also be caused by loading one tool significantly more efficiently than another tool and therefore cascading better. This is because our throughput estimates attempt to estimate the throughput on a perfectly cascading tool but the only reasonable way to define "perfect cascading" is to use the best cascading that we observed on the tool from the history.

SCH_WAIT_SEC_VERIFY_LONG_DOWN

NUMBER(6)

When a tool goes down, non highlighted priorities will wait this many seconds after the down event to break the reservation.

SCH_WAIT_SEC_VERIFY_SHORT_DOWN

NUMBER(6)

When a tool goes down, highlighted priorities will wait this many seconds after the down event to break the reservation.

SCH_WEIGHT_PER_HOUR_ON_EXPIRY

NUMBER(7,2)

THE VALUE WHICH INDICATES THE POINTS PER HOUR ADDED TO THE TIMER SCORE UPON EXPIRATION OF THE TIMER

SCORING_TIME_BASE

VARCHAR2(16)

the scoring time base is used to allow scheduler to calculate the time related points based on HOUR or DAY

SCRAP_CATEGORY

VARCHAR2(64)

A optional categorization field for scrap events which can be defined for the facility.

SCRAP_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

Responsible module for the scrap event.

SCRAP_OWNER

VARCHAR2(48)

Engineer responsible for analyzing and recording this scrap event.

SCRIPT_ID

VARCHAR2(36)

This column references the name of script used to process lots at this step. Different MES use different terminology but the key to this column is its use to determine batches. Lots with the same script_id and same batch_criteria from RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS can be batched together. Therefore this is critical column for scheduling on batch tools.

SECTION

VARCHAR2(100)

The section the report link belongs under, such as Operations or Maintenance

SECTION_SEQ

NUMBER(1)

The order of the sections for display purposes

SEC_BEG_PROC_INST

DATE

Time when processing on secondary tool started.

SEC_END_PROC_INST

DATE

Time when processing on secondary tool finished.

SEC_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Quantity of units in the lot according the sec_qty_unit defined for the facility. See the column comment for the qty column for details and examples.

SEC_QTY_DELTA

NUMBER(7)

Difference in number of die due to an event that changes lot quantity

SEC_QTY_UNIT

VARCHAR2(12)

Secondary quantity unit. See QTY_UNIT comment for details.

SEC_QTY_UNIT_PLURAL

VARCHAR2(12)

Plural form of the secondary quantity unit. For example if sec_qty_unit is defined as wafer then the plural form would be wafers.

SEC_QTY_UNIT_SHORT

VARCHAR2(3)

Short display of the secondary quantity unit. For example if sec_qty_unit defined is wafer then this could be wfr.

SEQ_NUM

NUMBER(7,2)

Sequence number of step in route

SERIAL_NUMBER

VARCHAR2(100)

Tool serial number. This value is only used to display in the Dashboard.

SETUP

VARCHAR2(100)

the unique identifier for the setup associated with this assignment

SETUP_COST

NUMBER(9)

Cost associated with the setup change. Used by the scheduler to optimize setup change based on configuration.

SETUP_EXPIRES_AFTER_MINS

NUMBER(4)

If tool has been in Standby for longer than this number of minutes then we consider that setup to be expired and do not apply penalties based on this setup to decide which job to schedule next on the tool. We use this field to populate curr_setup_expire_inst in ETP_STATUS when a job ends and then we consider the setup expired when this time is in the past.

SETUP_SEC

NUMBER(8)

Estimated time to do this setup change. This time will override the automatically calculated value.

SET_BEG_PROC_INST_IF_NO_TOOL

CHAR(1)

Set to Y to set BEG_PROC_INST for any BEGIN event, even if logged with no entity or with an entity that does not exist in the DWH. Set to N to set BEG_PROC_INST by tool.

SET_ECT_TO_WAIT_TOOLPREV

CHAR(1)

When a lot completes a step and its carrier has the location of a load port of the tool that processed the lot at the previous step, we set the ect_state to WAIT-TOOLPREV (On Tool From Prev Step) by default. When the carrier moves off of the load port then the ect_state changes to a WAIT state. At sites where we do not have accurate carrier location tracking we likely do not want to use this feature and always set the ect_state to a WAIT state when it enters a new step. Setting this to N will do that.

SET_FILLIN_ALLOWED_IF_MFG

CHAR(1)

For chamber tools with multiple ch_types, we use either the RTG_TOOL_ASGN_LOT_xxx_PATHS table or ch_allowed to determine what ch_types are required for each lot/recipe. If we do not have paths or ch_allowed then our default logic is to assume that at least one chamber of each ch_type on the tool is required. That means that a lot/recipe would be blocked if all chambers of one ch_type are down. This can be inaccurate in either of two cases: 1) ch_type values are not set correctly in EQP_CHAMBERS, or 2) lot/recipe does not require all ch_types on the tool. If we are using Scheduler for this tool, we really need to configure the PATHS table or ch_allowed. But if not then setting this flag to Y for a chamber means that if we have no paths and no ch_allowed and this chamber is up that the lot will be allowed to process regardless of the status of other chambers on the tool. The est_ch_used in this case would be all chambers with this flag set which are up. Typically we would want to set this to Y for all non-assist chambers on a particular tool but we could also set just for the most important ch_type.

SET_REPEAT_BY_EVENT

CHAR(1)

At most sites, we automatically calculate is_repeat_curr_shift and is_repeat_curr_plan_day by checking the history to see if this lot has already moved out of this step in the current shift/day. But if this is set to Y then we set both is_repeat_curr_xxx flags based on the is_repeat_if_set_by_event value for the event in WIP_EVENTS. This is typically used when the MES reports that the move is a repeat and we want to use the MES value. Since we we calculate moves as COMP + ISKIP + DSKIP - REPEAT then repeats are effectively not counted in our moves calculation.

SET_ZERO_GOAL_COMP_IF_NO_MANL

CHAR(1)

Our default goals for completes are based on the activity over last three days. These default goals can be overwritten by populating the DASH_W_TARGETS_xxx tables. The question is what is the goal for a record which has activity in the last three days but has no goal defined at any level in the DASH_W tables. Our default is to set a goal based on the activity. If this flag is set to Y then our goal for all records without manually defined goals will be 0.

SET_ZERO_GOAL_OPMV_IF_NO_MANL

CHAR(1)

Our default goals for oper moves are based on the activity over last three days. These default goals can be overwritten by populating the DASH_W_TARGETS_xxx tables. The question is what is the goal for a record which has activity in the last three days but has no goal defined at any level in the DASH_W tables. Our default is to set a goal based on the activity. If this flag is set to Y then our goal for all records without manually defined goals will be 0.

SET_ZERO_GOAL_WIP_IF_NO_MANL

CHAR(1)

Our default goals for WIP are based on the active WIP over last three days. These default goals can be overwritten by populating the DASH_W_TARGETS_xxx tables. The question is what is the goal for a record which has WIP in the last three days but has no goal defined at any level in the DASH_W tables. Our default is to set a goal based on the WIP. If this flag is set to Y then our goal for all records without manually defined goals will be 0.

SHARED_PARENT_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

This indicates that multiple tools share the same physical parent tool even though they operate completely independently. It is critical that the shared_parent_tool not have the same name as the tool or any other tool. Tubes in a furnace are one example. Chambers that are completely independent are another example but we need to be very careful when we define chambers or groups of chambers as separate tools. This should be done when there is no possibility that a lot might run across what we define as tools.

SHIFT

VARCHAR2(13)

Name of shift must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_shift rather than shift in case we want to change the naming convention for the shift.

SHIFTS_FOR_TOOL_MAX_COMP

NUMBER(2)

In the DASH_P_TOOL_MAX_SHIFT_COMP view we get the maximum completes for each tool in any recent shift. The default is 14 shifts but we can adjust as needed with this parameter.

SHIFT_INDEX

NUMBER(5)

0 represents the current shift. 1 is the next shift then 2 follows and so on. -1 is the previous shift and -2 is the shift before that and so on. This column is set automatically by trigger.

SHIFT_TGT_COMPLETES_OVR

NUMBER(5)

Override for shift completes WIP. When populated this will replace SHIFT_TGT_COMPLETES calulated in FPSBASE.EQP_WIP_COMP_TGTS

SHIP_BEFORE_DAYS

NUMBER(2,1)

Limits the week for due date calculation by x days. For example if the week ends on Sunday and this is specified to 2, we calculate due dates for Monday to Friday. Used in WIP_REF_FLUSH_BASE.

SHOULD_APPLY_TO_STAGING_STEP

CHAR(1)

This is to indicate if this evaluation item should be applied to the staging step while the scheduler is compiling the lot score on the lot level. usually any evaluation releated to the tool should be set to N.

SHOULD_AUTO_HIDE

CHAR(1)

If the flag is set to Y then the module will be hidden on the Dashboard even if it has active WIP or moves.

SHOULD_RESERVE_BACK_TO_BACK

CHAR(1)

to determine if need to schedule back-to-back steps

SHOULD_SCHEDULE

CHAR(1)

Indicates if it should force scheduler to schedule this step or not. Setting this value to Y also forces a TAKE decision for this step in WIP_STEP_FUTURE.

SHOULD_SCHEDULE_BLOCK_LOTS

CHAR(1)

WILL REMOVE SOON

SHOULD_SCHEDULE_FUTURE_STARTS

CHAR(1)

When set to N, the scheduler will not include future WIP from WIP_STARTS in the scheduler.

SHOULD_SCHEDULE_HOLD_LOTS

CHAR(1)

This is used to indicate if the scheduler should schedule the hold lot or not

SHOULD_SHOW_SETUP_ON_LEGEND

CHAR(1)

To indicate if it is going to display the setup on the legends on the Scheduler/Web

SHOULD_UPDATE_WSFS

CHAR(1)

When this value is set to N, the scheduler will not write lot schedule results back to WIP_STEP_FUTURE_SCHED. Results will only be written to the snapshot tables (e.g. SCH_W_H_S_LOTS). This can be useful during an initial deployment of a new scheduler where you do not want the results from a scheduler to impact step enter times for other schedules

SHOULD_USE

CHAR(1)

This flag determines if the scheduler should use this data or not

SHOULD_USE_EXTL_RSRV_TOOL

CHAR(1)

This flag determines if the scheduler should use the column extl_reserve_tool or not

SHOW_CARRIER_ID

VARCHAR2(50)

to set the visibility of a carrier id within a lot block in the Gantt chart. SHOW: Show the carrier id. HIDE: Hide the carrier id. SHOW_IF_DIFFERENT: Only show the carrier if it is different from the lot id

SHOW_COMMIT_ON_FLCT_CHART

CHAR(1)

Normally we should a point representing the commit cycle time for the prd during the period but these points can be hidden by setting this to Y.

SHOW_DAY_BEFORE_MONTH

CHAR(1)

Our default date display format is the US standard of month-day-year like Nov 27 1976 but setting this flag to Y changes to day-month-year like 27 Nov 1976.

SHOW_IDLE_INSTEAD_OF_SBY

CHAR(1)

The words standby and idle are synonyms. FPS uses standby but some sites prefer to use idle so they can set this flag to Y and our ETP state display names will replace Standby with Idle automatically.

SHOW_IN_DIAGRAM

CHAR(1)

Some sites have eqp states that are rarely if ever used. We want to keep all eqp states from the MES in this table in case that a state is used but setting this flag to N prevents these states from showing in the Eqp State Diagram. Technically this flag sets the existing is_active flag in both EQP_STATE_DIAGRAM and ETP_STATE_DIAGRAM which was previously always Y for states from the MES.

SHOW_NEAR_FAR_IN_ETP

CHAR(1)

If this flag is set to Y then we will set the standby state for lots of this rank to either NEAR or FAR based on location rather than the normal RANKx. By default, this is only set for P and A but it is allowed for any rank where use_in_sched = Y and proc_state_if_wait = WAIT.

SHOW_ONLY_TRUSTED_ON_THPT

CHAR(1)

At most sites we should all records on the Throughput Tracker but at some sites which have extensively populated their trusted values we only want to show processes with trusted values. Setting this value to Y does that.

SHOW_PROC_STATE_AS_PORT_MODE

CHAR(1)

If this is Y which is the default, the view DASH_P_TOOL_PORTS will overlay whether the port is occupied along with its carrier and the WIP processing states over the port modes as long as the port mode has is_up set to Y.

SHOW_TARGET_ON_FLCT_CHART

CHAR(1)

Normally we should a point representing the target cycle time for the prd during the period but these points can be hidden by setting this to Y.

SHUTDOWN_NOTE

VARCHAR2(128)

Note describing the reason for the shutdown.

SIGMA_AVAIL

NUMBER(5

This is the standard deviation of availability for the tool over the period of time defined by num_days_for_cv_of_av in gen_site.

SINGLE_CH_TYPE

VARCHAR2(6)

When a tool only has one chamber then we do not include the chamber in EQP_CHAMBERS, however, for purposes of our throughput calculations we need to log the correct ch_type so that jobs can be accurately compared to other tools of the same eqp_type and ch_type. For example, if we have ET101 with one etch chamber A and ET102 with two etch chambers A and B then we estimate that a job processing on ET101 (obviously using only ET101CHA) has the same throughput as a job processing on only ET101CHA.

SITE_NAME

VARCHAR2(5)

Short name of the site. Each DWH instance must be for a single site but we can have one or more sites for a given client and we can have one or more facilities at a given site. To use a famous company who we will never work for as an example, the client_name would be GM, client_name_display General Motors, site_name GMDET, site_name_display GM Detroit Truck Fab, and two facilities on the site F150 and F250.

SITE_NAME_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(24)

Longer display friendly site name.

SKIP_DIFF_CHK

CHAR(1)

CFG_FILES table is currently not used.

SKIP_UPDATE_WSF_IF_BEHIND_MINS

NUMBER(3)

The procedure call to update WIP_STEP_FUTURE after each move event is by far the slowest part of our realtime data load but it is not valuable to do the full update when our data falls way behind because it is likely that the lot will have another move event later and overwrite the information. This is normally set to 30 so if we ever fall more than 30 minutes behind we just skip all WSF updates to catch up quicker and then the ADM_FIX procedure refreshes any lots where the newest move event has not been updated.

SKIP_UPDATE_WSF_IF_SAME_LOOP

CHAR(1)

The rn_desc_of_step_moves logic speeds up our RealTime job by only updating WIP_STEP_FUTURE once per lot per job and should be enabled by setting this flag to the default of Y in most cases. The first case where it must be disabled (meaning we will call UPDATE_WIP_STEP_FUTURE after each move event) is when we do not populate step along with next_step in WIP_EVENT_HIST. This first case is checked in SYSMNTR_ERRORS. The second case is if we develop a new ETL approach where we insert events one at a time and commit after each event. This logic is designed for our standard approach of scraping recent events and inserting them in bulk into WIP_EVENT_HIST.

SLOTS_SCANNED

VARCHAR2(100)

Slot map of what slots in the lot carrier were scanned.

SLOT_NUM

NUMBER(2)

The slot number the durable is occupying in its pod. This applies when a durable is stored in a pod that can hold multiple durables.

SMP_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

Product group to be used for sampling, generally something like high/medium/low based on volume of the product.

SMP_PCT_FOR_NUM_STEPS_AWAY

NUMBER(2)

At most sites where we use Scheduler we know the take/skip decision for each lot at the next few steps and we always use this decision if known. But at later steps when this decision is unknown (and for all steps at some sites) then this value determines if we will count the step for num_steps_away. If est_smp_pct is greater than or equal to this number then we will count it. The default is 10 which means we assume that upcoming lots will skip steps with an est_smp_pct less than 10%. If a lot arrives at the step unexpectedly then we will schedule them on the next Scheduler run. The converse is when a lot skips a step with an est_smp_pct greater than 10% in which case it will arrive earlier than expected at the following step. In this case, it should be scheduled but on the next Scheduler run it would be eligible to start immediately. A value of 0 is a special case which means we will count all steps except those where we know that the decision is skip, even steps where the est_smp_pct is exactly 0. To count all steps except those with 0% then set this value to 1.

SMP_PCT_TO_ALLOW_Q_WHEN_DOWN

NUMBER(2)

Normally we do not allow lots to start at the first step in a queue timer sequence if there is a step in the sequence that has no tools available. But we do not want to do this if all tools are down at a metrology step where we know we can skip. This flag sets the threshold for the est_smp_pct below which we will allow lots to start even if all tools are down at this step. The default value is 30 which means that if we have no tools for a step under 30% then we will not block but if we have tools for tools for a step estimated to sample more than 30% then we will block. This can be overriden for specific processes by setting always_allow_q_when_down in RTG_PROCESSES.

SMP_PCT_VALID_LOTS_2D

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the 2 day period required for 2 day sample pct to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

SMP_PCT_VALID_LOTS_7D

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the 7 day period required for 7 day sample pct to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

SMP_PCT_VALID_LOTS_FULL

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the number of weeks defined in ctm_full_window_weeks required for full sample pct to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

SMP_PCT_VALID_LOTS_LONG

NUMBER(4)

Minimum number of lots over the number of weeks defined in ctm_long_window_weeks required for long sample pct to be considered valid. This number includes both moved lots and lots in WIP at the end of the period. In addition you must have at least one lot moved.

SMP_REASON

VARCHAR2(256)

Reason for sampling

SMP_RESULT

VARCHAR2(4)

Either TAKE or SKIP

SMP_RULE_CONDITION

NUMBER(8)

Number indicating when to tag lots for the rule based on the type selected.

SMP_RULE_ID

NUMBER(9)

The tag condition that corresponds with the specified sample rule. This must already be defined in MSO_EXTL_TAG_CONDITIONS.

SMP_RULE_ID_NA

VARCHAR2(9)

The sample rule that will be linked with the corresponding tag condition. This must already be defined in MSO_RULES. This value can be set to NA if the tag condition applies to all sample rules.

SMP_RULE_NAME

VARCHAR2(32)

User friendly name of the sample rule. Always tied to the Rule ID but can be modified if the user wants to change the name.

SMP_RULE_TYPE

VARCHAR2(32)

Set what type of sample rule this is (Percent, Time or Event).

SMP_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Sampling step.

SOFTWARE_VERSION

VARCHAR2(20)

Software version the tool is running. This value is only used to display in the Dashboard.

SORT_ORDER

NUMBER(4)

This is used to sort within the grouping. SORT_ORDER always has a deferrable unique key to ensure uniqueness while allowing the user to make changes without erroring until the commit is attempted. Because of this you must be careful to not violate the unique key otherwise you will lose all of your edits.

SORT_ORDER_IN_DASH

NUMBER(5)

This is the sort order can be used in the Dashboard on the Process Family section. User can leave it blank and the DWH will sort this based on the PROCESS_FAMILY or they can configure it to display in certain order

SORT_ORDER_IN_FAM

NUMBER(2)

Sort order for the lot_type within the lot_family.

SORT_ORDER_IN_GROUP

NUMBER(2)

Sort order for the lot_family within the lot_group

SORT_WITHIN_OPP

NUMBER(3)

Unique sort order within the ETP_group. This is not particularly critical but the idea is that 1 is worse (i.e. closer to NST) and the highest number is best (i.e. closer to PRD).

SORT_WITHIN_TRANSITION

NUMBER(3)

Unique sort order within the transition_state. This is not particularly critical but the idea is that 1 is worse (i.e. closer to NST) and the highest number is best (i.e. closer to PRD).

SORT_YIELD_PCT

NUMBER(6,3)

Line yield percentage from the current step to the finish of the specified route/bank. If the route/bank is not the current one then this included all steps.

SOURCE_EXT

VARCHAR2(32)

External source of throughput value. This is just for informational purposes.

SOURCE_FACILITY

VARCHAR2(6)

First facility in the process flow when a lot visits multiple facilities in sequence.

SOURCE_PRD

VARCHAR2(64)

First prd in the process flow when a lot visits multiple facilities in sequence.

SOURCE_PRD_NUM

NUMBER(3)

When we have multiple source products for a next product, this indicates whether multiple sources are required or whether we choose between them. If four source products are 1, 2, 2, 3 that means we will assemble three products together but for the second product we can choose between the two. Perhaps this second product has an old and a new version.

SOURCE_PRD_NUM_PREFERENCE

NUMBER(3)

We can have multiple source products with the same source_prd_num, indicating a choice among them. At most sites, the HIGHEST-numbered src_prd_num_preference represents the most recent version of a functionally equivalent product, and thus the most preferred option.

SPEC_ID

VARCHAR2(36)

This column references the name of the specification used to process lots at this step. Unlike script_id, this column is not used for any FPS purpose other than reference and display.

SPLIT_LOT_LIST

VARCHAR2(512)

Lot (or list of lots) split along with this lot by this merge event. A value here indicates this was a split event.

SPOTLIGHT_BY_DAY_OR_SHIFT

VARCHAR2(5)

The history dropdown on each spotlight is either grouped by shift or by plan day. The value here determines this and is either SHIFT or DAY.

SRC_APPLICATION

VARCHAR2(30)

Application from which the source data is acquired. Usually this is the MES.

SRC_COLUMN

VARCHAR2(30)

Column(s) from which the column is acquired. This may be more than one column in some cases.

STAFFING_GROUP

VARCHAR2(32)

The name of the group of bays. For example, GROUP_BAY1_BAY2. Staffing group will be the identifier for all the bays in that group.

STAGE_STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

Staging rack for the reserved or scheduled tool if a staging rack exists.

STAGING_RANK

NUMBER(1)

Preference where we want to stage reserved carriers immediately before loading on tool. This is a non-unique numeric rank from 1 to 9 where 1 is first choice and 9 is last choice.

START_INST

DATE

Time when the lot started.

START_INST_2D_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 2 days. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_7D_MED

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using median cycle time from the last 7 days. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_7D_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 7 days. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_COMMIT

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using Commit cycle time. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_FIFO

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using FIFO cycle time. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_FULL_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Full period. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_LONG_WAVG

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Long period. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_INST_TARGET

DATE

Date/time when the lot is estimated to start the specified route/bank using Target cycle time. For the current route/bank this is the date/time when it started.

START_PARM1

NVARCHAR2(256)

First parameter to store whatever value is desired for the site. These can be used for ETL of other tables or site reports or just storing useful data related to upcoming starts.

START_PARM2

NVARCHAR2(256)

Second parameter to store whatever value is desired for the site. These can be used for ETL of other tables or site reports or just storing useful data related to upcoming starts.

START_PARM3

NVARCHAR2(256)

Third parameter to store whatever value is desired for the site. These can be used for ETL of other tables or site reports or just storing useful data related to upcoming starts.

START_PLAN_DAY

DATE

Plan days must be 24 hours in length and the start of the plan day must be the start of one of the shifts. Contrast this to plan day which is independent of shift.

START_PLAN_MONTH

DATE

This is the plan month not the calendar month. Start of the plan month must be the start of a plan week and each plan week must be within a single plan month.

START_PLAN_QUARTER

DATE

This is the plan quarter not the calendar quarter. Start of the plan quarter must be the start of a plan month and each plan month must be within a single plan quarter.

START_PLAN_WEEK

DATE

Plan weeks must be 7 days in duration and the start of the plan week must be the start of one of the plan days.

START_PLAN_WK_2D_WAVG

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 2 days according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_7D_MED

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using median cycle time from the last 7 days according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_7D_WAVG

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the last 7 days according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_COMMIT

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using Commit cycle time according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_DUE

DATE

Work week of due date according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_FIFO

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using FIFO cycle time according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_FULL_WAVG

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Full period according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_LONG_WAVG

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using weighted average cycle time from the Long period according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_WK_TARGET

DATE

Work week when the lot is estimated to finish the specified route/bank using Target cycle time according to CAL_WEEKS.

START_PLAN_YEAR

DATE

This is the plan year not the calendar year. Start of the plan year must be the start of a plan quarter and each plan quarter must be within a single plan year.

START_QTY

NUMBER(8)

See comments in LOT_OR_ALT_ID.

START_RANGE_END_INST

DATE

If populated this means that the starts will occur across a range of time. If blank this means the start will occur at the specific inst. See comments in LOT_OR_ALT_ID for examples.

START_SHIFT

DATE

Shifts can be of any length and it is important that all queries get the shift length based on start_shift and end_shift rather than assuming a set number of hours.

START_STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

Start step that will impact the future thread step rank in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENT_LOT

START_STEP_DAILY_INPUT_LIMIT

NUMBER(9)

Daily maximum of wafer completes at the start step

START_STEP_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

This is the tool the lot ran on at the start thread step. If a lot is threading by tool then START_STEP_TOOL will be equal to the THREAD_TOOL. If lots are threading by THREAD_GROUP then this value will be all possible tools at the future step.

START_WEEK

DATE

Work weeks must be 7 days in duration and the start of the work week must be the start of one of the work days.

START_WORK_DAY

DATE

Work days must be 24 hours in length and the start of the work day must be the start of one of the shifts. Contrast this to plan day which is independent of shift.

START_WORK_MONTH

DATE

This is the work month not the calendar month. Start of the work month must be the start of a work week and each work week must be within a single work month.

START_WORK_QUARTER

DATE

This is the work quarter not the calendar quarter. Start of the work quarter must be the start of a work month and each work month must be within a single work quarter.

START_WORK_YEAR

DATE

This is the work year not the calendar year. Start of the work year must be the start of a work quarter and each work quarter must be within a single work year.

STATE_CHG_INST

DATE

Time when the eqp_state changed for the entity.

STATIC_CURR_DATE

DATE

For static instances like FPSDEV or FPSDEMO where there is no live data feed this is the datetime when the data was updated. We use this in place of sysdate so that logic will work properly at static instances as well as live ones.

STATION

VARCHAR2(32)

The rack, bay, building, tool, cart, or stocker which has alternately acceptable stations

STEP

VARCHAR2(256)

A single processing step within a route representing a single tool visit. Step is often a very complex string and should rarely be displayed. Instead we should use process_display.

STEPS_FOR_NEXT_MOVE

NUMBER(2)

See comment in hours_for_next_move column

STEPS_FOR_WIP_STEP_FUT

NUMBER(3)

The maximum number of steps away from the current step for steps in WIP_STEP_FUTURE. If this is 999 then include all future steps. This is used in combination with hrs_for_wip_step_fut. For example, if this is 10 and hrs is 48 then we write all steps where a lot is expected to arrive within 48 hours or is within 10 steps way. This should likely be close to 10.

STEPS_TO_FIX_WSF_IF_NEW_SMP

NUMBER(2)

When a new smp_result is available for a faraway step (usually meaning that the step is close enough to appear in RTAL/RTALP) then we do not want to immediately fix WSF. Instead we will just wait for the lot to move to a new step and then use the newly available smp_result with that normal update of WSF. But if a new smp_result is available for a step coming soon then we want to fix immediately. That configuration of "coming soon" vs. "faraway" is set with this column.

STEPS_TO_SCHEDULE

NUMBER(5)

This column is used to determine how many steps to look ahead and schedule the lots that might come into this area/SCHED-GROUP even it is still several hours away. Between HOURS_TO_SCHEDULE and STEPS_TO_SCHEDULE, the Scheduler will try to schedule all the lots either will arrive within X hours OR within Y steps away.

STEP_CHOICE_BRANCH

VARCHAR2(256)

See comments for the step_choice_group column.

STEP_CHOICE_GROUP

VARCHAR2(256)

The step choice group and branch columns indicate that each lot must make a choice to visit only one of a group of steps. Both fields must be populated together. Step choice group is just a label to understand the meaning of the group of steps. Step choice branch is the important column indicating to which branch the step belongs. A common example is Litho where we can process on an integrated cell or a standalone track and stepper. Step 100 immediately prior to the Litho would have both fields blank. Step 101 is the integrated cell with step_choice_group set to Litho_Metal_1 and step_choice_branch set to Integrated. Step 102 is the track with step_choice_group set to Litho_Metal_1 and step_choice_branch set to Standalone. Step 103 is the stepper with step_choice_group set to Litho_Metal_1 and step_choice_branch set to Standalone. Step 104 immediately following would have both fields blank.

STEP_ENTER_LOGISTIC_MIDPOINT

NUMBER(3,1)

The midpoint of the S-curve function for step enter time. After this many hours, the raw sore will equal 5 for the function.

STEP_ENTER_LOGISTIC_MID_HRS

NUMBER(3,1)

The midpoint of the S-curve function for step enter time. After this many hours, the raw sore will equal 5 for the function.

STEP_ENTER_LOGISTIC_SLOPE

NUMBER(3

The steepness of the S-curve function for step enter time. Larger numbers mean steeper curves - i.e. closer to a step function change.

STEP_ENT_INST

DATE

Time when the lot entered the step.

STEP_HOLD_SEC_CURR_SHIFT

NUMBER(8)

Time on hold at the current step during the current shift

STEP_ORDER

NUMBER(4)

The order in which the steps will be visited. Note that this is not the sequence number on the route. It is only for sorting within this table. This information may be used to determine upcoming sampling decision or deviations from standard routing.

STEP_PRIORITY

VARCHAR2(7)

this will allow to override the priority at this step

STEP_QTY

NUMBER(7)

this will allow to override the qty at this step. we placed this here for future development first

STEP_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Step Sec

STEP_SEC_ISKIP_FULL_WAVG

NUMBER(7)

ISKIP is immediate skip. Since this value measures how long lots which immediately skip the step are at the step, by definition it should be less than 60 seconds. Therefore it can basically be ignored but it is necessary for data integrity to make sure every second is counted.

STEP_SEC_NOHOLD_FOR_WSF

NUMBER(7)

The FOR_WSF columns are used in populating WIP_STEP_FUTURE. This is based on the CTM_COLUMN_FOR_WIP_STEP_FUT column in GEN_FACILITIES. For example, if the value of that column is 7D_WAVG then we use the 7D_WAVG cycle times for WSF.

STEP_SEC_NOHOLD_FOR_WSF_TO_EOL

NUMBER(11)

This is the expected seconds from the current step to the end of line not including time on hold. WIP_STEP_FUTURE is used for upcoming arrivals and should predict as if the lot will not go on hold unless it is known that it will. The result is that the predictions are reasonably correct for lots that do not go on hold or where we know the future hold - but very wrong for a few lots that go on hold that we do not expect. In contrast, WIP_FLUSH which is used for prediction completion of the route and all future routes will use the entire STEP_SEC including average hold.

STEP_SEC_RQD_FOR_COMP

NUMBER(2)

A lot is required to be at a step for at least this many seconds in order to be eligible to move_type to COMP. The default value is 60 seconds. There are other factors required to be COMP but any lot that spends less than this many seconds at the step will never have the move_type of COMP. Instead it will be ISKIP unless the route or qty changes.

STEP_SEC_TO_EOL

NUMBER(11)

Total Step sec to the end of line

STOCKER

VARCHAR2(16)

Stocker is effectively similar to a rack except that it stores carriers internally and has input and output ports.

STOCKER_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(32)

Optional column to show a user friendly station name on the NextMove GUI which is different that the station name on the barcode.

SUBTOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

A subtool is an entity in the MES to which events can be logged that is between TOOL and CHAMBER. Subtool is rarely used. One example is when a chamber is part of a side which is part of a main tool and it is possible to log the side down which means you cannot use any chambers on that side. The side would be a subtool.

SYSMNTR_ERROR_INTERVAL_MINS

NUMBER(3)

SYSMNTR_ERRORS sends emails about all recent R errors (errors during run that are not failures). We want to ensure that all R errors get included in one but only one email so we want to look back since the last email check with an overlap of a couple minutes.

SYS_TIME

TIMESTAMP(6)

This is always SYSTIMESTAMP when the record was inserted in the MSO_MES_INTERACTION_HIST table.

TABLESPACE_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Tablespace to configure the SysMonitor alert limits.

TABLE_NUM_ROW_DEFAULT

NUMBER

This is the maximum number of columns to show when the page is initially generated prior to clicking on the "More" link.  When counting rows, this includes the zero columns which are later hidden ordered by the sort order.  For example, we have 16 records with non-zero values plus 8 more records which have zeroes across the board.  Also the default_sort_column_id is set to ITEM to sort alphabetically so the non-zero and zero records are mixed when ordered. If we set this value to 20 then we will take the top 20 records alphabetically so the last four are out. Then of those 20 we take only the non-zero records so we will show as few as 12 records in the end. This initially might be confusing because we see 12 of the 16 non-zero records when this value is set to 20 but this is actually correct. To see all non-zero records initially, make sure to set this value to a number which is greater than the total number of records.

TABLE_RENAME_PRIMARY_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Indicates the table rename value for the ADM_MSO_UTILITIES package when replaying history. This is necessary for history tables that need to be renamed in order to replay data and not modify the existing history tables.

TAG_CONDITION_ID

NUMBER(9)

Unique tag condition identification number.

TAG_CONDITION_NAME

VARCHAR2(64)

Unique name identifying the external tag condition.

TAG_CONDITION_TYPE

VARCHAR2(32)

Define if the tag condition is either "ALLOWED", "ALWAYS", or "NEVER". ALLOWED: If all the conditions defined for the associated rule and lot at the FROM_MSO_PROCESS are true, then the lot can be tagged to measure at the TO_MSO_PROCESS. ALWAYS: If all the conditions defined for the associated rule and lot at the FROM_MSO_PROCESS are true, then the lot will ALWAYS be tagged to measure at the TO_MSO_PROCESS. NEVER: If all the conditions defined for the associated rule and lot at the FROM_MSO_PROCESS are true, then the lot can NEVER be tagged to measure at the TO_MSO_PROCESS. In all cases the counter value will still increment.

TAG_PARM_NAME

VARCHAR2(50)

Name of the parameter to be set in the MES. This is sent to the on track-in of the FROM_MSO_PROCESS defined, or TO_MSO_PROCESS if the from is set to NA.

TAG_PARM_VALUE

VARCHAR2(50)

Value of the parameter to be set in the MES. This is sent to the on track-in of the FROM_MSO_PROCESS defined, or TO_MSO_PROCESS if the from is set to NA.

TARGET_CARRIER

VARCHAR2(32)

This is the carrier that the future start lots planned to be assigned.

TARGET_CT_DAYS

NUMBER(5,1)

Number of days of cycle time targeted for the prd or bank. This target is only published internally which often means it is not even published to corporate planning. This should be less than or equal to the commit.

TARGET_WIP_MULTIPLIER

NUMBER(4,2)

Multiplier applied to the auto-calculated target WIP quantity to determine the effective WIP quantitiy. For example, if target WIP quantity is 100 and the multiplier is 1.5, then the effective target WIP quantitiy will be 150. Used to increase or decrease WIP buffer levels from normal level

TCT_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Theoretical cycle time in seconds

TECHNICAL_DETAILS

VARCHAR2(1000)

Technical description of how ETP works to cause an entity to enter this L6 state.

TEMP_RANK

VARCHAR2(1)

Temporary rank should only be set manually by a human user, never loaded automatically by ETL. Possible values are in FPSADMIN.RTG_PERM_RANKS.

TEMP_RANK_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(256)

Optional comment entered by user or system who last updated temporary rank

TEMP_RANK_EXPIRE_INST

DATE

Optional column allows user to specify when the temporary rank expires. After this time we will use the permanent rank.

TEMP_RANK_UPDATED_INST

DATE

Datetime populated by trigger when external rank was last updated

TEMP_RANK_USER

VARCHAR2(64)

User or system who last updated temporary rank

THPT_WEEKS_TO_SHOW

NUMBER(2)

The number of previous weeks to show on the Throughput Tracker weekly history charts. Even though we might only use 4 or 8 weeks to calculate the automatic values, we almost certainly want to show more weeks like 13 on the chart.

THP_CUTOFF_INST

DATE

This column should be set after we make a significant fix to logic or configuration for a particular eqp_type that impacts the throughput calculations. When this value is set and we have at least one week of good data after this time then we will only count weeks after this time as valid for our throughput calculations in THP_EQPTYPE_AUTO or THP_TOOL_AUTO. Without this capability, the throughput would be wrong for up to four more weeks and now we could see improvements as soon as the next week.

THP_IGNORE_LESS_THAN_JOB_QTY

NUMBER(6)

If qty_in_job is less than this value then we will set thp_ignore_reason to QTY and therefore ignore this job for our throughput calculations.

THP_WINDOW_WEEKS

NUMBER(3)

Number of weeks used by our throughput calculations to determine the current estimates. Unlike cycle time which includes the current week-to-date, throughput only uses full weeks. Our default for this is 4 weeks. A longer window would give more stable data but would also take longer to reflect a significant shift in the throughput.

THREAD_GROUP

VARCHAR2(20)

This is an optional field for thread grouping. If populated then all possible tools will be the thread_tool. If not then it will be the tool where the lot ran on at the start thread step.

THREAD_TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

Tool that the lot will be forced to run on at the future thread step if the tool processes the lot at the start step

TIMEOUT_SEC

NUMBER(4)

This column is required with the status_tool (ST) method which calls the APF dispatcher but only works with this method. Status_tool allows a -timeout parameter as one of the inputs and we will pass that if specified here.

TIMER_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(48)

This column can be displyed on the Dashboard for the lot popup and lot search pages and is a shorter display field than the queue timer.

TIMER_END_EVENT

VARCHAR2(12)

The WIP event type which ends the queue timer at the end step. Prior to Scheduler version 1.18.1, the only choice is BEGIN so all timers will end when the lot starts processing at the end step. For 1.18.1+, DISPATCH, BEGIN, END, and COMP are all available options. Please note that scheduling timers that end on COMP and END events is much more difficult, as many factors can introduce significant variability to the processing time of a lot. DISPATCH and BEGIN are the preferred event types to use here.

TIMER_EXPIRE_PREFER_TOOL_HRS

NUMBER(5,1)

When selecting the best tool at a timer end step, the scheduler will prefer a tool that beats the timer expiration by at least this many hours over tools that have later start times. This takes precedence over the tool scores.

TIMER_HURRY_IN_HOURS

NUMBER(5,1)

is used to determine when x hours left on the timer, the scheduler should start to prioritize the lot

TIMER_HURRY_IN_PCT

NUMBER(3)

is used to determine when x % left on the timer, the scheduler should start to prioritize the lot

TIMER_ID

NUMBER(9)

Unique number representing the queue timer to index with other tables. Automatically populated with RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS_ID_SEQ sequence.

TIMER_ID_END_STEP

NUMBER(9)

This indicates that this step is in the middle of a queue timer. Inner join with RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS using timer_id as there is no foreign key because the timer_id record might get deleted from RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS.

TIMER_ID_MID_STEP

NUMBER(9)

This indicates that this step is the end of a queue timer. Inner join with RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS using timer_id as there is no foreign key because the timer_id record might get deleted from RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS.

TIMER_ID_START_STEP

NUMBER(9)

This indicates that this step is the start of a queue timer. Inner join with RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS using timer_id as there is no foreign key because the timer_id record might get deleted from RTG_QUEUE_TIMERS.

TIMER_PRTY_XFACTOR

NUMBER(2,1)

This allows us to give a curr_priority value to lots in a queue timer if the X-Factor required to finish the timer before it expires is less than this threshold. For example, QUEUE2X priority is configured to have a threshold of 2x processing time and QUEUE3X priority is configured at 3x. We have a lot which is 3 steps from the end of the queue timer and those three steps have 1, 2, and 2 hours of processing time, respectively. The queue timer will expire in 20 hours but all timers end when the lot begins processing at the end step. In order to calculate our X-Factor we need to add the 3 hours processing at the end step. So we get (10 + 2) / (1 + 2 + 2) = 12 / 5 = 2.4. This X-Factor of 2.4 is not less than the threshold for QUEUE2X so it does not get that highest priority but it is less than the threshold for QUEUE3X so it gets that priority. This priority of QUEUE3X is fed to the Dashboard for display and to the Scheduler for calculation and is used by all components of the DWH.

TIMER_START_EVENT

VARCHAR2(12)

The WIP event type which starts the queue timer at the start step. The default and preferred choice is END since most timers should start when the lot ends processing at the start step but other choices are DISPATCH, BEGIN, and COMP. These four choices are a subset of list in WIP_EVENT_TYPES. This column would be more accurately named TIMER_START_EVENT_TYPE but this is in use everywhere and changing ETL makes upgrades significantly more difficult so we are leaving this slightly confusing column name.

TIMER_TIME_SCHED_PCT

NUMBER(3)

is used to determine how conservative the timer should be in schedulder

TIME_PERIOD

VARCHAR2(32)

the period (cycle) for each period. can be work_week, work_day, work_shift

TIME_TO_NEXT_MOVE_OVR

DATE

This column allows for sites to control the NextMove countdown timers. Normally we do not populate this but for certain use cases clients may want to change this value based on certain criteria.

TIME_ZONE_OF_MES_DATA

VARCHAR2(30)

This column should be null as long as the data from the MES is in the same time zone as the facility in which the people are using the applications. But if the MES data is loaded from a different time zone (ex: UTC for daylight savings time support) then this value should be set to the time zone of the MES data and the TIME_ZONE_OF_WEB_VIEWER should be set to the time zone of the facility where the users are viewing the data. It is important to note that both time zone fields must either be null (which will then apply the dbtimezone of the database server) or all must be not null and specified based on the appropriate time zone for each field. Time zones are listed at https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E84527_01/wcs/tag-ref/MISC/TimeZones.html.

TIME_ZONE_OF_WEB_VIEWER

VARCHAR2(30)

See column comment on TIME_ZONE_FOR_MES_DATA for details.

TOOL

VARCHAR2(16)

Tool is generally just the main tool. The exception is when different entities on the tool run completely independently and it is physically impossible to run wafers of the same lot across multiple entities. In this exception case, we may want to assign the entities to different eqp_types and therefore we should define each entity as a tool. Please note that when we do this there is no indication whatsoever that these different entities are on the same tool.

TOOL_BALANCE_RATIO

NUMBER

This is the ratio assigned to the tool by fpsbase.rtg_step_tool_balance_ratios

TOOL_DOWNTIME_FROM_INST

DATE

Time when the entire tool was logged into either the SDT or UDT state (continuous downtime). This is null if this episode does not correspond to a tool-level downtime.

TOOL_DOWNTIME_FROM_OR_TO

VARCHAR2(6)

Indicates that current status is beginning (FROM) or end (TO) of a tool-level CDT episode. (Continuous downtime is any contiguous set of UDT or SDT episodes.)

TOOL_DOWNTIME_TO_INST

DATE

Time when the entire tool was logged out of continuous downtime into a state other than SDT or UDT. This is null if this episode does not correspond to a tool-level downtime.

TOOL_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(16)

Define what tools will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables. Note this value can and TOOL_MSO_GROUP_EACH_NA can not both be NA when setting up an EVENT type rule.

TOOL_FAILURE_FROM_INST

DATE

Time when the entire tool was logged into the UDT state. This is null if this episode does not correspond to a tool-level failure.

TOOL_FAILURE_FROM_OR_TO

VARCHAR2(6)

Indicates that current status is beginning (FROM) or end (TO) of a tool-level UDT/failure episode.

TOOL_FAILURE_TO_INST

DATE

Time when the entire tool was logged out of the UDT state. This is null if this episode does not correspond to a tool-level failure.

TOOL_FOR_TTS

VARCHAR2(16)

TTS for tool is greatest(last start plus EET of last start, data_date). TTS for first lot not started is the same as the TTS for tool but we need to store TTS for tool because tool might not have any reserved lots. TTS for subsequent lots cums the EET of each lot after the first lot.

TOOL_IDLE_SCORE_JOBS

NUMBER(4)

To get a score for the Tool Idle Time rule, the lot must be one of the first jobs (ordered by start time) scheduled to the tool.

TOOL_IDLE_SCORE_SEC

NUMBER(6)

To get a score for the Tool Idle Time rule, the lot must be scheduled to begin processing within this time window from the start of the scheduler run

TOOL_IMBALANCE_TOLERANCE_PCT

NUMBER(3)

Tolerance percentage for imbalance. For example if you have 47% of the WIP that started on TOOL_01 and 53% on TOOL_02 then and the imbalance tolerace set to 10% we would consider these two tools to have balanced WIP.

TOOL_MFG_PCT_ALL_TYPE_NONMFG

NUMBER(7,4)

This column indicates tool mfg_pct if all chambers of the ch_type are NONMFG. It works in combination with ch_type, mfg_pct_per_ch, and subtool to allow us to calculate tool_pct for what we currently believe are all cases of chamber combinations. The common example here is a Litho cell which can still run in track-only mode if stepper is NONMFG but cannot run anything if track is NONMFG. Our default is to take the minimum mfg_pct of each type which would result is 0% for the tool if stepper was NONMFG. This column overrides that so if we set it to 60 for the stepper then we would consider the tool 60% even though only the track was MFG. Technically we would assign a tool_pct of 60 to the MFG track and then the remaining 40% to the NONMFG stepper. Another use for this column is when we have an extra chamber of a different ch_type that has limited use, perhaps just for R+D. Here we would set tool_mfg_pct_all_type_nonmfg to 100% and essentially ignore the chamber when it is NONMFG. In this special case, we can also set mfg_pct_per_ch to 0 to completely ignore it in any state.

TOOL_MSO_GROUP

VARCHAR2(64)

TOOL_MSO_GROUP is the grouping of tools used for Metrology Sampling Optimizer. This grouping is used in the Sampling Dashboard and for assigning event based sampling rules for a tool group. This group is similar to process family but allows a tool grouping specific to the MSO.

TOOL_MSO_GROUP_EACH_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

Define what TOOL_MSO_GROUPS will be tracked in the MSO_RULE_COUNTER_HIST tables. Note this value can and TOOL_EACH_NA can not both be NA when setting up an EVENT type rule.

TOOL_MSO_GROUP_NA

VARCHAR2(64)

This is the counter definition value for tool mso group. If tool mso group is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the tool mso group value.

TOOL_MSO_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

TOOL_MSO_MODULE is the module responsible for the tool_mso_groups used for the Metrology Sampling Optimizer. The module is used for building the tool hierarchy for the Sampling Dashboard.

TOOL_NA

VARCHAR2(16)

This is the counter definition value for tool. If tool is not part of the rule definition and included in the counter then it will be NA, otherwise it will have the tool value.

TOOL_OWNER_NAME

VARCHAR2(64)

Name of the engineer who is responsible for the tools of this type

TOOL_SERVICE_FROM_INST

DATE

Time when the entire tool was logged into the SDT state. This is null if this episode does not correspond to a tool-level service.

TOOL_SERVICE_FROM_OR_TO

VARCHAR2(6)

Indicates that current status is beginning (FROM) or end (TO) of a tool-level SDT/service episode.

TOOL_SERVICE_TO_INST

DATE

Time when the entire tool was logged out of the SDT state. This is null if this episode does not correspond to a tool-level service.

TOOL_TYPE

VARCHAR2(50)

the tool type from the first lot that scheduled

TOP_LEFT_BADGE

VARCHAR2(20)

The badge to display on the top left of the tool icon.

TOP_RIGHT_BADGE

VARCHAR2(20)

The badge to display on the top right of the tool icon.

TOTAL_E_RELATED_SEC

NUMBER(9)

The total time during this episode that it was in a state flagged as being equipment related. This could be due to either UDT or SDT states.

TOTAL_STEP_SEC

NUMBER(38)

Total number of unit-seconds accumulated by lots on hold at this step during the period including lots which moved out during the period and lots which remain at the end of the period. For example, if a 25 wafer lot is on hold at the step for 2 hours then it accumulates 25 wafers * 7200 seconds = 180000 wafer-seconds of hold time.

TO_BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

Bay to move to.

TO_INST

DATE

Time to which this state was active.

TO_MSO_PROCESS

VARCHAR2(100)

The tag condition is only applies at a FROM_MSO_PROCESS that is linked to the specified MSO_PROCESS in this column. If the value is NULL then it applies to all proceses.

TO_MSO_PROCESS_NA

VARCHAR2(100)

Step that will be skipped or measured based on the lots that are tagged to measure or skip. Additionally lots completing this step will clear the counter for the corresponding sample rule.

TO_MSO_REQUIRES_SMP_RESULTS

CHAR(1)

If the site does not trust the BEGIN/COMP event type to be and indicator of measurement take for a lot. The MSO_RESULT_HIST table can be populated. If this flag is set to Y then MSO will validate that we have data in this table for the lot and to_mso_process within the time the lot arrived at the step and the time of the event. If there is data the measurement would be considered a valid measurement to clear the rule counters.

TO_RQD_SETUP

VARCHAR2(100)

Setup that will be change to. This should match a value in rqd_setup in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS.

TRANSITION_STATE

VARCHAR2(48)

We name this transition_state because ideally this state would be determine what states are allowed to follow but really this is just a grouping which is the parent of eqp_state and child of etp_group

TRANSIT_FROM

VARCHAR2(24)

to indicate where the durable is now/transit from

TRANSIT_START

DATE

to indicate when the transit should start

TRANSIT_TO

VARCHAR2(24)

to indicate where the durable is going to/transit to

TRANSPORT_MODE

VARCHAR2(10)

Name of the standard FPS transport mode which represents how material is moved from one location to another.

TTS_BAY

VARCHAR2(12)

Bay of the tool where this carrier is reserved or scheduled.

TURNS_TGT_FROM_COMP_WIP_GOALS

CHAR(1)

This flag indicates to use the automatic Dashboard calculations or use the existing target entries from the dash_w_targets_xx tables

TW_BAD_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Only applicable to TW lots. This is the number of test wafers in the lot which are considered BAD.

TW_GOOD_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Only applicable to TW lots. This is the number of test wafers in the lot which are considered GOOD.

TW_RECYCLE_COUNT

NUMBER(4)

Only applicable to TW lots. This is the number of times the test wafers have been reused

TW_TOTAL_MAX_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Applicable to TW routes only. This is the maximum quantity of test wafers on this route which should be available for use OR in the process of being built.

TW_TOTAL_MIN_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Applicable to TW routes only. This is the minimum quantity of test wafers on this route which should be available for use OR in the process of being built.

TW_USE_MAX_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Applicable to TW routes only. This is the maximum quantity of test wafers on this route which should be available for use.

TW_USE_MIN_QTY

NUMBER(7)

Applicable to TW routes only. This is the minimum quantity of test wafers on this route which should be available for use.

TW_USE_MODULE

VARCHAR2(12)

Applicable to TW routes only. This is the module that owns the use of the test wafer for process characterization.

TW_USE_PURPOSE

VARCHAR2(16)

Brief definition of the use of test wafers at this step (ex: Etch Rate or Nitride Dum).

UNBLOCK_AFTER_ABORT

CHAR(1)

After a lot aborts processing it has the process state BLOCK and cannot be scheduled. This allows the operator to put on hold or send to rework or otherwise take the appropriate action. Normally this lasts for the period specified in wait_sec_to_sch_after_abort in GEN_FACILITIES. But at many sites if a lot arrives back in a stocker or on certain storage racks then it should no longer be blocked. This flag enables this behavior. It is set for each stocker or rack but most likely will be set to Y for all stockers and/or all input racks if this behavior is desired at the site. Any lot at a location with this flag set to Y will no longer be blocked after abort. Instead it will have process state of WAIT and will be available to schedule on any tool.

UNIT_INT_SEC_TO_EOL

NUMBER(11)

The idea here is that a 1 wafer lot will progress a bit faster than a 25 wafer lot because it will save 24 wafer intervals at each step where wafers are processed individually. This column stores the number of seconds we expect to save for each wafer until the end of the line. In WIP_FLUSH we simply add or subtract this time based on whether the qty was higher or lower than the default in GEN_FACILITIES. We do not include lots which have been split in this adjustment since we expect they will be merged. For example, the CT to EOL is 30 days using our default of 20 wafers and this unit_int_sec_to_eol is 0.4 days. A lot with 19 wafers would get a revised estimate of 29.6. A lot with 18 wafers would get 29.2 and so on down to a lot with a single wafer at 22.4 days. On the other hand, our default can be less than the max so a lot with 21 wafers would get a revised estimate of 30.4 and so on up to a 25 wafer lot at 32 days.

UNIT_TYPE

VARCHAR2(12)

the unit type for this process max usages. only allow job, wafer, lot, second

UNLOAD_SEC

NUMBER(4)

Seconds after the end is logged until the lot is available to be unloaded. This will often be 0. Unload_sec is added to the first_wafer_sec in throughput calculations.

UPDATED_INST

DATE

Time when the record was updated according to the source data. Note this is not the time when the record was actually updated in this table - it will almost always be earlier.

UPDATE_HOLD_NOTE_W_NEW_COMMENT

CHAR(1)

This flag applies if a lot goes on hold by event E1 with event_comment C1 and then another event is logged in WIP_EVENT_HIST for the lot which does not change the hold status with event_comment C2. By default, the hold_note is the comment from the event that put the lot on hold which is C1. But if you want it to be C2 then set this flag to Y. The hold_note will always be C2 if C1 is blank and it will always be C1 if C2 is blank.

UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_BEGIN

CHAR(1)

See comments for UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_LOAD_UNLD.

UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_BEGIN_M

CHAR(1)

See comments for UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_LOAD_UNLD.

UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_END_M_COMP

CHAR(1)

See comments for UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_LOAD_UNLD.

UPDATE_LOC_AFT_WEH_LOAD_UNLD

CHAR(1)

These four flags are used by WIP_EVENT_HIST_INSERT_BEF trigger to decide whether or not to update the location in MHS_CARRIERS to the tool when a LOAD/BEGIN/BEGIN_M event is logged or to null when an END_M/COMP/UNLOAD event is logged. At some sites this causes a mutation because we use MHS_CARRIERS in the ETL to get WIP_EVENT_HIST.

UPDATE_PRD_TO_SBY_IF_NO_BEG

CHAR(1)

In our ETP logic, when a job begins, we guess what chambers will be used and set ch_proc_state to PRD-JOBBEG. Then when a chamber logs a BEGIN during the job we set that ch_proc_state to PRD-CHBEG and any other chambers which are still in PRD-JOBBEG to PRD-OTHBEG. Then when the job ends, we know that any chambers in PRD-OTHBEG were not used and we set them to SBY for the duration of the just completed job. But before we do this, we must check this flag. For a typical chamber tool this logic makes sense so the flag should be set to Y. But some examples of chambers where this does not make sense are chambers that are required for any processing or remain in a PRD state continuously or do not log chamber events. One example case where we do not want to make updates is for the track on a Litho cell where the track is continuously PRD but the stepper changes from SBY to PRD when starting each lot. If we did not check the flag then this logic would see that for this lot only the stepper logged a PRD event and we would assume that only the stepper was used which is wrong. So we set this flag to N for the track and keep it PRD.

UPH

NUMBER(9,3)

UPH is a commonly used abbreviation which stands for units per hour. It is often referred to as WPH which for wafers per hour but UPH is better because the unit is not always wafer.

URL

VARCHAR2(2000)

The URL of the report link

USAGE_PER_UNIT

NUMBER(11

the usage to run one unit

USERNAME

VARCHAR2(64)

Field that uniquely identifies a user.

USERNAME_MANL

VARCHAR2(64)

Username who set the interval and first unit values.

USERNAME_OR_ANY

VARCHAR2(64)

USERNAME from v$session or the word ANY which signifies any USERNAME.

USER_ID

VARCHAR2(50)

The user Id that initiated the last move of this carrier

USE_7D_FOR_DASH_ETP_HIST

CHAR(1)

At most sites it is reasonably fast to query ETP_HIST with a filter on eqp_to_inst or etp_to_inst depending on the use_etp_for_web flag. Using ETP_HIST allows us to go back to any time range in the past, at least any time range that has not been purged from the ETP_HIST table. But at some of our largest sites querying ETP_HIST even for one day is quite slow. This flag gives the option to use DASH_B_H_ETP_HIST_7D which is a smaller copy of ETP_HIST that not only has a shorter history but eliminates rows where from_inst and to_inst are the same second which can be a significant number especially if using EQP rather than ETP.

USE_AUTO_EXTL_RSRV

CHAR(1)

If this flag is Y then the NMV_AUTO_EXTL_RESERVATIONS procedure will reserve lots to the best available allowed tool for NextMove demo purposes.

USE_BALANCE_WINDOW_LIMIT

CHAR(1)

Flag to specify if you want to use the start to end step window limit.

USE_CH_PRD_SBY_EVENTS_FOR_ETP

CHAR(1)

The default behavior for ETP is to set the chamber productive state during a job based on BEGIN and END events in WIP_WAFER_HIST. However on some chambers these events are not available so can set this flag to use PRD and SBY events from EQP_EVENT_HIST instead.

USE_COMING_HOLD_WIP_IN_BNS

CHAR(1)

Column controls if HOLD wip not at the current operation will be included in the BNS.

USE_COMMA_AS_DECIMAL_POINT

CHAR(1)

Our default number display format is the US standard of period for decimal point and comma for thousands separation like 12,345.67 but setting this flag to Y swaps these like 12.345,67 which is common in Europe.

USE_COUNT_AS_OPER_MOVE_FLAG

CHAR(1)

Normally we count an oper move when the lot moves from one operation to another (along with plenty of other configuration options). If we use this flag instead then we count any move from a step where count_as_oper_move is Y and ignore the operation.

USE_CTM_BEF_EST_FOR_RELEASE

CHAR(1)

We calculate the estimated_hold_sec for each process_family, hold_type, lot_group in WIP_HOLD_ESTIMATES. We calculate the hold_sec_comp_for_wsf by prd, route, step, and lot_group in CTM_SUMMARY. This flag determine which value is preferred as our default value for estimated hold seconds. At most sites this is N so we use WIP_HOLD_ESTIMATES. If set to Y then we use CTM_SUMMARY. The values for remaining hold seconds are half of the estimated values. Either way, the default values can be overridden by ovr_estimated_hold_sec and ovr_remaining_hold_sec in WIP_HOLD_TYPES or more specifically by ovr_release_inst in WIP_LOTS_VERIFY. Please see the column comment on ovr_remaining_hold_sec for an example of how estimated and remaining are used to calculate the estimated release inst of all lots currently on hold.

USE_CURR_HOLD_WIP_IN_BNS

CHAR(1)

Column controls if HOLD wip at the current operation will be included in the BNS.

USE_DAILY_INPUT_LIMIT

CHAR(1)

Maximum amount of WIP to commit to any tool in a day at the Start Step

USE_DATA_DATE_AS_CURR_DATE

CHAR(1)

This is for our live demo databases where the data is actively loading but for a time that is way in the past. In this case we just want curr_date to always be one second after data_date.

USE_DRUM_DATA_FOR_GOALS

CHAR(1)

Flag indicating whether to use drum target completes and score data in shift and plan day goals for display on the Dashboard and elsewhere. A value of Y will cause us to ignore what is defined in FPSINPUT for Completes and Moves targets. Note that this does not take into account the DRUM_GROUPING, the route_step value is always used.

USE_DUR_FAM_AS_SUBFAMILY

CHAR(1)

Using durable family is the third of three ways to set process_subfamily. If set to Y then the durable_family from RTG_DURABLE_ASSIGNMENTS will be the process_subfamily as long as ovr_process_subfamily is not populated.

USE_EQP_CH_RECIPE

CHAR(1)

This flag is currently not used. Its purpose is to indicate whether tools in this eqp type will update the curr_recipe column for the chamber in ETP_STATUS table with the actual_machine_recipe after each wafer-chamber begin event in WIP_WAFER_HIST. If this functionality is needed then we can address.

USE_EST_MACH_RCP_AS_RQD_SETUP

CHAR(1)

For some eqp types we just want to calculate setup penalty based on est_machine_recipe and setting this flag does this for the entire eqp type without having to actually set the ovr_rqd_setup field for each record in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS.

USE_ETP_FOR_WEB

CHAR(1)

Flag to display FPS ETP states on dashboard instead of client standard EQP states.

USE_FOR_FIRST_LAST_WFR

CHAR(1)

This flag determines whether wafer events logged to the chamber should be considered for the first/last wafer begin/end columns which are calculated in WIP_LOTS_REALTIME and then saved to WIP_STEP_HIST upon completion of the step and then used in THP calculations. An example where this is set to Y for all chambers is a parallel chamber tool with all chambers of the same type where each wafer of the job goes to a different chamber. In this case we want the first_wafer_end_inst to be the first wafer end on any chamber. An example where this is set to N would be the stepper on a typical Litho cell where we want the first_wafer_end_inst to be the first wafer end on the track. If we mistakenly set this to Y for both the stepper and track then the first_wafer_end_inst would be the first wafer end on the stepper and the last_wafer_end_inst would be the last wafer end on the track and our average wafer interval would be way too long.

USE_LOAD_PORT_FULL_PCT_FOR_ETP

CHAR(1)

If set to Y this tells our ETP logic to set the tool_prd_pct to the greatest of the ch_prd_pct and the load_port_full_pct. This only applies to tools with at least 2 chambers and at least 2 ports. The ch_prd_pct is our current logic based on the number of productive chambers and their chamber types. The new calculation for load_port_full_pct is simply the percentage of load ports occupied by lots that are processing. Our first example is a tool that has 4 chambers and 2 load ports. We would normally run lots through all chambers but instead we run two lots that are single chamber processes. So lot L1 is processing on CHA and lot L2 is processing on CHB and CHC and CHD are sitting idle. Tool_prd_pct is 50% so our previous logic (which is unchanged if use_load_port_full_pct_for_etp is set to N) reports this tool as 50% PRD and 50% SBY using the logic that only 2 of the 4 chambers are processing. With the new logic, load_port_full_pct is 100% which means that if use_load_port_full_pct_for_etp is set to Y that we will report this tool as 100% PRD using the logic that both load locks are occupied so the operator has no possibility to improve the productivity of the tool. A second example is the same tool with only one load lock occupied. This lot is processing only on CHA which is PRD so CHB+C+D are SBY. Tool_prd_pct is 25% and load_port_full_pct is 50%. If use_load_port_full_pct_for_etp is N then the tool is 25% PRD 75% SBY . If Y then it is 50% PRD 50% SBY.

USE_LOT_COMP_OVR

CHAR(1)

Flag to indicate whether lot process completion requires is_complete to be set to Y in fpsinput.wip_lots_ovr_est_end_inst for a specific tool.

USE_LOT_GOALS_FOR_WEB

CHAR(1)

Flag to display FPS Goal Planner goals in WIP_GOAL_LOT tables on dashboard instead of default WIP_GOAL_EST tables.

USE_LOT_GROUP_IN_CTM_FILLIN_G1

CHAR(1)

See comments on USE_ROUTE_FAM_IN_CTM_FILLIN_G1 column.

USE_MAIN_FOR_EQP_STATE

CHAR(1)

Flag to use only client mainframe state for EQP state on chamber tools instead of MPCT value calculated using the chamber states, when available. Some clients have already developed more detailed tool states that reflect the tool as they would like it to be represented.

USE_MAX_QTY_ANY_CARR_FOR_THP

CHAR(1)

Some tools like Mattson Ashers process lots two at a time in parallel but wafer by wafer. For these tools, processing time estimates for the batch is based on the maximum number of wafers in any carrier in the batch. For example, batches consisting of two 25 wafer lots or a 25 wafer lot and a 22 wafer lot or a 25 wafer lot and a 1 wafer lot would all have the same throughput estimate which is based on 25 wafers as the maximum qty in any carrier.

USE_MPCT_STATE_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

Flag to determine if Scheduler should use mpct state when determining UI color for main entities when ETP is enabled. When set to Y, the MPCT state will be used. When set to N, the ETP state will be used. When ETP is not enabled, this flag is not used.

USE_MSO_DECISION_OVR

CHAR(1)

Flag is used to control if the final mes decision changes the counter for rules that we are writing to the MES. If we tag a lot, but the lot skips metrology, then we will update the counter to count the lot as a skip. You do not want this flag on if you are doing development and dont want the mes decisions to override and see normal behavior of the rules.

USE_M_EVENTS_TO_CHOOSE_TOOL

CHAR(1)

When multiple tools log events at a step, we need to choose which one to count as the tool. This is a critical decision because we use this tool field in WIP_STEP_HIST when we count tool completes and in our logic to determine the process family. Our default is to choose the tool which automatically logged BEGIN and END events first then to choose the tool which manually logged BEGIN_M and END_M events only if no other tool automatically logged BEGIN and END. However at some sites the manual events come from the MES and the automatic events come from a less reliable tool log so when this flag is Y then we choose the tool with manual events. Finally it is worth noting that COMP events are not included here even though they are really a version of an END_M event but this should never cause any trouble because the BEGIN_M event will correctly choose the tool. So in the remote scenario where the MES does not log a BEGIN_M then automation logs BEGIN and/or END to the wrong tool and then MES moves out the lot with a COMP event to the correct tool, we will choose the wrong tool - and we accept this.

USE_NEXT_STEP_LOC_ON_LINK_STEP

CHAR(1)

to indicate if it needs to use the location from the next step as primary location for the current step, for the link step

USE_NEXT_STEP_LOC_ON_TIMER

CHAR(1)

to indicate if it needs to use the location from the next step as primary location for the current step, for the timer lot

USE_ONLY_TRUSTED_FOR_THP_AVG

CHAR(1)

By default, the Auto MPU for each eqp_type shown on our Throughput Tracker is the weighted average of the automated calculated MPU for all processes. But the Auto-Trusted Delta compares the weighted average of the auto MPU only for processes where a trusted value is defined. Therefore if only selected processes have trusted values, we will show something confusing like Auto 7, Trusted 5, A-T Delta 1. If this flag is set then we will show the weighted average only for processes where a trusted value is defined to match the A-T Delta calculation. Then we will show Auto 6, Trusted 5, A-T Delta 1.

USE_OTHER_FACILITY_LOGIC

CHAR(1)

Our other facility logic is based on the other_facility column in RTG_ROUTE_STEPS. A few features of this logic, particularly regarding WIP_STEP_FUTURE, add some overhead to our triggers that we want to skip at sites where we are not sharing facilities.

USE_PROCESS_AS_RQD_SETUP

CHAR(1)

For some eqp types we just want to calculate setup penalty based on process and setting this flag does this for the entire eqp type without having to actually set the ovr_rqd_setup field for each record in RTG_TOOL_ASSIGNMENTS.

USE_ROUTE_FAM_IN_CTM_FILLIN_G1

CHAR(1)

By default, we use route family and lot group in group 1 of our CTM_SUMMARY fill-in logic along with common step. Group 1 is only for est_smp_pct not for cycle time! At some sites, we only want to use common step so we set both of the use_xxx_in_ctm_fillin_g1 columns to N. They are independent so we could also set one or the other.

USE_RT_SECT_FOR_RT_SEG_SORT

CHAR(1)

The default setting of Y for this flag uses route_section_sort from RTG_ROUTE_STEPS to determine the route_segment_sort. Some sites configure their route sections in an unusual way for line balance and at these sites we can set this flag to N to use common_step sort logic instead.

USE_SETUP_CHG_AUTO_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

If USE_SETUP_CHG_MANUAL_FOR_SCH and USE_SETUP_CHG_MANUAL_FOR_SCH are both set to Y then we use both manual and auto values from EQP_SETUP_CHG_FINAL. If both columns are set to N then we use the default value for all setup costs and setup seconds. If manual is Y and auto is N then we use manual values but not auto values. It is not allowed to set manual to N and auto to Y.

USE_SETUP_CHG_MANUAL_FOR_SCH

CHAR(1)

See comments on USE_SETUP_CHG_AUTO_FOR_SCH for details on this column.

USE_SETUP_INST_AS_START

CHAR(1)

When this is set to Y and sched_setup_start is populated and at least two seconds before sched_start then we will use sched_setup_start as the est_beg_inst for Dashboard and NextMove.

USE_STEP_IN_CTM_FILLIN_G1

CHAR(1)

Almost all sites define common_step as a grouping of identical or similar steps within a route or across routes. Thus this flag should be N which is the default. Some clients define common_step differently, grouping radically different process steps together. In these rare cases, this flag may be set to Y which will enable use of step in the fillin g1 CTM logic instead of common_step.

USE_TOOL_BALANCE_CALC

CHAR(1)

Flag to specify if you want to use the start step tool balance. This will attempt to balance the start step tool WIP evenly with all tools that can run that step.

USE_TOOL_PRD_SBY_EVENT_FOR_ETP

CHAR(1)

This rarely used flag is for tools that log PRD and SBY states but do not log any lot events, not even track in/out. For these tools, we set the ETP state to PRD-CHBEG when the eqp state changes to PRD and we set the ETP state to SBY-MAIN when the eqp state changes to SBY. We cannot simply set the etp_state to the eqp_state because the PRD/SBY eqp_state values are not valid etp_state values so we use PRD-CHBEG and SBY-MAIN as the most generic etp_state values available.

USE_UPDATED_FOR_CHK_DATA_DATE

CHAR(1)

For some sites on weekends and at night, it is reasonable to not have any WIP events logged so this allows us to check the last_success_time of WIP_EVENT_HIST rather than data_date which is the last event.

USE_WFR_EVENTS_FOR_THP

CHAR(1)

This flag determines whether wafer events should be considered for THP calculations for this eqp type. The default value is Y, meaning that they should be considered, but on tools where we find that the wafer events are inconsistent then we can set to N to ignore wafer events and only use lot events in THP calculations.

VARIATION_FACTOR

NUMBER(4,1)

The variation factor to be used in the queueing model calculation to determine target cycle time and WIP for line balance.

VEHICLE

VARCHAR2(24)

Field that uniquely identifies a vehicle.

VEHICLE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(32)

Optional column to show a user friendly vehicle name on the NextMove GUI which is different that the vehicle name on the barcode.

VEHICLE_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(36)

A route that vehicles (carts) can take to pick up and drop off carriers around the site.

VEHICLE_STATE

VARCHAR2(36)

The state of the vehicle, which is typically used for determining whether it can be used or not.

VEHICLE_STATE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(128)

The name of the vehicle state displayed on all dashboards and reports. Vehicle_state must match the FPS list defined in MHS_VEHICLE_STATES but this display field might be formatted in a more familiar way to the users.

VEHICLE_SUB_ROUTE

VARCHAR2(36)

Sub route associated to a cart or carts within a vehicle route.

VERIFIED_BY

VARCHAR2(64)

Person who verified the setup change.

VERIFIED_COMMENT

VARCHAR2(128)

Optional field to enter comment about this setup change.

VERIFY_PARM1

VARCHAR2(128)

Nine user-defined fields which can store anything the user would like to track relating to the lot and its status. Often this is a value needed for tool assignments ETL like a rework parameter. These columns will have the capability to be displayed in the Dashboard lot search and lot popup tables if configured in DASH_C_CATEGORY_TABLE_COLS.

VERIFY_PARM2

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VERIFY_PARM3

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VERIFY_PARM4

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VERIFY_PARM5

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VERIFY_PARM6

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VERIFY_PARM7

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VERIFY_PARM8

VARCHAR2(128)

See VERIFY_PARM1.

VIEW_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

The name of the view uses for this check which starts with SYSMNTR_P_CHK.

WAFER

VARCHAR2(32)

Field that uniquely identifies a wafer.

WAFERS_AT_RISK_AVG_LOWER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have an average wafers at risk under the lower limit value. The wafers at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

WAFERS_AT_RISK_AVG_UPPER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have an average wafers at risk under the upper limit value. The wafers at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

WAFERS_AT_RISK_MAX_LOWER_LIMIT

NUMBER(8)

Tool level limit that is used to highlight in the dashboard how many tools have a max wafers at risk under the lower limit value. The wafers at risk is a increments each time a lot runs at the main process tool until a measurement triggers the counter to reset.

WAFERS_PER_DISC

NUMBER(2)

This number is specifically used to calculate throughput on tools that run per disc rather than per unit or per batch. It is most commonly set to 13 or 17 for Implant tools. It must be set along with CAN_MULTIPLE_LOTS_SHARE_DISC.

WAFER_SIZE

VARCHAR2(8)

If the facility only has one wafer size then this column should be null in both RTG_PRDS and EQP_TYPES. If the facility has more than one wafer size then a value of null in EQP_TYPES means that those tools can run all wafer sizes. See column IS_ANY_WAFER_SIZE for details.

WAFER_SIZE_DISPLAY

VARCHAR2(16)

The name of the wafer_size displayed on all dashboards and reports. We allow a longer more descriptive name here although often this will be the same as the wafer_size.

WAIT_FOR_LARGER_BATCH

CHAR(1)

This flag determines if the scheduler should always wait for an eligible larger batch for tools under this process group

WAIT_SEC_DSKIP_FULL_WAVG

NUMBER(7)

DSKIP is delayed skip. These are lots which wait at the step for longer than 60 seconds but do not process on a tool. For example, at a metrology step where a newer lot arrives and the older lot is moved out without being measured. All bank cycle time fits in the DSKIP columns.

WAIT_SEC_DTONLY_FULL_WAVG

NUMBER(7)

DTONLY is delta only which is when a lot changes qty but remains at the same step. This could be a scrap or split or merge. Since CTM is weighted by qty, it is critical that we have a separate record in WIP_STEP_HIST before and after a change in qty so each period of time can be weighted appropriately. The time during DTONLY is counted towards the total time but it is not counted as a move.

WAIT_SEC_TO_ALLOW_DOWN_RESERVE

NUMBER(6)

This column is part of the Area Scheduler configuration. Please see Area Scheduler documentation for details.

WAIT_SEC_TO_SCHED

NUMBER(7)

The lot may be scheduled but must not be allowed to dispatch or start until this number of seconds has elapsed.

WAIT_SEC_TO_SCHED_CARRIER

NUMBER(7)

If the carrier is not ready to reserve, we set this value and Scheduler will not reserve lots in this carrier. It will schedule them but no earlier than the wait_sec_to_sched value from the current time.

WAIT_SEC_TO_SCHED_CUSTOM

NUMBER(7)

Custom wait_sec_to_sched by lot-route-step to feed Scheduler. A value in this field will override all other wait_sec_to_sched values even if this value is lower or even 0.

WAIT_SEC_TO_SCHED_PRTY

NUMBER(7)

this is used to delay the schedule for the priority lots if it chooses delay_schedule as the wait_to_sched_method

WAIT_SEC_UPDATED_INST

DATE

Time which may be used to adjust wait_sec_to_sched, usually based on how long a timer was been stopped.

WAIT_TO_SCHED_REASON_CARRIER

VARCHAR2(256)

If the carrier is not ready to reserve, this is an explanation of why. This might be because of location or state or whatever reason.

WAIVER_ID

NUMBER(9)

Unique ID for waiver.

WALLET_PATH

VARCHAR2(256)

Path to the Oracle wallet for https calls, for example file:/ORACLE/wallet

WARN_LIMIT

NUMBER(12

The limit of the value where warnings will start being sent out in anticipation of an out-of-control condition.

WARN_SEC

NUMBER(7)

Seconds from the start event until warning limit for queue time restriction. Lots that remain in the timer sequence longer than this warning limit should be prioritized to prevent them from expiring.

WARN_SEC_IF_OVER_ONE_MIN

NUMBER(4)

Our default warning limit for CHK_SLOW is over one minute but many jobs, particularly those which are shiftly or daily or weekly, normally take longer. Once an acceptable time is established for a long running job enter about 25% higher here then the object will only appear in CHK_SLOW if it gets slower.

WEH_INSERT_LOAD_JOB

VARCHAR2(10)

Name of load job in CFG_SCHED which includes the object_name that loads the WIP_EVENT_HIST table.

WEH_INSERT_OBJECT_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

Object_name in CFG_SCHED which loads the WIP_EVENT_HIST table. Usually this will be simply WIP_EVENT_HIST but not always.

WEH_PRELOAD_LOAD_JOB

VARCHAR2(10)

See column comment for WEH_PRELOAD_OBJECT_NAME. This is the name of load job in CFG_SCHED which includes that object.

WEH_PRELOAD_OBJECT_NAME

VARCHAR2(30)

At some sites we have a preliminary job which loads data from MES into an intermediate table which is then loaded into WIP_EVENT_HIST. If applicable, this is the object_name in CFG_SCHED which does this.

WHY_ALERT_DISABLED

VARCHAR2(256)

Any value is this field will disable sending email alerts for this check but please write the reason why it is disabled even if this is temporary.

WHY_ARCHIVELOGMODE_NECESSARY

VARCHAR2(128)

FPS prefers that ARCHIVELOGMODE is turned off because our data warehouse generates large archive logs which are unnecessary so we warn in SYSMNTR_ERRORS if it is on. However some sites, particularly those where their DBAs administer many Oracle databases, require that ARCHIVELOGMODE is on so we need to hide this warning. Populating this column hides the warning and explains the situation at this site.

WHY_IGNORE_CH_TYPE_WARN

VARCHAR2(100)

Our throughput calculations are unhappy if two tools in the same eqp_type have different chamber types used for throughput. If you research this and find that this is really true that one tool really has different chamber types than another tool in the same eqp_type then these tools should not be in the same eqp_type! But if the site currently does not care then write the reason why this check can be ignored for this eqp_type in this column.

WORK_GROUP

VARCHAR2(6)

Identifies the workforce on the shift so that we can compare performance of the different shifts. If the same people constantly work the same schedule this is the same as work_period.

WORK_MONTH

VARCHAR2(9)

Name of work month must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_work_month rather than work_month in case we want to change the naming convention for the work_month.

WORK_QUARTER

VARCHAR2(6)

Name of work quarter must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_work_quarter rather than work_quarter in case we want to change the naming convention for the work_quarter.

WORK_WEEK

VARCHAR2(7)

Name of work week must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere.

WORK_YEAR

VARCHAR2(6)

Name of work year must be unique and can be in any format as long as it is display friendly since this is what we show everywhere. We prefer that other tables should reference start_work_year rather than work_year in case we want to change the naming convention for the work_year.

WORST_24_HEALTH

NUMBER(4

The worst measurement of health over the last 24 hours.

YNA_CHILD_LOT

VARCHAR2(3)

Lots that are defined as child lots with a value of YES or NO will be tagged or never be tagged depending on the condition type selected.

YNA_FIRST_LOT_IN_JOB

VARCHAR2(3)

Lots that are defined as first lot in job with a value of YES or NO will be tagged or never be tagged depending on the condition type selected.

ZONE

VARCHAR2(1)

A zone belongs to a main tool similar to a chamber but unlike a chamber a zone does not have a state. Instead zones are only used for lot-based tool assignments based on the ZONES_ALLOWED column. Zones are mostly commonly used on furnaces which typically have either four or six zones (also referred to as boats) and some sensitive recipes can be inhibited from processing on certain zones due to optimal temperature requirements. Similar to the CH column in EQP_CHAMBERS, each zone must be a single character for easy parsing of the ZONES_ALLOWED column.